Contending with Change: Reviewing Tertiary Education in the English-Speaking Caribbean (Final Version) Glenford D. Howe Research Officer Office of the Board for Non-Campus Countries & Distance Education University of the West Indies January 2003 The International Institute for Higher Education in Latin America and the Caribbean (IESALC), UNESCO Caracas, Venezuela As the 21st century opens, tertiary education is facing unprecedented challenges, arising from the convergent impacts of globalization, the increasing importance of knowledge as a principal driver of growth, and the information and communication revolution. But opportunities are emerging from these challenges. The role of education in general, and of tertiary education in particular, is now more influential than ever in the construction of knowledge economies and democratic societies. Tertiary education is indeed central to the creation of the intellectual capacity on which knowledge production and utilization depend and to the promotion of the lifelong-learning practices necessary for updating people’s knowledge and skills. At the same time, new types of tertiary institutions and new forms of competition are appearing, inducing traditional institutions to change their modes of operation and delivery and take advantage of the opportunities offered by the new information and communication technologies..... In response to these momentous and converging trends in the environment, a number of countries have undertaken significant transformations of their tertiary education systems, including changes in patterns of financing and governance, growing institutional differentiation, the creation of evaluation and accreditation mechanisms, curriculum reforms, and technological innovations. But progress has been uneven, and sharp contrasts remain between and within tertiary education systems worldwide. World Bank: “Constructing Knowledge Societies 2002" TABLE OF CONTENTS Acknowledgments List of Abbreviations Executive Summary Chapter 1 - The Context of Change in Caribbean Higher Education 1.1 Introduction 1.2 Education in the Context of Development 1.3 Global Imperatives and Challenges to Regional Education Chapter 2 - Access to Tertiary Education Section 1 Development & Characteristics of Post Secondary/Undergraduate Education 2.1 The Early Emergence of Educational Opportunities 2.2 The Post Emancipation/Colonial Era 1834-1960s 2.3 Nature and Content of Colonial Education 2.4 Post-War Expansion of Educational Opportunities 2.5 The Crisis of the 1980s and Regeneration in the 1990s 2.6 Systems-wide Educational Reforms since the 1990s 2.6.1 - Example 1: Impact in the World Conference on Higher Education 2.6.2 - Example 2: CDB/IADB and UWI Development 2.7 Defining Tertiary Education 2.8 Scale of Regional Participation in Tertiary Education 2.9 Current Structure of Tertiary Education in the Region 2.10 Articulation and Collaboration Section 2 UWI and Tertiary Education Provision: A Case Study 2.11 Changing Characteristics of the Demand for Tertiary Education 2.12 UWI Undergraduate Enrollment Patterns 2000/2001 2.12.1 UWI Student Registrations 2.12.2 Full-Time Equivalent (FTE) Registrations 2.12.3 Full-time and Part-time Registrations 2.12.4 Gender 2.12.5 Student Registration by Faculty and Programme 2.12.6 Geographical Distribution of Students 2.12.7 Access for Students with Disabilities 2.12.8 Access for Mature Students Section 3 Rationalisation for Greater Access: Case Study of Barbados 2.13 Local and Regional Imperatives for Rationalisation 2.14 Barbados’ Public Tertiary Education Sector 2.15 Demand for and Access to Tertiary Education in Barbados 2.16 Rationalisation and the Establishment of a University College of Barbados Section 4 Privatization and Tertiary Education Sector Section 5 Continuing and Lifelong Learning Opportunities 2.17 New Programme Development 2.17.1 Certificate in Labour Studies 2.17.2 Certificate in Offshore Finance and Trust Management 2.17.3 Certificate in Human Resources Management 2.17.4 Certificate in Immigration Studies 2.17.5 The Dental Auxiliary Training Programme 2.17.6 Associate Degree in Public Sector Management 2.17.7 Adult Education Transition Programme 2.18 Programme Review 2.19 Scholars and Artistes in Residence in Non-Campus Countries Section 6 Graduate Studies and Research 2.20 Constraints on Expansion and Quality of Graduate Studies at UWI 2.21 Towards a More Effective and Vibrant Graduate Studies Programme 2.22 Conclusion Chapter 3 -ICR and Expansion of Tertiary Education Providers 3.1 Introduction Section 1 Distance Education at the UWI 3.2 Origins, Rationale and Early Initiatives 1978-1983 3.3 OUS and UWIDITE 1983-1992 3.4 A New Dispensation, 1992-Present 3.5 The Future of Distance Education Section 2 Foreign Tertiary Providers in the Region 3.6 Some Considerations for the Future Chapter 4 - Governance, Innovations & International Cooperation 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Definition and Configuration of Governance Section 1 The Crisis of Governance 4.3 Evolution of Governance at the UWI 4.4 Different Bottles, Same Wine?: Examples from St. Lucia, Dominica, Belize and Jamaica 4.4.1 Sir Arthur Lewis Community College 4.4.2 Dominica: Towards a Dominica College 4.4.3 Challenges of Technical and Vocational Training in Belize 4.4.5 Form College to University Status: The Challenges of Change of UTECH, Jamaica 4.5 The Era of Change: The UWI Experience 4.6 ICR Enabling Innovations at the UWI 4.7 Future Prospects and Threats to Governance 4.8 Scourges of HIV/AIDS and Violence Section 3 Collaboration and International Collaboration 4.9 Case Study of UWI Collaborative Initiatives 4.10 Scope of UWI Collaborative Relationships 4.10.1 International Links 4.10.2 Regional Links 4.10.3 UWI Student Exchanges 4.11 Future Challenges and Possibilities for International Collaboration Chapter 5 - The Challenges of Relevance, Quality and Sustainable Financing Section 1 Relevance and Caribbean Development Challenges 5.1 Research and Development: Examples of Relevance in Action 5.1.1 Example 1: The Challenge of Agriculture Development: CARDI and MPRG A: CARDI B: The Micobial Pathogenicity Research Group (MPRG) 5.1.2 Example 2: Meeting the Challenge of Chronic and Epidemic Diseases: The CDRC 5.1.3 Example 3: The Natural Disasters Threat: role of the Seismic Research Unit 5.1.4 Example 4: Barbados’s Edutech 2000 Initiative and the UWI’s Education Evaluation Centre 5.2 Quality and Relevance 5.3 Evolution of Quality Mechanism in the Caribbean 5.4 The Development of the UWI Quality Assurance Unit 5.5 Future Considerations for Relevance and Quality Assurance in the Region 5.5.1 The Future of Relevance and Research 5.5.2 The Future of Quality Assurance Section 3 Towards Sustainable Financing 5.6 Regional Economic Travials and UWI Financing Woes 5.7 Impact of the Crisis on the UWI 5.8 Recommendations of the Chancellor’s Commission 5.9 UWI’s Response to Crisis and Search for Sustainability 5.10 Resolving Inequities in Regional Access 5.10.1 The Case of the OECS /Non-Campus Countries 5.11 Conclusions and Future Prospects for Financing Appendix 1 - Declaration about Higher Education in Latin America and the Caribbean Appendix 2 - List of Major Anglophone Caribbean Tertiary Education Providers Appendix 3 - Categorization of Main Foreign Institutions Operating in the Caribbean Appendix 4 - Tertiary Education and Related Educational Statistics Bibliography Acknowledgments The task of fashioning an overview of tertiary education in the English-speaking Caribbean could have been an onerous one without the kind support and help provided by a number of individuals, institutions and governments. In this regard I express sincere thanks to the CARICOM Secretariat, the Caribbean Development Bank, the Inter-American Development Bank, the World Bank, UNESCO, the Centre for Management Development, MIND, BIMAP, the various Ministries of Education, as well as officials from the national and community colleges around the region. A number of units and departments within the University of the West Indies including the TLIU, SCS, the Offices of the Registrars, the Board for Non-Campus Countries and Distance Education, the Office for Administration and Special Initiatives, the Board for Undergraduate Studies and more particularly, the Quality Assurance Section, the School for Graduate Studies and Research, the Offices of the Bursars, and especially the Office of Planning and the Vice Chancellor’s Office which were particularly helpful, also contributed generously of their time and knowledge. To all these I say a special thank you. To all other colleagues and friends who gave freely and generously of their assistance including Rosemary Jordan, Allison Johnson and Sherry- Ann Toppin, Viviene Roberts, Norma Holder and the many others, I express my sincere thanks. I am also very grateful to the International Institute for Higher Education in Latin America and the Caribbean (IESALC/UNESCO) for giving me the opportunity to conduct this study and presenting it at the consultation held in the Bahamas from October 31 -November 1, 2002, at which time a number of other reports were also discussed. To my family, as always I thank you for your unreserved love and support. God Bless. Glenford D. Howe January 2003 Abbreviations ABE Association of Business Executives ACCA Association of Chartered Certified Accountants ACHEA Association of Caribbean Higher Education Administrators ACP Association of Computer Professionals ACTI Association of Caribbean Tertiary Institutions AED Academy for Educational Development AIDS Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome AISOM American International School of Medicine AUC American University of the Caribbean BCC Barbados Community College BIMAP Barbados Institute of Management and Productivity BTTC Belize Teachers Training College BVI British Virgin Islands CAHSU Central America Health Sciences University CAPE Caribbean Advance Proficiency Examinations CARCOST Caribbean Regional Communications Study CARDI Caribbean Agricultural Research and Development Institute CARICOM Caribbean Community CAST College of Arts, Science and Technology CDB Caribbean Development Bank CDRC Chronic Disease Research Centre CGA Certified General Accountants (Canada) CICHE Committee for International Cooperation in Higher Education CII Chartered Insurance Institute CIM Chartered Institute of Marketing CIMA Certified Institute of Management Accounting CMA Certified Management Accountants CMD Centre for Management Development CUSAC Commonwealth Universities Study Abroad Consortium CXC Caribbean Examinations Council DEC Distance Education Centre ECIAF Eastern Caribbean Institute of Agriculture & Forestry ETTC Erdiston Teachers’ Training College FTE Full Time Equivalent GCE General Certificate of Education HIV Human Immunodeficiency Virus HRD Human Resource Development IADB Inter American Development Bank ICR Information and Communication Revolution ICSA Institute of Chartered Secretaries and Administrators IESALC International Institute for Higher Education in Latin America and the Caribbean IMIS Institute for the Management of Information Systems LANs Local Area Networks M.Phil Masters of Philosophy MD Doctor of Medicine MIND Management Institute for National Development (Jamaica) MPRG The Microbial Pathogenicity Research Group MUA Medical University of the Americas NAFTA North American Free Trade Agreement NASA National Aeronautics and Space Administration NCCs Non-Campus Countries NGO Non-Governmental Organization OECD Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development OECS Organization of Eastern Caribbean States OUS Office of University Services PhD Doctor of Philosophy PUCMM Pontifica Universidad Catolica Madre y Maestra PVC Pro-Vice Chancellor ROYTEC Royal Bank Institute of Business and Technology SCME Standing Committee of Ministers Responsible for Education (CARICOM) SCS School of Continuing Studies (UWI) SJPP Samuel Jackman Prescod Polytechnic TLIU Tertiary Level Institutions Unit TTHTI Trinidad and Tobago Hospitality and Tourism Institute TVET Technical and Vocational Education and Training UAC University Academic Committee UB University of Belize UCB University College of Barbados UCB University College of Belize UG University of Guyana UHSA University of Health Sciences UK United Kingdom UNDP United Nations Development Programme UNICA Association of Caribbean Universities and Research Institutes UNPHU Universidad Nacional Pedro Henriquez Urena UPEC UWI Planning and Estimates Committee USA United States of America USAID United States Agency for International Development UTECH University of Technology (Jamaica) UVI University of the Virgin Islands UWI University of the West Indies UWIDEC University of the West Indies Distance Education Centre UWIDITE University of the West Indies Distance Teaching Experiment VSAT Video Satellite WAN Wide Area Network WTO World Trade Organization Executive Summary The Scope and Task of the Study This review of tertiary education in the region was requested by the International Institute for Higher Education in Latin America and the Caribbean (IESALC). The project aimed to provide a better understanding of the evolution, present situation, and prospects of higher/tertiary education systems in a number of the English-speaking Caribbean countries namely, Antigua & Barbuda, The Bahamas, Barbados, Dominica, Grenada, Jamaica, Montserrat, St. Kitts & Nevis, St. Lucia, St Vincent & the Grenadines, and Trinidad & Tobago. Although it was recognized that the University of the West Indies (UWI) was the main higher education institution in this region IESALC requested that the study should as far as possible also examine trends pertaining to the many other post-secondary and non-university institutions in the region, that is, both private and public. The key issues which were to be examined included: access and coverage of student population, and equity of access; quality of education; relevance of education; management of institutions and national systems; lifelong education; governance of institutions; financial sustainability; innovations, reforms and recent developments programmes; international cooperation; and future development plans. The researcher conducting the study was given the flexibility to organize the issues as he thought best in order to produce an integrated product as opposed to a mechanistically written document following prescribed themes. The approach therefore adopted was to try to identify and analyze the evolution of the different national systems of tertiary education, as well as the recent and current trends in a comparative manner, to the extent that this was possible given the unevenness in quantity and quality of data available for the different countries. The University of the West Indies (UWI) features prominently in the discussion since that institution was used as a point of reference and comparison with other tertiary institutions, and also because its relatively longer existence meant that many of the trends, issues, problems and challenges facing tertiary education today are being dramatically played out at the UWI, an institution which the Caribbean governments have designated as the regional university, and given a specific developmental and leadership mandate within the region. A Note on Geographical Definitions Throughout this document various geographical and institutional groupings of regional countries are mentioned, all of which include the countries which are the focus of this study. There is thus a need to explain which countries constitute the various groupings mentioned. 1. The Caribbean Community (CARICOM): This organization which is based in Guyana, consists of Antigua & Barbuda, Belize, Guyana, Montserrat, St. Vincent & the Grenadines, The Bahamas, Dominica, Haiti, St Kitts& Nevis, Suriname, Barbados, Grenada, Jamaica, St. Lucia, and Trinidad & Tobago. Its associate members include Anguilla, The British Virgin Islands, and the Turks & Caicos Islands. There are also a number of countries which have observer status, including Aruba, Columbia, Netherlands Antilles, Bermuda, Dominican Republic, Puerto Rico, The Cayman Islands, Mexico, and Venezuela. 2. The Organization of Eastern Caribbean States (OECS): Headquartered in St Lucia, this sub- regional grouping is made up of St. Lucia, Anguilla, Antigua & Barbuda, British Virgin Islands, Dominica, Grenada, Montserrat, St. Kitts & Nevis, and St Vincent and the Grenadines. 3. Non-Campus Countries (NCCs): Sixteen countries currently contribute financially to the University of the West Indies. Three of these countries possess full campuses, namely, the St. Augustine campus in Trinidad, the Mona campus in Jamaica, and the Cave Hill campus in Barbados. The University’s physical presence in the other thirteen countries is through units or centres of its School of Continuing Studies with headquarters on the Mona campus in Jamaica. The non-campus countries are Anguilla, Antigua & Barbuda, the Bahamas, Belize, British Virgin Islands, Cayman Islands, Dominica, Grenada, Montserrat, St. Kitts & Nevis, St. Lucia, St. Vincent & the Grenadines, and the Turks & Caicos Islands. 13 4. The English-Speaking Caribbean also termed the Commonwealth Caribbean. This geographical/ cultural/linguistic categorization includes Belize, the Bahamas, the Cayman Islands, Turks & Caicos Islands, Jamaica, the British Virgin Islands, Anguilla, Antigua & Barbuda, St Kitts & Nevis, Montserrat, Dominica, St Lucia, Barbados, St. Vincent & the Grenadines, Grenada, Trinidad & Tobago, and Guyana. 14 Summary of Chapters Chapter One All Caribbean countries are today recognizing the need to make decisive adjustments to more effectively cope with the effects of globalization. Many of these societies are in transition from being primarily producers of goods to societies in which information and the means of knowledge production, processing, and transfer predominate. There is thus a realization of the need for Caribbean human resources development strategies to reflect this growing importance of knowledge in national development approaches. Chapter Two Greater access to tertiary education is increasingly being acknowledged globally and in the Caribbean as being a major ingredient if countries want to achieve maximum and sustainable national development, growth and social cohesiveness. However, in the context of the Caribbean it is recognized that tertiary enrollment rates are far too low to achieve sustainable national development, a fact made clear when the region’s tertiary enrollment rates are compared with countries in the developed world. New strategies of lifelong learning and a general democratization of access to tertiary education are thus regarded as urgent requirements and imperatives for Caribbean nations in the twenty-first century. Chapter Three The information and communication revolution has generated tremendous challenges and opportunities for tertiary education institutions and provision in the region. Institutions such as the UWI, among others, have been grappling with the challenge of utilizing new distance education teaching and learning modalities to increase access to tertiary education and training, and also to meet the new training requirements of the labour force and knowledge-based economies in a timely manner. But indigenous Caribbean educational institutions are not the only players in the Caribbean tertiary education sector. Many foreign institutions, over seventy of them, are also more than ever before seeking to become major educational providers in the region 15 as part of their efforts at internationalization, and search for profits. Among the fundamental questions which now need to be answered are those pertaining to the interface of the activities of all the different educational players, both private and public, and how will they change, over the long term, the face of tertiary education provision in the region. Chapter Four Good governance, innovations and international cooperation must necessarily be at the heart of regional efforts to respond effectively to the social, political and economic changes being produced by the forces of globalization. Educational institutions are challenged to be at the forefront in each of these areas if sustainable national development is to be attained. This requires fundamental reconsideration in their relationship with their multiple stakeholders including the state, students, staff, industry, their alumni, as well as with other tertiary institutions locally, regionally and globally. Tertiary educational institutions are now required to be more transparent and accountable in all their operations and relationships. Chapter Five The environment in which tertiary education institutions now operate demand that they increasingly become self-financing, relying less and less on support from the governments in the region, many of which lack the necessary resources to support the changes needed for maximum development of the region’s human resources. However, if these educational institutions wish to achieve sustainability they must necessarily seek to improve the quality and relevance of their programmes. This is a challenge not only for traditional public tertiary institutions, but also for the newly emerging private ones as well. Without excellence in the area of quality and an enduring commitment to remaining relevant to the changing needs of educating and training citizens, the very existence of these institutions will be threatened, and national development undermined. 16 Chapter 1 The Context of Change in Caribbean Higher Education Locating the prospects of higher education in the Commonwealth Caribbean against the background of developments in the wider world is particularly useful at this time when the phenomenon known as globalization is being seen as the cause, occasion and result of what is otherwise termed the knowledge economy. The university and related institutions of higher learning, as generators and transmitters of knowledge, find themselves at the heart not only of the discourse but also of meaningful plans of action targeting the development process and its relation to the human resource as well as the paradigm shifts and quixotic changes attendant on the new situation. (Rex Nettleford, Vice Chancellor, UWI) 1.1 Introduction Today, the Caribbean and the rest of the world are experiencing the full-blown effects of the new globalized economic order bolstered by neo-liberal economic philosophies very evident in, for example, the rise of ‘borderless’ transnational/multinational corporations, the creation of powerful trading arrangements such as the North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA), the increasing homogenization of culture, the multi-skilled employee, as well as revolutionizing technologies such as the Internet. Societies are in transition from being primarily producers of goods to societies in which information and the means of knowledge production, processing, and transfer predominate. National and regional outlooks are as a result being transformed or superseded (albeit not without contestation) by global visions and perspectives, a fact which has had direct implications for the most personal aspects of the lives of Caribbean citizens. In this new and exciting environment organizations, not least educational ones, are faced with the challenge of changing and adapting in order to prepare for, and spearhead, the entry and prosperity of their respective nation states into the new, highly competitive and uncertain 17 international socio-economic and political environment. Worldwide, it has now become a compelling imperative that tertiary institutions engage in mutually beneficial dialogue, practical cooperation, and adopt strategies to effectively deal with the challenges of change, its attendant uncertainties, as well as position themselves to optimally exploit the manifold possibilities for new and exciting opportunities. It is not surprising then that at this early juncture in the new millennium, the University of the West Indies (UWI) and the other tertiary institutions in the region, as with similar educational institutions throughout the world, are embarking on profound changes under the impetus of the forces of globalization and the corresponding need, in particular, to internationalize their structures, practices and services, as well as embrace new educational technologies and instructional modalities emanating from the revolution in electronics and informatics. In the Caribbean, as elsewhere, there exist a certain degree of consensus, by no means unchallenged, that the education system, both its formal and non-formal aspects, is the primary institutional mechanism through which the development and utilization of human resources, and consequently national development, might be achieved and maximized. This is so in spite of the fact that there is as yet no clear consensus among academics or practitioners on the meaning, nature and dimensions of the notion of development, especially as it relates to the developing world. The word development remains an ambiguous concept, one often clouded with political and ideological overtones, and while it is increasingly viewed as being a multidimensional concept (as opposed to a one-dimensional economic one) very few attempts have been made to investigate the interrelationships between, for example, the economic, cultural, ideological, political, and other dimensions, notwithstanding the outstanding efforts of the various UNDP Human Development Reports, initially developed under the brilliant leadership of the late Mahbub ul Haq. Not surprisingly then, the belief that education is an integral part of development is still imperfectly understood, and still undergoing critical analysis and reassessment. Nevertheless, under the impetus of nationalist aspirations, the belief that education could lead to improvements in living conditions, funding from UNESCO, the World Bank, and other international agencies, and the strengthening influence of human capital theory, governments in the Caribbean and other 18 parts of the developing world allocated greater portions of their national budget to education. 1.2 Education in the Context of Development Until the late 1950s and the early 1960s it was usual, at least among most economists, to conclude that the various forms of physical and financial capital including land, labour, gold and the like, were the key resources to be exploited or developed in order to maximize national development. In recent times, however, as Todaro correctly observes, “most economists would probably agree that it is the human resources/capital of a nation that ultimately determines the character and pace of its economic and social development”.1 Nancy Birdsall of the Inter- American Development Bank (IADB) elaborates: Education, the most easily measured form of human capital, is, like land and other forms of wealth, an asset. In today’s global markets, it is a scarce asset, and can therefore, generate income for its owners. It is a special asset in two respects. First, once acquired, it cannot be stolen or sold– it cannot be alienated from its owners. Second, as the amount of education increases, other assets such as land and physical capital decline as a proportion of total wealth in an economy; since the ownership of these latter assets is usually more concentrated than that of education, the overall concentration of all assets declines. Thus, an increase in education is likely to have an equalizing effect as long as it is broadly distributed.2 Some may argue, perhaps with a degree of justification, that in contemporary Caribbean societies, as indeed globally, the primary function of education seems to be increasingly heavily biased towards making citizens more efficient in commodity production. However, as Anne Case of Princeton University has pointed out, “the primacy of education in the development process stems not only from the fundamental role of education in production, but also from the many and varied ways in which education enhances the quality of life and, in turn, promotes and sustains development... in income generation, in the promotion of health status, and in the reduction of 1 Michael P. Todaro, Economic Development in the Third World (4th edition) New York & London: Longman, 1990, p.330. 2. Nancy Birdsall, “Education: the People’s Asset”, paper prepared for the workshop “Asset Distribution, Poverty and economic Growth: Theory, Empirical Evidence, and Policy Implications. Ministry of Land Reform, Brazil with the University of Brasilia, and co-sponsored by the World Bank, July 14-17, 1998. 19 fertility- all of which contribute to sustained development and justify education a place in the core agenda of the World Bank.”3 Indeed, in the context of the Caribbean the difference in relative scale and nature of the investments in human capital development, over time, is one of the explanations which has been given by some economists to explain the relatively more stable and dynamic growth and development of the Barbadian economy in contrast to the historically more turbulent experiences of, for example, Jamaica which is strikingly richer in natural resources such as bauxite and timber, among other things.4 Frederick H. Harbison, has also argued that human resources are the ultimate basis of the wealth of nations and therefore the “goals of development are the maximum possible utilization of human beings in productive activity and the fullest possible development of the skills, knowledge and capacities of the labour force”.5 Human resources, according to Harbison, comprise “the energies, skills, talent, and knowledge of people which are, or which potentially can or should be, applied to the production of goods or the rendering of useful services for the social, political, cultural and economic development of nations”.6 Crucially, however, underutilization of human resources is regarded by Harbison as the most serious and intractable problem facing less developed countries, and is manifested in the form of open unemployment, underemployment, disguised unemployment and mal-unemployment. The key dimensions of the human resource problem in developing countries such as those in the Caribbean, relate firstly to the underdevelopment (or persistent use below its potential socio-economic development) of skills, knowledge, and talents of persons in the labour force, and secondly, to those stemming from underutilization of their energies and capabilities. 3. Anne Case, The Primacy of Education. Paper prepared under the auspices of the Research Programme in Development Studies, Princeton University, June 2001, p.1 4. Havelock Ross-Brewster, “Social capital and development: Reflections on Barbados and Jamaica”, Barbados Economic report 1995, produced for the Ministry of Finance and Economic Affairs, May 1996 5 Frederick H. Harbison, Human Resources as the Wealth of Nations, New York: Oxford University Press, 1973. (Preface). 6 Ibid., p.3. 20 Although possessing or exhibiting distinct characteristics or manifestations these dimensions of the human resource problem are often, especially in the developing world, interrelated, as the underdevelopment of human resources is to some extent a cause of underutilization and vice versa. The task of conceptualizing the problem becomes additionally difficult and problematic given that there is still no comprehensive indicator of human resources development, that is, no accepted yardstick for measuring the development and utilization of human resources.7 Even more troubling and more fundamental, there are those authors like Chinapah et al., who argue with justification, that there is need for a reinterpretation of the notion of human resources and their development, which would encompass a much wider range of human competence than those that are relevant to productive work in the economic sector. A new conceptualization should instead include those resources and skills which human beings need to protect and improve people’s health, to keep population growth within reasonable limits, to sustain and develop cultural traditions and identities, to enjoy recreational activities, to put nutritional resources to the best possible use, to preserve a less hazardous and endangered environment, and to assume and play an active role as a citizen.8 Despite the recognition that education is vital to national development, it has now become fashionable for some academics and policy makers to speak about the “crisis in education” and its apparent failure to meaningfully contribute to the real needs of social, economic and overall national development. Studies have shown that the educational system of many developing nations such as those in Latin America rather than fostering justice and equity function to increase rather than decrease income inequalities.9 Not surprising, in some quarters a powerful challenge 7 Ibid. pp.12-13. 8 Vinayagum Chinapah, Jan-Ingvar Lofstedt and Hans Weiler, ‘Integrated Development of Human Resources and Educational Planning’, UNESCO, Quarterly Review of Education, vol. X1X, no 1, 1989, p.12. 9. See for example, PREAL. The Future at Stake. Report of the Task Force on Education, Equity and Economic Competitiveness in Latin America and the Caribbean, Washington DC: Partnership for Educational Revitalization in the Americas, April 1998. 21 has been mounted especially against the “cult of formal education” as Todaro10 explains: After almost three decades of rapidly expanding enrollments and hundreds of billions of dollars of educational expenditure, the plight of the average citizen in many parts of Asia, Africa, and Latin America seems little improved. Absolute poverty is chronic and pervasive. Economic disparities between rich and poor widen with each passing year. Unemployment and underemployment have reached staggering proportions, with the “educated” increasingly swelling the ranks of those without jobs.... many of the early claims made on behalf of unfettered quantitative expansion of educational opportunities-- that it would accelerate economic growth; that it would raise levels of living especially for the poor; that it would generate wide-spread and equal employment opportunities for all; that it would acculturate diverse ethnic or tribal groups; and that it would encourage “modern” attitudes-- have been shown to be greatly exaggerated and, in many instances simply false. As a result there has been a growing awareness in many developing nations that the expansion of formal schooling is not always to be equated with the spread of learning; that the acquisition of school certificates and higher degrees is not necessarily associated with improved ability to undertake productive work; that education oriented almost entirely toward preparation for work in the modern urban sector can greatly distort student aspirations.... To make matters worse, as finances and resources shrink there has been a corresponding increase in competition for scarce resources not only between education and other sectors of the economy but within the educational sector itself, due in part to influential World Bank studies and funding policy orientation. During the 1970s and 1980s Rate- of- Return analysts produced empirical, but now highly controversial and heavily criticized, studies showing that the private and the social rates of return to investment in education were the highest at the primary levels. These analyses exerted powerful influence on education systems worldwide, and the evidence on the surface, as well as the social returns on investments in primary and secondary education over time, seemed to confirm the value of these studies. Over several decades countries around the world were able to significantly raise their literacy rates through massive expansion of access to primary and secondary education. These achievements were certainly quite dramatic in the Anglophone Caribbean. As Edwin Carrington, Secretary-General of CARICOM has observed: 10 Todaro, Economic Development, p.331. 22 The CARICOM member states have improved literacy rates over the last (50) fifty years. Literacy rates reported for CARICOM member states in the Human Development Report 2001, ranged from eighty-two per cent (82%) in St. Vincent and the Grenadines to ninety-seven (97%) in Barbados. These literacy levels correlate with the high enrolment rates at the primary level. With the exception of Haiti, CARICOM has achieved net primary level enrolments rates ranging between eighty-four per cent (84%) in St. Vincent and the Grenadines and one hundred per cent (100%) in Barbados. As a result of these Rate-of-Return analyses most international funding tended to be focused on primary and secondary education arguably to the detriment of higher education. However, as the relatively recent World Bank report, Higher Education in Developing Countries: Peril and Promise has noted, there has since been a major turn about in that institution’s position on the relative importance of higher education. While recognizing the major importance of investment in primary and secondary education, the report was critical of the Rate- of- Return perspective on higher education. It noted:11 Rate-of-Return studies treat educated people as valuable only through their higher earnings and the greater tax revenues extracted by society. But educated people clearly have many other effects on society: educated people are well positioned to be economic and social entrepreneurs, having a far reaching impact on the economic and social well-being of their communities. They are also vital to creating an environment in which economic development is possible. Good governance, strong institutions, and a developed infrastructure are all needed if business is to thrive- and none of these is possible without highly educated people. Finally, rate-of-return analysis entirely misses the impact of university-based research on the economy---- a far-reaching social benefit that is at the heart of any argument for developing strong higher education systems. Despite the manner in which higher education support and funding has been stymied in the past the notion that higher education is a major key to fostering national development has been gaining greater acceptance, not so much perhaps because of fault lines in the rate-of-return analyses, as perhaps more so in other evidence which seems to support the argument giving primacy to the importance of higher education. Many economists and education analysts now 11. World Bank. Higher Education in Developing Countries. Peril and Promise. Washington DC: World Bank Task Force on Higher Education and Society, 2000,p.39 23 believe that the successes of the countries of East Asia have in no small way been due to the fact that they possess well educated workforces. But the arguments in favour of providing more support for tertiary education have more than an economic basis. The World Bank expresses the complex and integrated benefits of tertiary education’s value to national development quite nicely:12 Tertiary education institutions have a critical role in supporting knowledge-driven economic growth strategies and the construction of democratic, socially cohesive societies. Tertiary education assists the improvement of the institutional regime through the training of competent and responsible professionals needed for sound macroeconomic and public sector management. Its academic and research activities provide crucial support for the national innovation system. And tertiary institutions often constitute the backbone of a country’s information infrastructure, in their role as repositories and conduits of information (through libraries and the like), computer networks hosts, and Internet service providers. In addition, the norms, values, attitudes, and ethics that tertiary institutions impart to students are the foundation of the social capital necessary for constructing healthy civil societies and cohesive cultures- the very bedrock of good governance and democratic political systems..... Through the transmission of democratic values and cultural norms, tertiary education contributes to the promotion of civic behaviours, nation building, and social cohesion. This, in turn, supports the construction and strengthening of social capital, generally understood as the benefits of membership in a social network that can provide access to resources, guarantee accountability, and serve as a safety net in time of crisis. The institutions, relationships, and norms that emerge from tertiary education are instrumental in influencing the quality of a society’s interactions, which underpin economic, political, and social development. Universities and other tertiary institutions are the cross-roads for social cooperation, which can foster strong networks, stimulate voluntary activity, and promote extracurricular learning and innovation. Other influential international education agencies such as UNESCO have also been expressing strong support for increased attention to higher education as an important driving force of development, and most certainly the forerunner in knowledge generation for development, 12. World Bank. Constructing Knowledge Societies: New Challenges for Tertiary Education. Washington, DC: The World Bank, 2002, pp.23 & 31. 24 especially in developing countries. This developmental function of universities in the developing world was well expressed by the UNESCO International Commission on Education which observed: No where is the universities’ responsibility for the development of society as a whole more acute than in developing countries, where research done in institutions of higher learning plays a pivotal role in providing the basis for development programmes, policy formulation and the training of middle- and higher-level human resources. The importance of local and national institutions in raising the developmental levels of their countries cannot be overemphasized. Much of the responsibility for building bridges between the developed, industrialized countries and the developing, non-industrialized countries rests with them.13 The UWI as the designated regional university has been mandated by the governments of the region to facilitate the growth and development of the region and its people.14 It is expected to unlock West Indian potential for economic and cultural growth through the provision of high quality teaching and research aimed at meeting critical regional needs.15 The symbolic and functional importance of the UWI has been well summarized by the 1994 Chancellor’s Commission16 which noted: To the peoples of the countries of the Commonwealth Caribbean, the University of the West Indies is as much symbol as it is institution. It is regarded not simply as a repository of knowledge but as a beacon for future accomplishments... It remains today one of the two entities which enjoy a reputation as being regionally representative. Both in function and in promise, the importance of the UWI to the future of the West Indies cannot be overstated. Should the University not fulfil the high expectations of its constituents, the well-being of the peoples resident here 13. Delores, Jacques, Learning: the Treasure Within. Report to UNESCO of the International Commission on Education for the Twenty First Century. Paris: UNESCO: 1996, pp.131-132. 14 The University of the West Indies, Strategic Plan 1997-2002, Revised March 1, 1997, p.9. 15 UWI, Unlocking the Potential of a Region, Kingston Jamaica: Lithographic Printers Ltd, 1996/97. p.1. 16 A New Structure: The Regional University in the 1990s and Beyond: Report of the Chancellor’s Commission on the Governance of the UWI, (Co-Chairmen Neville V. Nicholls and Ivan L. Head, (July 1994), p.8. 25 and the quality of their societies will unquestionably deteriorate. This important role of the University was also acknowledged in the context of the Grand Anse Declaration, whereby Caribbean governments “in examining the long-term prospects for development, articulated recognition of the primary importance of human resource development and the expansion of scientific and technological capability to the modernization of the regional economy, and of the special value of human resource development in the exploitation of new opportunities arising in the services sector through the development of information technology.”17 In this role the UWI as well as the other tertiary level institutions, both private and public, are in step with the thinking that as the twenty-first century evolves organizations may be well placed to effect unanticipated advances for society, and to resolve the most complex problems by virtue of their ability to mobilize resources and transcend to some degree political boundaries.18 The manifold stakeholders in the regional tertiary institutions, who include the governments, private sectors, students and parents, all have high expectations with respect to the UWI and the other tertiary institutions’ capacity to optimally perform their developmental role, but many recognize the difficult task ahead consequent on the increasingly complex global environment in which these institutions now operate. 1.3 Global Imperatives and Challenges to Regional Education Caribbean countries, like all others globally, now face three major but interconnected challenges, namely globalization, the growing importance of knowledge as the engine of economic development and national prosperity, and the impacts of the information and communication revolution, all of which have striking implications for their educational institutions and systems. Everywhere, educational policy debates are embedded and infused with the imagery, jargon, expectations and misapprehensions of globalization, and these debates are increasingly having profound impacts on educational practice and action. Globalization however conceptualized and 17 Ibid, p.51. 18 Gill Hickman, Transforming Organizations to Transform Society, Jepson School of Leadership Studies, Richmond Virginia, 1995. 26 perceived is now widely regarded as posing the most fundamental challenge to education, and how its role is defined in the twenty-first century. All the changes in education are however being undertaken with a certain degree of trepidation, inevitable perhaps, but in this case certainly exacerbated by the fact that while the effects of globalization are everywhere being felt, its actual forces are not always readily discernible, and they often provoke contradictory and oppositional responses. On the one hand, for instance, educational planners and policy makers are being propelled to implement changes at a rapid pace in favour of convergence reflected in growth of global education, but on the other hand they are fearful of losing the indigenous peculiarities of their educational systems through the global homogenization of cultures. As British sociologist and the Director of the London School of Economics, Professor Anthony Giddens has observed, the complex set of processes known as globalization not only pulls upwards but also pushes downwards creating new pressures for local autonomy, including the revival of local cultural identities in different parts of the world.19 They must at once therefore implement changes to facilitate these often conflicting, though by no means mutually exclusive processes or imperatives. While globalization in effect means that countries and their institutions must now operate in a highly competitive global environment, those in developing countries like the Caribbean are often hampered by the dominance of neo-liberal economic philosophies which provide the guiding light for the forces of globalization. These global forces affect all levels of education in a number of ways including causing a reorientation of the goals of public education such as preparing students to be active participants in democratic society and ensuring they acquire the knowledge and skills required to understand, prosper and live harmoniously in their societies. Consequent on the rising influence of multinational companies and the reduction of the nation state’s influence there has been a significant re-orientation in the major goals of public education. To a large extent it is the economic agenda which has become the most distinguishing feature of higher education in recent times. 19. See speech reproduced in the Barbados Sunday Advocate April 18, 1999. 27 A remarkable degree of consensus has emerged among the corporate/multinational business elites, government officials, leaders of higher education institutions and many international agencies that education at all levels, but especially at the higher level must seek as a primary objective to be the main vehicle of achieving and sustaining economic productivity in the new globalized environment. Thus the emphasis on the importance of the multi-skilled and multi- lingual employee and the learning society, not merely for meeting the needs of the multinational corporations and new business environment, but also it is claimed to achieve optimum individual and national competitiveness and success. There is now an overriding emphasis on the economic benefits of education as opposed to the social and cultural dimensions of the educational process which in some ways are treated more as appendages. But perhaps this is not surprising given that as a result of neo-liberal economic policies such as structural adjustment, many countries in the developing world, including most of those in the Caribbean, while recognizing the need to increase the quality and amount of their human resources, find themselves less able to accomplish these goals. The multiple changes produced by globalization have also meant that in modern-day societies knowledge acquisition, and indeed the capacity to learn how to learn, have now taken on an increased importance. The point is well put by Jamil Salmi of the World Bank:20 Economic development is increasingly linked to a nation’s ability to acquire and apply technical and socio-economic knowledge, and the process of globalization is accelerating cheaper labour, and more and more from technical innovations and the competitive use of knowledge. The proportion of goods with a medium-high and high level of technology content in international trade has gone from 33 per cent in 1976 to 54 per cent in 1996. Today, economic growth is as much a process of knowledge accumulation as of capital accumulation. It is estimated that firms devote one-third of their investments to knowledge-based intangibles such as training, research and development, patents, licensing, design and marketing. In this context, economies of scope, derived from the ability to design and offer different products and services with the same technology, are becoming a powerful 20. Jamil Salmi, Tertiary Education in the Twenty-first Century: Challenges and Opportunities, The World Bank, Human Development Department, June 2000, pp.4-5. 28 factor of expansion. In high-technology industries like electronics and telecommunications, economies of scope can be more of a driving force than traditional economies of scale....At the same time, there is a rapid acceleration in the rhythm of creation and dissemination of knowledge, which means that the life span of technologies and products gets progressively shorter and that obsolescence comes more quickly....in addition, in many fields the distance between basic science and technological application is narrowing or, in some cases, disappearing altogether. The implication is that pure and applied research are not separate any longer....This is underlined by a rich body of evidence on the impact of universities on regional development and the spillover effects of academic research on industrial research and technology and local innovation. Finally, the rapid developments now taking place in the areas of information and communication now mean that countries and their institutions can effectively communicate and collaborate with each other and their stakeholders in the shortest possible time, in fact almost instantaneously. This innovation is no where as evident as in the field of education where distance learning technologies are now the norm in many countries as they seek to provide better quality education to more learners. But perhaps the most sinister challenge which globalization poses for the region comes in the way it which trade liberalization and the policies of the World Trade Organization (WTO) have been compounding the vulnerability, and literally undermining the capacity of the small states of the region to channel adequate resources to such areas as health and education. The damaging effects of these policies have been detailed by Edwin Carrington, Secretary General of the Caribbean Community (CARICOM).21 He has observed that as a result of WTO policies the Windward Islands in particular have had their preferential access to traditional banana markets, especially the European market, severely undermined thereby considerably weakening their economies. Indeed, banana exports for the CARICOM region as whole declined from US$193 million in 1992 to US$152 million in 1995 ultimately reaching a low in 2000 of US$97 million. In fact, export earnings for seven of the eleven main products exported by CARICOM countries have experienced decline. Further, as a result of the global trade agreements, imports into the region 21. Edwin Carrington, “Swimming against the tide: Small and micro states in the changing international dynamic”. Feature address delivered by CARICOM Secretary General Edwin Carrington at the relaunching of the Council of External Trade of Saint Lucia 15 August 2002, Castries Saint Lucia. 29 doubled between 1999 and 2000 with the gap in balance of trade widening since imports rose by 39% and exports only by 14 %. Efforts by regional governments to offset these losses through new initiatives including the enhancement of the financial services sector as a means of attracting foreign investments have also encountered severe difficulties as result of the Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD) pressures. Exacerbating the problems of the region is the fact that the Caribbean is now finding it increasingly difficult to access international financial resources from the international private sector as well as the international donor countries and agencies since they have shifted their funding focus to other parts of the world deemed poorer than the Caribbean. Other compounding factors have also been alluded to by Secretary General Carrington who noted:22 The Caribbean has prided itself on the excellent results of its education system. In fact we advertise this factor as one of the attractions of the Region. Our educational standards allow our work force to be easily trained to adapt to the changing global environment. The challenge which we currently face however, is the drain of our skilled resources especially in the health and education sectors through active recruitment drives, especially from certain developed countries. This is occurring at the same time that these countries are making it more difficult and costly for our students to enter their educational facilities as well as at the same time as countries are forced to receive criminals elements with minimum links to the region who are being deported from these countries. The double negative social and economic impact of these policies are currently being seen in many of our Member states as critical institutions- hospitals, schools- are inadequately manned and crime surges. Additionally, the global pandemic of HIV/AIDS is also putting stress on the capacities of regional governments to allocate more resources to education and other sectors. The Caribbean region now has the fastest growing rate of infection in the world, and in many countries HIV/AIDs has become the leading cause of death among young people, thereby negating the investments governments would have made in these young persons through education and training 22. Ibid. 30 opportunities. These multiple challenges and implications are among the major ones which global phenomena present for Caribbean countries and their capacity to build stronger and more relevant tertiary education institutions. Obviously, if tertiary institutions are to achieve the maximum development of the region’s human resources then they must necessarily be characterized by multiple paradigm and perceptual shifts in the next millennium. These new dispensations are urgent requirements if these educational institutions are to be instrumental in turning the region into ‘learning societies’, that is, societies imbued with a strong sense of identity, an enduring desire among citizens to engage in life-long learning, resilience, innovativeness, guile, a capacity to change, and all the other attributes integral to an effective response to a rapidly changing global environment. Any review of the national development plans of the various CARICOM countries, as well as the policy statement of regional institutions, will confirm that they want their education systems and institutions to produce citizens who are not only capable of adjusting to the requirements of the changes in the labour market, but more important who are well-rounded persons capable of sharing the values needed for living together, and for engaging in nation building through active participation in civil society. Perhaps the most explicit statement to this effect has come from CARICOM which has indicated that the ideal Caribbean citizen should possess the following characteristics: • be imbued with a respect for human life • be emotionally secure with a high level of self confidence and self esteem • see ethnic, religious and other diversity as a source of potential strength and richness • be aware of the importance of living in harmony with the environment • have a strong appreciation of family and kinship values, community cohesion, and moral issues • have an informed respect for cultural heritage 31 • demonstrate multiple literacies, independent and critical thinking • demonstrate a positive work ethic • value and display creative imagination in the economic and entrepreneurial spheres and all other areas of life • develop the capacity to create and take advantage of opportunities to control, improve, maintain and promote physical, mental, social and spiritual well being and to contribute to the health and welfare of the community and the country; and • nourish in him/herself and in others, the fullest development of each person’s potential without gender stereotyping, and embraces differences and similarities between females and males as a source of mutual strength. These ideals are deemed by Caribbean policymakers to be vital not only in assisting citizens to integrate in the new global environment but also in helping them to preserve and nurture their identity as a people with a special Caribbean civilization. In essence, educational institutions at all levels, including the tertiary level, are challenged to train and educate young citizens and adults for the ultimate goals of personal, community, national and global fulfillment, security, peace, prosperity and development. The following sections of this document seek to present an overview of how tertiary education institutions and systems in the region have been attempting under public sector and private sector leadership and initiatives, to cross these perceptual thresholds and effect necessary paradigm shifts with respect to, access, quality of education, relevance of education, management and governance of institutions and national systems, lifelong education, financial sustainability, innovations and reforms, international cooperation, and future development plans. It is recognized that these are among the main areas in which interventions are required, and are taking place, as regional educational institutions struggle to remain relevant and dynamic in pursuing the primary development function of higher education in the Caribbean region, namely to unleashed and harness the full potential of every citizen for their personal enhancement and fulfillment as well as the collective good of the region as a whole. The governments of the region recognize that the 32 extent to which these goals are achieved will inevitably influenced the capacity of the citizens of the region not only to lead productive lives, but also to co-exist in harmony and in their respective societies, thereby contributing to world peace and stability. Finally, it should be noted that this study or review of tertiary education in the region has tended to focus more on highlighting processes of change across the region using selected examples, and as such does not pretend to be an authoritative discourse on the peculiarities and particularities of each country in the region. In fact, it may justly be claimed that some countries have not received the degree of attention justified but this is in part due to the fact that other studies are being undertaken focusing on selected countries such as the Bahamas, Guyana, and Suriname. 33 Chapter 2 Access to Tertiary Education We must train every talent we possess or condemn ourselves to poverty”. (Sir Arthur Lewis)1 Not surprisingly, there is ongoing debate throughout the Region, not so much about the principle of economic integration, but about the actual strategies for achieving a viable regional system which would ensure that the expectations of specific countries, communities and various groups, including youth and women, would materialize within a realistic time frame and that requisite benefits would accrue to them. Thus, when our Heads of Government met in Montego Bay [Jamaica] in 1997 and outlined a HRD Strategy for the Region, it was in full recognition of the fact that in order for the countries of the Caribbean to achieve the necessary competitive advantage, a new approach had to be developed. At that time, they were particularly concerned that tertiary level enrolment at under 6 per cent of the adult population in the Caribbean was too low to sustain our development objective. Our 6 per cent level paled in comparison with the over 12 per cent in Latin America, 15 percent in South East Asia and over 20 per cent in Europe and North America. A target of 15 percent by the year 2005 was agreed on to be set for the Region, and at least one country set a national target of 20 per cent by that date. (Secretary General of CARICOM, Edwin Carrington) 1Sir Arthur Lewis, “A Region in Crisis”, in UWI, Unlocking the Potential of a Region, Kingston Jamaica: Lithographic Printers Ltd, 1996/97. 34 Section 1: Development & Characteristics of Post-Secondary/Undergraduate Education 2.1 The Early Emergence of Educational Opportunities2 Prior to the entry of the Europeans in the West Indies there existed no systems of formal education or schooling among the Amerindian populations and there was no need for any such systems. The skills and values necessary to ensure survival and communal life were imparted to successive generations through the institutions of the family as well as through the village collective. Similarly, during the era of slavery education was at least initially, more informal and non-formal among the black slave population, while formal education was more of a reality among the white population, at least those who could afford it. Only about 5% of the West Indian slaves at the point of emancipation in 1834 possessed basic literacy, that is possessed the ability to read and write or understand simple written material and convey coherent and legibly written information. Slaves were generally not thought by their European owners to need any formal education to perform their duties as labourers. Indeed, educating slaves was regarded by slave owners and government officials alike as being a dangerous threat to social order, and the very lives of the whites. Thus where slave education was allowed, especially under the auspices of the established churches, its objectives were to help reinforce the relationship between masters and slaves and more generally instill in them the virtues of obedience and respect for authority. Those free coloureds in slave society who could afford to did, however, try to ensure that their children acquired some degree of formal education, both locally and in the metrople. They were acutely aware that formal education was a main means of moving upwards within the rigidly stratified class and colour conscious West Indian societies. However, despite the expectations of the coloured freed men to be accepted by white society as a result of educational and cultural achievements, they were more often than not never really fully accepted by white society. This was not surprising because as the Jamaican planter, Bryan 2. This introductory historical section first appeared in Glenford Howe, “Our Coming of Age: Historical Reflections on Developments in Anglophone Caribbean Education”, in CARICOM Perspectives: A Century of achievement (Vol2), No.69 June 2000, pp. 36-41 & p.68. 35 Edwards noted in his 1819 publication, “It very frequently happens that the lowest White person, considering himself as greatly superior to the richest and best educated Freeman of colour, will disdain to associate with a person of the latter description, treating him as the Egyptians treated the Israelites, with whom they held it an abomination to eat bread”. In Barbados free coloureds were not permitted in local literary clubs or libraries. Indeed, even white and coloured children who attended the same schools in Europe and became close friends would no longer mix with each other on their return to the West Indies. Roughly 60% of the whites were literate though most of the “landless whites” were illiterates. While the white plantocracy generally opposed the provision of education for non-whites, they themselves, for the most part, were only interested in education for their own children and not for all whites in general, especially the poor whites. Overseas education at some of the most prestigious schools including Oxford, Cambridge and Harvard, was seen by the wealthy whites as a means whereby their children would be able to access the higher echelons of British society, and also symbolized the wealth and status of the West Indian planter. In the main, white females unlike their male counterparts were educated locally in such subjects as music, needle work and other skills deemed necessary to make them good wives and mothers. 2.2 The Post Emancipation/Colonial Era 1834-1960s The ending of slavery however witnessed a significant expansion in the availability of formal education to the ex-slaves, coloureds, poor whites and the Indian population, all of whom formed the lower strata of West Indian society. The main mechanisms through which the spread of formal education was facilitated was the Negro Education Grant. Under the terms of this scheme which was instigated by the British Government and the protestant missionary societies of that country, an annual subsidy of 30,000 pounds sterling was provided between 1835 and 1845 (with a gradual reduction after 1841) to construct schools and pay the salaries of teachers. Though a measly sum this money created the basis for the spread of mass education in the British colonies. Another main provider of elementary schooling in the period after emancipation was the Mico Charity, a non-denominational but protestant oriented educational trust. The Mico Charity schools, apart 36 from providing moral education also taught English and served to spread British values and customs in the colonies. By the 1840s a number of non-denominational or secular schools run by the colonial governments had also emerged in several of the territories. Between emancipation and the 1930s a number of reports were commissioned by local and British officials to investigate the state of education in the West Indies. Among the most notable of these were the Keenan Report of 1869; the Mitchinson Report of 1875; the Lumb Commission Report of 1898; the Mayhew-Marriott Report of 1931-2; the Kandel Report of 1943, and the Irvine Report of 1945. Collectively these reports led to major institutional and curricula advances and changes in regional education. The reports addressed a wide range of issues including the production of text books which focussed on the indigenous history and environments of the islands; compulsory primary and secondary education; the need for “female” education; the need for greater expenditure on primary education; the development of tertiary/university education; the development of island scholarships; and greater efficiency in education management. Further reforms and developments were to be recommended in the aftermath of the disturbances of the 1930s which were investigated by the Moyne Commission in 1938. The recommendations of that commission led to the establishment of a regional planning mechanism labelled the Colonial Development and Welfare, whose mandate was to administer a major imperial grant for the social and economic development of the region. The outbreak of the Second World War led to some degree in implementation of the commission’s far reaching recommendations, but the years after the war saw a rapid expansion in world trade which brought major expansion and benefits to the economies of the trading nations of the Caribbean. As the economies of the region expanded so too did the striving for greater self- government and the need to get rid of Crown Colony government where it existed. Throughout the late 19th and early 20th centuries a number of newspapers and black radicals sought to educate the masses about the need for an education more rooted in the Caribbean experience. 37 2.3 Nature & Content of Colonial Education The provision of Education in the post emancipation era was principally intended to meet the goals of the key stakeholders, including missionaries, the local white oligarchy, and the British Government, involved in the provision of that education. As such, at both the primary and secondary levels religious and moral instruction were essential to the curriculum, as was emphasis on teaching the ex-slaves to accept their place, (as with the lower classes in England), within the existing social and economic structure of the society. However, an even greater goal which shaped the curriculum of the schools in the West Indies was the desire by the British government to ensure that British culture was transferred effectively to the colonies thereby creating the basis for ensuring loyalty between the colonies’ inhabitants and the mother country. Yet, from a functional perspective this process was critical to educated blacks in particular since it enabled them to gain access to those social and economic opportunities such as jobs within the lower echelons of the civil service from which they had been historically excluded. The 'mastering' of the imperial cultural practices allowed the colonial subject to demonstrate his suitability to participate in 'civilized' society. Nevertheless, the education system was also intended to curtail and control the aspirations of blacks. The elites in the colonies whose attitudes were significantly influenced by aspects of Victorian ideology, felt justified in insisting that the various classes of society should be equipped through education for their divinely sanctioned stations and roles in life. This meant that girls of the lower-class were to be instructed in the art of house keeping while the boys were to undergo training to perform the role of labourers primarily for the plantations whose survival were still regarded as crucial to the perpetuation of civilization in the colonies. 2.4 Post-War Expansion of Educational Opportunities After the Second World War to the late seventies Caribbean territories underwent two profound experiences which facilitated major changes in the education curriculum, and the general expansion and improvement of education in the region. One was the further expansion and improvement in regional economies. This was accomplished by focussing mainly on exportable agricultural goods, mining for raw materials, and import substituting manufactures. Even though 38 the development of the economies followed the patterns and ebbs and flows of international trade the general prosperity of the islands allowed them to invest heavily in housing, education and other social services, and unemployment rates fell significantly, as governments became major employers. It did not seem to matter much as several West Indian academics, and others of the “New World” group argued at the time that greater integration into the international economy would increase the level of dependency and vulnerability of Caribbean economies. The other main development to impact in a major way on Caribbean education was the escalation in the nationalist movement which gained momentum especially from the 1930s, during and after the Second World War, but rooted in earlier nationalist philosophies of people like Marcus Garvey. As a consequence of the nationalist enterprise, which was boosted by trade union affiliated parties, by the early 1980s many of the countries had achieved political independence. These included, Trinidad & Tobago (1962); St Vincent (1979); Jamaica (1962); St Lucia (1977); Guyana (1966); Grenada (1974); Belize (1981); Barbados (1966); Antigua (1981); and the Bahamas (1973). In Trinidad, for example, the government under the leadership of Dr Eric Williams believed that many of the problems associated with education and society in general were due to its colonial orientation. As such that government, as with others in the region, made great strides to West Indianize the curriculum and rectify many of the other structural problems in the education system including inequality to access to secondary education, the lack of integration in the teaching service, as well as the dependence on external examination. Throughout the Eastern Caribbean governments began to expand and enhance the capacity of their respective tertiary level institutions including national colleges and community colleges. One of the main failures or oversights of all these reforms was the inadequate attention paid to the increasing marginalization of males in the teaching profession and the corresponding feminization of the profession. Another inadequacy was the failure to really devote as much attention to the area of education and training for agriculture in the light of its critical importance to regional economies, and the stigma attached 39 to it as a result of the slavery experience. Even greater problems were to develop as the region entered the decade of the eighties. 2.5 The Crisis of the 1980s and Regeneration in the 1990s Between the late seventies and especially from the early eighties to the early nineties, most Caribbean states experienced very trying economic times characterized by spiralling inflation and heavy international indebtedness, which impacted quite negatively on all aspect of society especially the social sectors like health and education. In the late 1970s commodity prices and international trade declined sharply resulting in sharp rises in inflation especially from about 1980. Governments were forced to borrow heavily from overseas resulting in burdensome national indebtedness and depletion of foreign exchange used to make interest payments on loans. During this period, known as the Structural Adjustment era, successive International Monetary Fund agreements and loan arrangements from the World Bank forced the various territories to adopt quite painful remedial economic measures. These included devaluation, layoffs, salary cuts, increases in severance and unemployment contributions, decreased benefits, increased taxation, and major cuts in government spending. These measures threatened to reverse the accomplishments of the previous several decades. In Jamaica, for example, expenditure on primary education declined by approximately 30 per cent between 1977 and 1987. This reduction plus the drastic increases in the cost of living made it difficult for both parents and teachers to maintain their commitment to education, and this led to a decline in performance levels and other negative impacts. In the area of education governments were forced to adopt such measures as cutting free text book schemes, reduce spending on school maintenance, and reduce student welfare programmes, among other things. For the first time since the nationalist impetus of the 1950s and 1960s, the perception that free education was the “God given” right of all Caribbean citizens, underwent profound shock and reconsideration. Particularly hard questions were asked of tertiary/higher level education especially in the light of studies by the Rate-of-Return analysts who argued that investments in higher education had a lower rate of return than investment in secondary and especially primary education. 40 By the middle of the nineties however, the region had weathered the worst part of the economic storm and the various stakeholders in education provision were once more able to turn their attention to the task of rectifying the damage of the eighties and begin to create new educational opportunities. The cumulative effects of the measures of the 1980s included an increase in school indiscipline and violence, a fall off in attendance and a general undermining of the human resources of the region. One benefit of the crisis was that it dramatically illustrated the fact that West Indian scholarship and intellectual thought had made significant strides since emancipation. The crisis confirmed the predictions of the New World which had warned of the profound dependency of Caribbean economies and the consequences that would result. Despite the weaknesses in the process of expanding education opportunities and improving the curriculum in the region, as well as the problems associated with the crisis of the 1980s, however, there is no disputing the fact that by the start of the decade of the nineties West Indian education had in many respects come of age. Even though it may be said that the expansion of education in the region was uneven and was guided more by Development Plans than clearly articulated philosophies of education, it nevertheless brought some clear benefits such as the fact that many countries significantly improved their ability to educate and train citizens to fill roles in governments, private sector organizations, the economies, and politics. Driven by concepts as “Education for All” and “Each One Matters”, international and regional developmental agencies such as UNESCO, the World Bank, and the Caribbean Development Bank (CDB) have through systematic collaborative effort and partnerships with regional educational institutions and ministries have been able to produce the exceptionally high levels of literacy as the basis for improving and enhancing the quality and human resources of the region. Even though there continues to be much debate about literacy and literacy rates and the relationship between formal schooling and literacy, as well as one ability to function in today’s society and economy, there can be little quibbling over the assertion that this substantial educating of the peoples of the region as reflected in literacy rates, and the far reaching implications thereof, represent the single most important, alongside achievements in Health, accomplishment in the development of Caribbean societies since the period of slavery. 41 The development, expansion, and blossoming of indigenous educational institutions such as the University of the West Indies (UWI) and the Caribbean Examinations Council (CXC) have made possible major curriculum changes in Caribbean education; changes making the educational experiences and outcomes more directly relevant, meaningful and indigenous to the Caribbean environment. From the establishment of its first campus in Jamaica in 1948 as a result of the Irvine Report the UWI has developed a reputation as being a center of academic excellence capable of producing graduates (such as Sir George Alleyne, Director of the Pan American Health Organization), of the finest quality. Its academics, including St Lucian, Sir Arthur Lewis an economics Nobel Prize winner, Edward Kamua Brathwaite the Barbadian poet, and Hilary Beckles the Barbadian historian, and Rex Nettleford the current Vice Chancellor of the UWI, have also achieved world recognition for their scholarship and contribution to world scholarship and development; a scholarship rooted in the experiences of the Caribbean. Equally important the graduates of the UWI are to be found in key positions in virtually every aspect of leadership in areas of Caribbean economy and society, including several of the current set of regional Prime Ministers. The Caribbean Examinations Council which was established in 1972 by fifteen English-speaking Caribbean countries likewise represents another of the outstanding achievements of West Indian education and intellectual pursuit. Before the establishment of the CXC children wrote secondary school leaving examinations administered by overseas Boards mainly Cambridge and London. The CXC not only replaced these external examination bodies but also provide subject certification for a candidate population of a wider ability range than was catered for under the foreign-based examinations. Now the CXC has gone a step further by launching the Caribbean Advance Proficiency Examinations (CAPE) which are to replace the advanced levels examinations which are set and administered by British Examination Boards. The establishment of CAPE it is hoped will not only further help to better equip students to function in the Caribbean environment, and internationally, but also to help meet the regional challenge of increasing enrollments at the tertiary level, a fundamental component of the region’s developmental strategy. 42 However, while these achievements and triumphs provide a rich context for conceptualizing and grasping the extent to which education contributed to the development of Caribbean societies, they, most especially at this important juncture in our history and development, must also be seen too as laying the basis for Caribbean people to transcend and fully grasp future educational and developmental challenges and opportunities which have since the 1990s in particular become increasing pronounced. Among these major educational challenges is unquestionably that of the massification or democratization of tertiary level education through significantly increased access. 2.6 Systems-wide Educational Reforms Since the 1990s It is always worth bearing in mind that the tertiary sector is an integral part of a wider education system of any country and therefore it is not surprising that reforms at the tertiary level more often than not takes place in the context of system wide adjustments. This link has been explicitly acknowledged by the World Bank:3 Tertiary education plays a key role in supporting basic and secondary education, thereby buttressing the economic externalities produced by these lower levels. Improved tertiary education is necessary for sustainable progress in basic education. The supply of qualified teachers and school leaders, capacity for curriculum design, research on teaching and learning, economic analysis and management- these and many more components of basic education reform are hampered by weak tertiary education systems. A comprehensive approach to the development of the education sector is required, along with a balanced distribution of budgetary resources to ensure that countries invest appropriately in tertiary education....When looking at the public benefits of tertiary education, it is important to note the existence of joint-product effects linked to the complementarity between tertiary education and the lower levels of education.... In the English-speaking Caribbean the changes now occurring in the tertiary sector are being undertaken in the context of reforms throughout all levels of the various national education systems, even though the governments have adopted different approaches to these reforms.4 3. World Bank. Constructing Knowledge Societies: New Challenges for Tertiary Education. Washington DC: The World Bank, 2002, p. xxii. 4. See,Errol Miller (ed.) Educational Reform in the Commonwealth Caribbean. Washington DC: 43 Some countries including Barbados, the Bahamas, Trinidad and Tobago, and the countries of the Organisation of Eastern Caribbean States (OECS), namely, Antigua and Barbuda, Montserrat, St Kitts and Nevis, Dominica, St. Lucia, and St. Vincent and the Grenadines have developed comprehensive reforms strategies and plans emanating out of the consultations of National Commissions, National Task Force or Working Groups. Other countries such as Belize, Guyana, Jamaica and the Turks and Caicos Islands have opted for a more project-driven approach involving specific interventions directed at particular aspects or levels of their education system, but nevertheless undertaking widespread consultations. In spite of differing approaches to the process of reform it is still possible to identity a core set of themes and issues around which the reforms have been centred. These include:5 % Improving the quality of primary education % Modernizing the schools and the classrooms through wider use of technology % Rationalizing secondary education through curriculum reform, restructuring admission and promotion procedures, and greater career guidance % Expanding tertiary education, including the use of the distance education modality, and linking this level of education more closely to the labour force demands, especially in the priority economic sectors such as tourism and hospitality services, financial services, light manufacturing, and agro-industry % Increasing and improving foreign language teaching at the secondary and tertiary levels and linking these to the global market place and tourism % Improving the status, salary, and training of teachers % Restructuring the financing of education to increase cost effectiveness and INTERAMER/Organisation of American States, 1999. 5. Listed in, Errol Miller. “Educational Reform in the Commonwealth Caribbean: An assessment, in Errol Miller (ed.) Educational Reform in the Commonwealth Caribbean. Washington DC: INTERAMER/Organisation of American States, 1999, p.8. 44 including cost recovery, cost sharing, and special taxes to meet educational expenditure % Introducing various value-oriented projects and materials to influence character formation, promote conflict resolution, and influence the development of wholesome and positive attitudes. % Improving the management of schools through the greater involvement of communities and parents and more accountability measures for schools and teachers. % Promoting greater partnerships among communities, the private sector, non- governmental organizations, and the State in the support and delivery of public schooling The effectiveness and outcomes of these reforms have been mixed but Errol Miller has observed the following about them:6 When the reforms of the 1990s are compared with those of the independence period, one glaring point emerges. In some countries, for example Barbados and The Bahamas, the two sets of reforms constitute a continuous, almost evolutionary, progression. The 1990 reforms are an evolutionary and incremental step built upon the previous reforms. This conveys a sense of stability and predictability and the ability to plan long term. In some countries, for example Jamaica and Guyana, some of the reforms represent reversals of previous reforms. Free secondary and tertiary education have been replaced by cost sharing and user fees. This gives the impression of stops and starts in the sequence of educational change, and conveys a sense of instability and uncertainty that harbors short-term commitment. These observations from Miller seem to add credence to the findings of the World Bank that “comprehensive reforms can be more effective than piecemeal ones” and likely to bear more fruits when interventions are integrated into the broad reform programme based on a global change.7 However it should also be borne in mind that “the preference for comprehensiveness does not 6. Errol Miller. “Educational Reform in the Commonwealth Caribbean: An assessment, in Errol Miller (ed.) Educational Reform in the Commonwealth Caribbean. Washington DC: INTERAMER/Organisation of American States, 1999, p.9. 7.World Bank. Constructing Knowledge Societies, p. xxv 45 mean that all aspects of a reform should be packed into a single operation [since] sequencing provides the tools for responding to and adjusting to evolving challenges.”8 Regional bodies including CARICOM have also sought to influence the reforms taking place in the region through their own investigations, consultations, conferences and Task Force. Among these initiatives were the Regional Strategy for Technical and Vocational Education and Training emanating out of CARICOM in 1990. Other regional and international organizations including the Caribbean Development Bank (CDB), the Inter-American Development Bank (IADB), the World Bank, and UNESCO have also been helping to support and influence the education reform processes which have been taking place in the region. Two examples specific to tertiary education will suffice. 2.6.1 Example 1: Impact of the World Conference on Higher Education The World Conference on Higher Education held in 1998 and the consultations which preceded, as well as followed it, helped to clarify and sharpen the focus on a number of issues affecting Caribbean tertiary education, and helped to provide a global picture of how similar concerns and challenges were being tackled in other countries. In fact, it would be true to say that the World Conference on Higher Education highlighted the similarities, as well as differences, of the problems, issues and opportunities facing countries in the developing world, as well as in the developed world thereby revealing the interconnectedness and global nature of educational issues of especially since the 1990s. Among the main issues illuminated by the conference were: % the challenge of meeting the rapid expansion in demand for tertiary education. % how to foster excellence and relevance in research % the task of strengthening institutional management and governance capacities % financing education in sustainable ways, especially in light of the inadequacy of the availability of resources from the state. 8. Ibid. 46 % coping with internationalization. % developing quality assurance mechanisms for training and education % articulation and institutional collaboration % challenges created by globalisation % the need for greater efficiency in the delivery of education services % the role of the teacher in the new information age % the lower achievement of boys across all educational levels % the importance of lifelong learning; and % the need for upgrading and rethinking technical and vocational education 2.6.2 Example 2: CDB/IADB & UWI Development Throughout the decade of the 1980s but especially in the 1990s the UWI has been under severe pressure, both internally and externally, to increase its educational and training capacity, and relevance and to more effectively meet the developmental needs of its contributing member states. Reflective of this need for greater effectiveness and efficiency in its provision of education and training to the region, the UWI’s Ten Year Development Plan and its Strategic Plan for 1997- 2002, articulated a vision in which through profound structural and institutional changes and expansion the University would attempt to meet the challenges of nurturing and developing the human and social capital of the region. Particular emphasis was placed on plans to increase the access of the non-campus countries (NCCs) and rural areas of campus countries to the programmes and resources of the UWI. The plans endorsed the need for a major distance education thrust to help rectify the severe imbalance in access to the UWI, and tertiary education in general, which existed between the people in the campus countries and those in the NCCs. The UWI desperately wanted to reverse a declining trend in student enrollment from the non-campus countries. In 1960/61 students from campus countries comprised 66.5% of the total University enrollment, students from the OECS countries 11.8%, and those from other territories constituted 47 21.7 %. By 1988/89, however, students from the campus countries made up 93.5 % of the total enrollment, while those from the OECS countries and the British Virgin Islands together only comprised 4% of the enrollment, and those from Belize, The Bahamas, Turks and Caicos, and the Cayman Islands made up 1%. This further decline it was recognised was not simply a matter of the prohibitive cost of on-campus study, but also related to a number of other factors, including inadequate student loans schemes in the OECS, and persons commitments to family and work. In 1992/1993 the Caribbean Development Bank (CDB) and the Inter-American Development Bank (IADB) agreed to provide the UWI with development loans of approximately US$82.0 million. US$ 9.1 million of the funds were utilized for a massive expansion and upgrading of the UWI distance education system and programmes aimed at, among other things, significantly broadening access (especially in the non-campus countries) to university level education. With the university attempting to increase its range of programme offerings and the number of enrolments, to the order of 20,000 (full-time equivalent) students by the year 2001, up from a level of 16,000, it was anticipated that up to 1000 students per year of this increase might be achieved through distance learning programmes. The distance education or outreach component of the project involved the following: • an expansion and upgrade of the communication technology for distance education, and teleconferencing at 27 sites in sixteen countries. • construction, furnishing and equipping of 62,000 square feet of space in sixteen countries • curriculum development and modification • production of learning material • 480 person months of staff training; and • the engagement of consultants to provide services related to architecture and engineering, needs assessment, curriculum development, and staff development and technical assistance in the areas of organization, management and telecommunications 48 • provision of project management, and logistical support. By targeting these areas the funding support provided by these regional institutions contributed significantly to the expansion of the distance education programmes (considered in the next chapter) now being offered by the UWI, and facilitated greater communication between the campuses and the various units of the School of Continuing Studies located in the other non- campus countries. 2.7 Defining Tertiary Education In the Caribbean, as Peters has quite correctly observed, the term "higher" is used interchangeably with 'tertiary but both are intended to be inclusive and reflect a recognition “that education and training provisions in these third level institutions may and in fact do include non-university and university level programmes, technical and vocational education and training, professional and paraprofessional training, and continuing education programmes.”9 Students attending these institutions are usually over the age of sixteen and would normally be required to meet certain minimum academic or experiential standards to be eligible for admission to these institutions which deliver a variety of formal post-secondary education to middle and high-level personnel in degree, diploma and certificate programmes. 2.8 Scale of Regional participation in Tertiary Education In 1998 UNESCO’s Institute for Statistics estimated that there were 93,550 students from the wider Caribbean involved in tertiary education. The countries involved in this estimate included Anguilla, Antigua and Barbuda, Aruba, Bahamas, Barbados, Belize, Bermuda, British Virgin Islands, Cayman Islands, Dominica, Grenada, Guyana, Haiti, Jamaica, Montserrat, Netherlands Antilles, St Kitts and Nevis, St. Lucia, St Vincent and the Grenadines, Suriname, Trinidad and Tobago, and the Turks and Caicos Islands. Those undertaking tertiary level education were primarily based in their respective countries but some were also studying in other Caribbean countries as well as further abroad, particularly in Canada, the USA and OECD countries. 9. See for further details, Bevis Peters, The Emergence of Community, State and National Colleges in the OECS member countries: An institutional Analysis. Cave Hill, Barbados: ISER, pp1-22. 49 Caribbean student mobility was deemed as arising out of several factors including a general trend among students worldwide to be more mobile, the lack of (or inadequate) programme offerings locally, while some students started programmes at home and then relocated to another country to complete their studies. Despite the mobility among some students, however, the numbers actually studying in their respective country was approximately 80 per cent. Of the total studying in a country other than their own, 1900 were studying in another Caribbean country while 16,550 were studying in an OECD country. Tables 2 to 8 provide varying details Caribbean students studying in tertiary institutions overseas, while tables 9 and 10 show the relatively smaller numbers of students from other countries coming to the Caribbean to undertake tertiary education reflecting the fact that the region needs to more actively seek to attract students from overseas; the potential gains both socially, culturally and financially, are likely to be quite significant. Notably, Jamaica had the highest number of students studying outside the Caribbean region, that is, some 3560 students, or 14 per cent of the total number of Jamaican students involved in tertiary education. Also, noteworthy was the fact that there were five Caribbean countries which had more than 50 per cent of their tertiary students studying at institutions outside the Caribbean. The overseas enrollment was most pronounced in the British Virgin Islands (93%), Dominica (83%) and Antigua and Barbuda (79%). In contrast, some countries had a much smaller percentage of their students studying overseas, for example, Aruba (5%), St Lucia (8%) and Barbados (13%). These variations between the two sets of countries are no doubt influenced by such factors as the capacity of the local tertiary sector, government policies, and socio-cultural attachments to the UK, USA and Canada, as well as a historical and widespread perception that “foreign is better”. But there is also another issue to be raised here, namely the problem of the “Brain Drain”. It is well known that many Caribbean students who are trained overseas do not return home and thus those countries who send most of their students overseas for training face an additional risk. According to the World Bank “the rising international mobility of skilled human resources can have positive as well as negative effects on countries at all levels of development. Developing 50 countries, however, tend to suffer largely adverse consequences, as they may lose the very technical and professional specialists who would be capable of contributing to poverty-alleviating improvements in the living conditions of the local population.”10 As noted in chapter one, the overall participation rates in tertiary education in the Caribbean are quite low in comparison to many other countries, especially with Latin America, the East Asian countries and the OECD and other developed countries. These contrasting enrollment situations are symptomatic of a wide and increasingly widening gap between the developed and developing world. For example, whereas in 1980 the tertiary enrollment rate in the USA was around 55 per cent, the average for developing countries was 5 per cent, and by 1995 the respective rates had moved to 81 per cent for the USA but only a mere 9 per cent for developing countries.11 The disturbingly low level of tertiary enrollment in the Caribbean has been for several years a major concern of Caribbean policy makers and regional institutions including the Caribbean Community (CARICOM). Secretary General of CARICOM, Edwin Carrington explains why and what that body proposed by way of solutions: Not surprisingly, there is ongoing debate throughout the Region, not so much about the principle of economic integration, but about the actual strategies for achieving a viable regional system which would ensure that the expectations of specific countries, communities and various groups, including youth and women, would materialize within a realistic time frame and that requisite benefits would accrue to them. Thus, when our Heads of Government met in Montego Bay [Jamaica] in 1997 and outlined a HRD Strategy for the Region, it was in full recognition of the fact that in order for the countries of the Caribbean to achieve the necessary competitive advantage, a new approach had to be developed. At that time, they were particularly concerned that tertiary level enrolment at under 6 per cent of the adult population in the Caribbean was too low to sustain our development objective. Our 6 per cent level paled in comparison with the over 12 per cent in Latin America, 15 percent in South East Asia and over 20 per cent in Europe and North America. A target of 15 percent by the year 2005 was agreed 10 World Bank. Constructing Knowledge Societies, p.18 11. World Bank. Constructing Knowledge Societies, p.46-47. The tertiary enrollment rate measures the proportion of the population in the 18-24 age group that is actually enrolled in a tertiary education institution. 51 on to be set for the Region, and at least one country set a national target of 20 per cent by that date.12 In fact, there is also an awareness among regional policy making institutions that inadequate access to tertiary education could in some Caribbean countries contribute to societal instability. An appraisal report commissioned by the Caribbean Development Bank (CDB) on further education in the Turks and Caicos Islands in 1997 noted that:13 The economic and social development of the TCI [Turks and Caicos Islands] is constrained by limited numbers of belongers with tertiary level education and training. This short-fall is primarily due to inadequate provision of post-secondary education and training programmes locally....If continued economic growth is to be attained without total reliance on an expatriate labour force, then the education and training sector must be enhanced to equip persons with the requisite skills, knowledge and attitudes to meet the demand of a serviced-based economy, and an increasingly competitive international environment. Additionally, in order to mitigate the risk of social discontent that is usually associated with an environment in which the vast majority of high level managerial posts are occupied primarily by expatriates, increased access to appropriate post-secondary education and training must be provided to belongers, to enable them to compete for these positions, and to help direct the development process. This recognition of the inadequacy of the levels of participation in tertiary education in the context of the region’s developmental needs, and the changes taking place in the labour market as a result of globalisation provided the context for a number of education reform initiatives which are now being developed in the region. 2.9 Current Structure of Tertiary Education in the Region The tertiary education sector in the English-speaking Caribbean consists of over 150 tertiary level institutions of which over 60% are national or publicly supported institutions with about 30% being private and the rest under private ownership with some governmental support. Among the 12. Remarks of Mr Edwin Carrington, Secretary General, Caribbean Community at the opening of the Fifth meeting of the Council for Human and Social Development, Georgetown, Guyana, 3 October 2001. 13. CDB. Appraisal Report on Further Education- Turks and Caicos Islands. Report prepared for the CDB’s 175th meeting of the Board of Directors held on October 16, 1997. 52 private institutions are an increasing number of ‘off-shore’ distance providers based mainly in North America and the United Kingdom which utilize traditional and modern distance learning technologies, have been using the new distance-learning technologies to offer their programmes. Among the network of institutions the University of the West Indies (UWI) is the largest with three campuses in Jamaica, Trinidad and Barbados, as well as a number of extra-mural centres or schools of continuing studies in the other fourteen Caribbean countries which provide financial support to the UWI. It also utilizes distance technologies to deliver its programmes across the region, as well as has a number of articulation and affiliation arrangements with various other tertiary institutions to deliver its programmes, and provide access for their students. 2.10 Articulation and Collaboration As elsewhere, the tertiary education sector in the English-speaking Caribbean is quite diverse comprising local and regional institutions, technical and vocational colleges, a technological university, traditional university such as the University of Belize (UB), the UWI, University of Guyana (UG) and the University of the Virgin Islands (UVI), and multi-disciplinary and special entities. Furthermore as Roberts14 has observed, diversity is also to be found with respect to the governance of the institutions, the student population, the staffing composition, the mission of the institutions. While this diversity generates both advantages and disadvantages for many of the institutions they are still able to find common ground through bodies such as the Association of Caribbean Tertiary Institutions (ACTI) to collaborate in terms of seeking regional equivalence, articulation, and accreditation. These avenues of collaboration which are being explored by the various institutions have provided the basis for greater access to, and opportunities for, the pursuit of tertiary education. Roberts describes the models of articulation being utilized in the region as follows:15 There are several models of institutional articulation which have emerged in the region. Structurally, the commonest are hierarchical arrangements which 14. Vivienne Roberts, “Programme Articulation: The making of a regional Tertiary Education System”, Journal of Education and Development in the Caribbean vol. 3, no.2 1999, p.145-169. 15. Ibid. 53 emphasize vertical linkages allowing students to progress from one level to another; lateral linkages allowing for transfer between similar programmes and networks allowing for multidirectional transfers. These directional types of linkages are built on conceptions of an emerging system depicted variously as pyramids, hubs and spokes, and spheres. The dynamics of these interactions rest on agreed or perceived relationships between mentor and student, senior and junior, or equal partners sharing dynamic and shifting dominance. Articulation takes place not only among institutions located in the Caribbean region but also between Caribbean institutions and institutions in the United States and elsewhere both through formal and informal arrangements between the various institutions. The goals of the various articulation arrangements may be listed as follows:16 • the promotion of access through multiple pathways. • the pursuit of equity through the provision of opportunity to the disadvantaged or non-traditional students. • the practice of cost-efficiency through provision for the achievement of relevant objectives in a less costly modality, in an institution where unit cost is less, or in a shorter time but with no loss in quality. • the provision of opportunities for the use of prior learning in one institution to gain access to another institution or programme without loss of time or credit for past achievement. • the establishment of functional links and partnerships to promote quality and cohesion in the educational system. Thus even though diversity might be an enduring feature of the tertiary education sector in the region there remains tremendous scope of collaboration at multiple levels to achieve the various goals and objectives of these institutions. Given the small size of the region and the commonalities of the problems, as indeed opportunities, shared by these institutions they might find it more productive and useful to continue to pursue avenues for collaboration and partnerships rather than engaging in any excessive and unproductive competition for students, staff or financial resources, as well as in the area of programme offerings. 16. Ibid, p.162. 54 Section 2: UWI and Tertiary Education Provision: A Case Study 2.11 Changing Characteristics of the Demand for Tertiary Education The UWI’s current strategic plan has identified the following as among the changing characteristics of the demand for tertiary education in the region: • A substantial and growing proportion of applicants are young adults in their mid- twenties to early thirties rather than newly graduated sixth formers • Many prospective students are prepared to trade the benefits of face-to-face programme delivery for accessibility and convenience • Prospective students are firm in their expectations that programme content bears direct relevance to vocational or career paths • The students expect that digital communications and learning technologies are used by higher education institutions to create a facilitatory learning environment and enhance their educational experience • Competing higher education providers excel with respect to the efficiency of their delivery systems; and • Students actively seek value for their educational investments and are impatient with administrative inefficiencies. 2.12 UWI Undergraduate Enrollment patterns 2000/200117 17. Special thanks to the Office of the Vice Chancellor for providing details and analysis of UWI enrollment, which was originally prepared by the Office of Planning. The related enrollment statistics for the UWI are presented in Tables 11 to 34 of Appendix 4. 55 2.12.1 UWI Student Registrations A total of 23,762 students had registered in on- and off-campus programmes at the three campuses of the university during the 2000/2001 academic year. This translated into a marginal increase of 1.5% over the previous academic year. As was the case in 1999/2000, this was indicative of sluggish growth in student numbers. Increased numbers of off-campus students had fueled much of the growth in the university student population. The 13% increase in these student numbers was in direct contrast to a decrease of 0.6% in the number of on-campus students. This was no doubt, influenced by the earlier transfer of Social Science certificate programmes to Tertiary Level Institutions. The majority of off-campus students (59%) were registered in distance education programmes. It proved to be a strong growth area given that enrollment in these programmes grew by almost 16% over the previous year. This was followed by a 9% increase in student numbers at Tertiary Level Institutions and 8% for Affiliated institutions. In terms of campus comparisons, the St. Augustine campus was the only campus that had a positive increase in on-campus student numbers. This increase was relatively small, in the region of 2%. On the other hand, the Cave Hill and Mona campuses suffered marginal decreases in these student numbers in the magnitudes of 1.4% and 2.4%, respectively. 2.12.2 Full Time Equivalent (FTE) Registrations The increase in FTE numbers fell well below the University’s yearly target of 1,000 that was stipulated in its Strategic Plan for the period, 1997-2002. This represented an increase of 21 FTEs over the previous academic year. Both the Cave Hill and St. Augustine campuses had moderate increases in FTE numbers of 103 and 13, respectively. However, these gains were offset by a decline in Mona’s FTE numbers of 213. The university was close to achieving the goal outlined in the Strategic Plan of increasing enrollment in the areas of Science and Technology to 40% of the total student population. This actual proportion remained at the level of 38% for a second consecutive year. At the campus 56 level, this target was surpassed only at the St. Augustine campus with 55% of its FTE numbers registered in Science and Technology areas. However, this proportion represented a marginal decrease of 2% compared to previous year’s figure of 57%. By comparison, the proportions of Science and Technology students at Cave Hill and Mona were 27% and 29%, respectively. As was the case in 1999/2000, 16% of FTE students were registered in postgraduate degree programmes. This was in striking distance of the Strategic Plan’s target of 20% of total university student enrollment. At the campus level, Mona was closest to this goal with 18% of its FTE students registered in these programmes. The figures for Cave Hill and St. Augustine were 13% and 15%, respectively. 2.12.3 Full-time and Part-Time Registrations In a pattern similar to that of previous years, student registrations were mostly full-time. There were 12,768 full-time students and 7,019 part-time students registered in on-campus university programmes. This was in effect, a slight increase of 1.4% in the number of full-time students over last year’s figure of 12,587. In contrast, the number of part-time students actually declined, albeit, a small decline of 4% from the previous year’s figure of 7,317. The number of students in off-campus programmes continued to increase, no doubt indicative of a positive trend. The figure increased to 4,141 in the 2000/01 academic year from 3,883 in 1999/2000. Mona retained its position as the campus with the largest number of off-campus students, that is, 2,097, an increase of approximately 5% over last year’s figure of 2,001. The numbers of off-campus students also increased at Cave Hill and St. Augustine with 1,359 and 685 in 2000/01 as compared to 1,209 and 673 in 1999/2000. 2.12.4 Gender The gender imbalance in the university student population was still evident during the 2000/01 academic year, as in previous academic years. There was almost a 2:1 ratio of females to males as there was a total of 15,950 females and 7,978 males registered at the university in both its on- and 57 off-campus programmes. As was the case in previous years, this gender imbalance varied by faculty. An analysis of on-campus registrations in first-degree programmes showed that males were in the majority in the Faculty of Science and Technology at Cave Hill and also at the Engineering faculty at St. Augustine. Females on the other hand, dominated enrollment in the Faculties of Arts/Humanities, Law, Social Sciences and the various Schools of Education across the campuses. The Faculty of Pure and Applied Sciences/School of Natural Sciences was the only faculty/school with an almost equal proportion of males and females. Attention still needs to be focused on the relatively weak enrollments of women in the Engineering and Science faculties, and perhaps on whether women of the lower socio-economic and disadvantaged groups are really accessing tertiary education in equitable numbers. However, even greater concern must be expressed about the overall poor enrollment rates of males and their under performance at most levels of the entire education sector. 2.12.5 Student Registrations by Faculty and Programme The Social Science Faculty remained the largest faculty in terms of student numbers. With an enrollment of 7,469 students, this faculty accounted for 44% of total on- and off-campus student enrollment across the three campuses. (The previous year’s figure was 45%). At the campus level, the situation was no different. The proportions of Social Science students at Cave Hill, Mona and St. Augustine were 54%, 51% and 29%, respectively. The second largest faculty was that of the Humanities/Arts and Education /Humanities and Education, which accounted for almost a quarter of total university student enrollment. The proportions at Cave Hill, Mona and St. Augustine were 20%, 27% and 21%, respectively. In contrast, the Law faculty remained the faculty with the lowest student numbers at both the university and faculty levels. With an enrollment figure of 440 students, it had approximately 2% of the total university enrollment. Faculty enrollment at Cave Hill stood at 7%, but was less than one percent at both the Mona and St. Augustine campuses. The biggest growth in student numbers took place in the Faculty of Humanities/Arts and Education/Humanities and Education and particularly in the Arts section. Growth rates for Cave 58 Hill, Mona and St. Augustine were 6%, 8% and 4% and for the university, 6%. Growth rates for the Schools of Education and the Law faculty were similar, that is, in the region of one percent at the university level. Indicative of sluggish growth, the Faculty of Science and Technology/Pure and Applied Sciences/Natural Sciences grew by less than one percent. Against the background of physical capacity constraints, the Medical Science faculty had a marginal decline of less than one percent. However, the most surprising development was the negative growth of 4% experienced by the Social Science faculty (at the university level). This could no doubt, be attributed to increased competition from other tertiary level institutions and in particular, the offshore universities and also, the economic effects of globalization on the regional job market. The impact of these factors varied by campus. In that vein, both the Cave Hill and Mona campuses recorded declines of 7% and 8% which was not offset by St. Augustine’s 10% increase. 2.12.6 Geographical Distribution of Students In terms of the number of students from each contributing country who had registered in on- campus university programmes in the 2000/01 academic year. 43% of all on-campus students were Jamaicans. The second largest grouping was from Trinidad and Tobago with 32%. This was followed by Barbados with 17%. It was apparent that nationals of the Campus countries tended to dominate on-campus enrollment at their local campuses. 78% of all on-campus students at the Cave Hill campus were Barbadians. 93% of Mona students were Jamaicans and 86% of St. Augustine students were from Trinidad and Tobago. Approximately 4% of on-campus students at the university came from the member countries of the Organization of Eastern Caribbean States (OECS). This was almost a decline of one percent when compared to the previous year’s figures. Notwithstanding, the enrollment figure for 2000/01 has been consistent with the trend over the past six years. Cave Hill continued to have the largest share of OECS students registered in their on-campus programmes, which amounted to 50% of all OECS students at the university. Mona had approximately 20% and St. Augustine, 30%. In terms of trends, the number of OECS students registered at Mona has declined steadily over 59 the years, from 310 in 1995/96 to 156 in 2000/01. This was in stark contrast to St. Augustine which witnessed an increase in its numbers from 143 to 254 over the same period. Similarly, Cave Hill had a steady increase in its OECS student numbers over the six-year period, moving from 317 in 1995/96 to 413 in 2000/01. At the university level, the number of OECS students has increased by a modest 7% over the last six years, moving from 770 in 1995/96 to 823 in 2000/01 after peaking at 1,000 in 1999/2000. 2.12.7 Access for Students with Disabilities While most of the tertiary institutions in the region have long acknowledged the importance of enabling students with disabilities to access their programmes, the region as a whole has not yet developed any clear guidelines or policies to enhance the participation of the disabled in tertiary education. As yet no comprehensive study has been undertaken to establish the numbers of students throughout the region who can with the necessary assistance undertake tertiary education. The experiences of disabled persons who have actually attended institutions like the UWI vary and depend very much on the goodwill of interested persons, although the UWI, for example, has sought to make its building structurally accessible to the disabled and the library has acquired the necessary specialized equipment to enable blind and deaf students to use its resources. The Mona Campus, which is the largest UWI campus had an enrollment of thirty nine students with disabilities in the academic year 1998/99, thirty-one students in 1999/2000, and thirty in 2000/01. The majority of these students were enrolled in the faculties of Arts and Education, and Social Sciences with smaller numbers in the faculties of Medical Sciences, and Pure and Applied Sciences.18 More data needs to be collected on the total experience of disabled students at the various tertiary institutions in the region in order that the full potential, skills and the knowledge which disabled persons in the region possess might be effectively harnessed for national development, and foster their integration in society in more meaningful ways. 18. UWI, Mona campus. Memorandum of Estimates of Needs for the Biennium 2002/2004. Jamaica: UWI, Mona Campus, February 2002. 60 2.12.8 Access for Mature Students The UWI has now recognized that more mature students are taking up the challenge of pursuing tertiary education but often many do not have the necessary academic prerequisites to make a successful application for entry into the university’s programmes. As a result the Board of Undergraduate Studies which has responsibility for all undergraduate matters, including admissions, recently revised the regulations making it easier for mature students to enter the university’s programmes.19 Mature students are now defined as persons over the age of 21 who do not have the traditional academic entry requirements. However, the entry of more mature students have created additional challenges for the university in that these students tend to be more discriminating, not easily satisfied with the quality of teaching and learning, and many are stressed as a result of family and other commitments. 19. Hilary Beckles, Anthony Perry and Peter Whiteley. The Brain Train. Quality Higher education and Caribbean Development, Mona, Jamaica: Board for Undergraduate Studies/Pear Tree Press, 2002, p.58. 61 Section 3: Rationalisation for Greater Access: Case Study of Barbados 2.13 Local & Regional Imperatives for Rationalisation As the governments of the region attempt to broaden access to tertiary education in their respective countries they may opt to chose one or more of a number of options and strategies by which this goal might be achieved. In the context of Barbados the government has chosen not only to seek massive increases in enrollment at each of the four post-secondary institutions located in that country, but additionally, to further facilitate these increases through an overall rationalization strategy for these institutions.20 The rationalisation of these institutions is also intended to facilitate greater collaboration among the institutions so as to optimize the use of scarce human and financial resources, as well as help resolve a number of issues relating to articulation, accreditation, and certification, among the institutions. At the same time, the rationalisation efforts are intended to meet the mandate of the Eighteenth Special Meeting of the CARICOM Standing Committee of Ministers Responsible for Education (SCME) held in Barbados in May 1997. At that time the Committee mandated that human resources development strategies in the region should ensure that education and training were not undertaken in a mechanistic manner, but that the strategies needed to take into account a number of challenges including the following: • The emerging profile of the workforce which will be needed to enhance a country’s competitiveness. • The re-organisation of the production processes; and • The development of abilities, attitudes, skills and technological knowledge necessary for jobs, entrepreneurial development and human well-being. 20. Much of the information provided for this case study of Barbados’ efforts at increasing access were obtained from the Ministry of Education, Government of Barbados. 62 2.14 Barbados’ Public Tertiary Education Sector The Government of Barbados has long recognized the value of its tertiary education sector as a key mechanism in the country’s development and productivity and thus allocates significant resources to public tertiary institutions located in that country namely the Cave Hill campus of the university of the West Indies, the Barbados Community College (BCC), the Samuel Jackman Prescod Polytechnic (SJPP) and Erdiston Teachers’ Training College (ETTC). Table 72 which provides a summary of expenditure on post-secondary/tertiary institutions in Barbados for the period 1995/96 to 2000/2001 reflects the steady increases in expenditure over this period. 2.15 Demand for and Access to Tertiary Education in Barbados Consequent on Barbados’ declining birth rate (lower than many/most other Caribbean countries) now compounded by deaths from HIV/AIDs, the number of students entering and graduating from primary and secondary school has significantly decreased from an estimated 60,000 in the 1980s to 48,000 by 1999/2000, and this figure is expected to be as low as 25,000 by the year 2015. However, analysis of the output from secondary school reveals that a larger number of students are qualifying for entry into post-secondary/tertiary education, and there has also been a rise in the number of adults seeking tertiary education. In addition, the government, in response to the changes taking place in the economy as a result of globalisation, has committed itself to act proactively by offering training, and re-training opportunities at the tertiary level not only to fulfill current needs of the economy, but also in anticipation of jobs which do not yet exist, as well as jobs existing outside Barbados which Barbadians could perform. The sectors of the Barbados economy which the government believes are in need of more adequately trained persons include tourism, financial; services, information and communication technology and entrepreneurship. The emphasis on these areas is symptomatic of the fact that Barbados has made a transition from being largely an agrarian-based economy to being a service- based economy. In this service-based economy life-long learning opportunities are regarded as being of critical importance, not merely because of the need to remain on the cutting-edge of developments, but also because jobs and job descriptions and requirement are in a continuous 63 state of flux and evolution. That there is clear and growing demand for more tertiary education opportunities in Barbados is reflected by the fact that, as table 73 shows, there are very large numbers of persons applying to the various tertiary institutions in Barbados who are rejected each year not so much so perhaps because of inadequate qualifications but more so because of the inadequate capacity of the institutions to cater to the overwhelming demand. Indeed, even at the level below the tertiary institutions, namely the sixth forms of the secondary schools, many students are rejected. This is a problem also affecting other tertiary institutions in the region including the UWI. A similar picture emerges when considers the number of students who apply to the Cave Hill campus of the UWI in Barbados. The campus received 3,002 applications for undergraduate programmes from students in all sixteen the Caribbean countries who contribute financially to the university for the academic year 2002/2003. Of this total 1,629 offers were made and 1,231 students accepted places and registered. Of the total number who applied 1761 were from Barbados, reflective of the preponderance of Barbadian students represented in the total number of students on the campus. However, the campus was only able to offer places to 1228 to Barbadian students. 1015 Barbadian students accepted and were registered at the campus. It is worth noting that some of the students who applied to the Cave Hill Campus, may have also applied to other tertiary institutions, especially the Barbados Community College. As is the case throughout the rest of the region the issue of equity, in all of its complex forms, may also arise since, for example, some persons who are unable to accept their places might not be able to do so because of lack of funds or other reasons including family commitments. As such, the issue of equity is one area which is in need of more detailed investigation. 2.16 Rationalisation & the Establishment of a University College of Barbados (UCB) Against the background of the high number of applicants who were being rejected by the four tertiary institutions, the government of Barbados felt that the establishment of single institution called the University College of Barbados comprising the former Barbados Community College, the Samuel Jackman Prescod Polytechnic, and Erdiston Teachers’ Training College, would 64 provide significant opportunities for the rationalisation of the financial and administrative aspects of tertiary education in Barbados. Additionally, it was felt that this consolidated institution would facilitate a broader range and depth of programming, as well as, be more ideal for the responsive type of training and education up to the level of the Bachelor’s degree, and applied research, required for new students and adult learners by the different sectors of the Barbadian economy. But perhaps the most defining feature of the new institution would be that access would be given priority and so the entry requirements and exit qualifications would reflect more flexibility than the tradition university including the Cave Hill campus of the UWI. The University College of Barbados was not conceptualized to compete with the UWI but rather to complement it by focusing more on a wider range of applied programmes for job preparation and upgrading of skills, while the UWI would continue to pursue strong academic and research programmes both at the undergraduate and graduate levels. While the government has acknowledge that there will be challenges in terms of quality, among other things, it has committed itself to putting in place the necessary structures including a quality assurance unit to ensure that level of education and training offered by the University College of Barbados meets international standards, and local requirements. 65 Section 4: Privatization and Tertiary Education Sector Private educational institutions, operating at the pre-school, primary, secondary and tertiary levels, have long operated in the English speaking Caribbean but since the 1980s the region has seen further growth and expansion among the tertiary institutions, and the emergence of new ones as well. However, unlike in countries such as Korea, Brazil, Columbia, the Philippines, and Indonesia, where private sector share of tertiary education enrollments account for between 60 and 80 per cent of total tertiary enrollments, in the Caribbean tertiary education remains predominatly the business of the public sector. The growth of the private institutions may rightly be seen in the context of the global expansion private tertiary institutions and the increasing privatization and commodification of education. These institutions are characterized by heterogeneity and diversity in terms of their mission, infrastructural development, programmes, and quality. Nevertheless they all seem to be born out of a recognition and realization that there existed particular niche markets in education and training which they could more adequately serve than, the historically more inflexible traditional public tertiary institutions. One such institution is the Barbados Institute of Management and Productivity (BIMAP), a private institute of business, management and professional studies. BIMAP was granted a licence in 1971 and was officially opened in 1972. Its establishment arose out of collaboration between the private sector and the Government of Barbados. BIMAP has also increased its national and regional standing by forging a relationship with the Postgraduate Business School of the University of Surrey in England, for the delivery of a number of graduate programmes in the field of business studies. The private tertiary institutions in the Caribbean share many, though in varying degrees, of the characteristics of similar institutions globally, namely:21 21. For further details on for-profits higher education institutions see, Norman LaRocque/ Arthur Anderson, Private Higher education in Developing Countries: Private Interests... Public Good. Presentation to NZAPEP Cooperative Change in Tertiary Education conference, 13 September 2000. Also, The futures Project. A Briefing on For-Profit Higher Education, The Futures Project: Policy for Higher Education in a 66 • Fees are the main source of revenue • They serve both rich and poor, often giving persons a “second chance” • There exist a range of institutional types, including franchises, sole proprietorships, for-profit companies, not-for-profits, and religious based organization • They generally offer a limited range of professional/practically oriented courses, including accounting, management, and english • They often use part-time staff including practitioners in the field, and professors from public institutions • Their regulatory framework is usually less developed than for public tertiary institutions. • They may also have various types of arrangements with the government for support • Questions are often raised about their quality and accreditation status • Were born out of a desire to fill a particular niche in the education and labour markets • They rely less on tradition type libraries and depend more on online resources including journals and electronic databases • They cater strongly to working students, thereby holding many of their classes at nights • They tend to focus more on high volume, lower cost courses such as management and business, and information technology training • May have alumni association but have reduced levels of student services • Offer opportunities for quicker completion of programmes than in public institutions. • Increasing they seek to acquire status and accreditation or greater recognition locally and regionally by forging partnerships with well recognised tertiary Changing World, Brown University, Providence, Rhode Island, USA, October 2000. 67 institutions locally, regionally and internationally. • Some such as the off-shore medical schools in the Caribbean, are financed by powerful consortiums of businesses. While questions will continue to be raised about their quality, there can be no doubt that the emergence of these private institutions have helped to expand and broaden access to tertiary education in the region. In fact, their presence might be regarded as being responsible for the emergence of specialized “for-profit” type units and institutes at traditional tertiary institutions like the UWI. The Centre for Management Development (CMD), an autonomous institution located on the Cave Hill campus of the UWI is just one of several such bodies which have emerged in partnership persons for the knowledge based economies which have evolved in the region. The CMD was established on April 17th 1991 out of a recognition on the part of the private sectors of Barbados and those of the OECS that there was a need for a more responsive mechanism to provide high quality training for the changing world of work. The CMD and its sister organizations, the Institutes of Business at the campuses in Jamaica and Trinidad actively provide training, education, ancillary support and consulting services to managers and organizations across the region. Their programmes are accredited by the UWI but they remain autonomous bodies operating under the policy direction of an independent Board. The CMD’s two main academic programmes at this time are the Executive Diploma in Management (an undergraduate programme), and the Executive Masters in Business Administration, a postgraduate programme. Governments too have been establishing institutions specifically geared to training persons for the new demands of the economy. The Management Institute for National Development (MIND) which is an Executive Agency of the Government of Jamaica, is one such body set up by a government to complement the traditional tertiary education institutions.22 MIND operates a Pay- as-You-Learn easy payment plan and has course schedules which are more convenient for busy 22. See, MIND. Business and Corporate Plans 2002-2005, Jamaica; Management Institute for National Development, December 17, 2001. 68 adult learners. In addition, since September 2000 MIND has forged a relationship with the UWI which allows it to deliver Level 1 of the UWI’s B.Sc. in Public Administration. 69 Section 5: Continuing and Lifelong Learning Opportunities Lifelong learning is now a present reality as Caribbean societies seek to enhance national development and prepare their citizens to deal with the challenges and opportunities of the global economy. Today, individuals and institutions are forced to accept that knowledge and skills acquired may quickly become obsolete, and thus there is a need for continual retraining and reeducating of citizens not only to deal with the world of work but also to be able to function and participate in rapidly changing societies. Not only is the distinction between initial and continuing education becoming blurred but even more fundamental changes are occurring which place more emphasis on learning how to learn. The World Bank explains:23 The lifelong-learning approach stresses the primacy of the learner. Tertiary education institutions will have to organize themselves to accommodate the learning and training needs of a more diverse clientele: working students, mature students, stay-at-home students, traveling students, part-time students, day students, night students, weekend students, and so on. New patterns of demand are emerging whereby learners attend several institutions or programs in parallel or sequentially, thus taking the initiative to define their own skill profiles on the labor market. Another important consequence of the acceleration of scientific and technological progress is the diminished emphasis on remembering countless facts and basic data and the growing importance of methodological knowledge and analytical skills - the skills needed for learning to think and to an analyze information autonomously. Today, in a number of scientific disciplines, elements of factual knowledge taught in the first year of study may become obsolete before graduation. The learning process now needs to be increasingly based on the capacity to find and access knowledge and to apply it in problem solving. Learning to learn, learning to transform information into new knowledge, and learning to translate new knowledge into applications become more important than memorizing specific information. In this new paradigm, primacy is given to analytical skills; that is, to the ability to seek and find information, crystallize issues, formulate testable hypotheses, marshal and evaluate evidence, and solve problems. The new competencies that employers value in the knowledge economy have to do with oral and written communications, teamwork, peer teaching, creativity, envisioning skills, resourcefulness, and the ability to adjust to change. 23. World Bank. Constructing Knowledge Societies, pp.27-29. 70 The emergence of the various private tertiary training and educational institutions mentioned above very much reflects the requirements of the learning society in the twenty-first century. However, the School of Continuing Studies (SCS) of the University of the West Indies still represents one of the more effective public institutions preparing regional citizens for the new realities of the economy and society in the region. Headquartered on the Mona campus of the UWI in Jamaica the SCS has centres or extra-mural departments in all the countries which contribute to the university. The mission of the School of Continuing Studies is to provide opportunities for lifelong learning through a variety of high quality academic, technical and vocational programmes designed to contribute to the social, cultural and economic development of the people of the Caribbean region. During the academic year 2000-2001 over 19,000 students were enrolled in programmes being offered by the SCS across the region. Increasingly, the SCS’s programmes reflect a recognition that equally emphasis must be placed on creating opportunities for citizens to access tertiary education and on adult education utilizing formal, informal, and non- formal teaching-learning modalities. Tables 36 to 46 show the clusters of programmes currently being offered by the SCS, and provide further details of the programmes. A number of new programmes are also being developed to further enhance the relevance and effectiveness of the SCS in the developmental process across the region. 2.17 New Programme Development 2.17.1 Certificate in Labour Studies This programme being developed by the Trade Union Education Institute is a regional programme designed to deliver foundation level education and training in labour studies. It will streamline the current offerings and provide a more structured and professional approach to certifying professionals in that field of work. The Institute will offer this programme throughout the region in collaboration with the Labour Colleges and through the use of UWI distance education facilities and at University Centres in NCCs. 71 The following programmes being developed by SCS in the British Virgin Islands will be offered at the certificate level. The programmes will be delivered locally during the initial phase; however, it is anticipated that they will subsequently be offered regionally. 2.17.2 Certificate in Offshore Finance and Trust Management The certificate is geared toward training persons employed at the supervisory level position in the offshore financial sector. The programme is being developed in conjunction with private sector companies involved in the industry. 2.17.3 Certificate in Human Resources Management The certificate is targeted at persons involved in the human resource management function within the public and private sector who are seeking to develop their professional and academic skills. The Labour Department of the BVI Government has made contributions to the development of this programme. 2.17.4 Certificate in Immigration Studies This is a two-year Certificate programme designed for the practical training of the BVI’s immigration officers. The course of study would include Administrative and Immigration Law, Language Skills, Introduction to Computers and Information Systems, Spanish (both oral and written), Public Sector Accounting, Management and Criminal Justice. The Immigration Department of the BVI Government has made contributions to the development of this programme. 2.17.5 The Dental Auxiliary Training Programme The Dental Auxiliary Training Programme being developed by the School at St. Augustine encompasses three different programmes, a certificate and two Associate Degrees. The one-year certificate for the training of Dental Assistants can be a terminal qualification or will be the first year of the 2-year Associate Degree programmes for Dental Hygienists and Dental Laboratory Technicians. The training will be conducted in collaboration with the School of Dentistry of the 72 Faculty of Medical Sciences at St. Augustine. Generally Dental Auxiliary training takes place on the job without external certification. The proposed programme would ensure common standards and certification of persons engaged in dental auxiliary roles. 2.17.6 Associate Degree in Public Sector Management The Associate of Science Degree Programme in Public Sector Management will be offered in multi-mode with part-time courses designed to deliver management education and training for public sector organization. The programme will be delivered on a part-time basis and is structured as a 2½ + 2 year offer, which will allow the holder to move from the Associate degree to the Bachelor’s degree by doing two additional years of study. All the courses will address the fundamentals of public sector management. Courses will be delivered through face-to-face, distance & web-based delivery systems, with further academic support of related CDs, audiotapes, & print packages. 2.17.7 Adult Education Transition Programme This programme is a non-credit, introductory and remedial programme in pre-University Mathematics and English and study skills for mature students to provide them with a firm foundation in preparation for University undergraduate courses. 2.18 Programme Review To ensure that its programmes remain relevant in content and delivery, the School of Continuing Studies has started a process of reviewing all programmes in accordance with the established academic quality assurance procedures with support of the Instructional Development Unit at the St. Augustine campus of the UWI. The goals of the review exercise are to: • standardise and integrate some of the disparate course programmes offered in the same field of knowledge by the various units of the School; • enhance the quality of the programmes in structure and content, ensuring academic integrity as well as serviceableness to the region; • facilitate articulation with courses offered at higher levels at the UWI and 73 other universities; and • satisfy the requisite criteria both for substance and format to enable the programmes to attract university accreditation in total or in part. 2.19 Scholars and Artistes in Residence in Non-Campus Countries Further, as noted previously the SCS also places emphasis on combining formal education with informal and non-formal educational programmes as part of its strategy to stimulate learning, and encourage the sharing of information and talents across the region. One example of this was the recent establishment of a programme called the Scholars and Artistes in Residence in Non-campus Countries. This programme allows selected scholars and artistes to reside and work for short periods in Caribbean countries where the UWI does not have a campus. Appointees have an opportunity to pursue their own intellectual and creative work while contributing to the intellectual and cultural life of the community. Their contributions may take the form of workshops, seminars, lectures, discussions, exhibitions, clinics, or other consultations in which the appointees offer members of the community access to their knowledge and skills. The programme fulfils several goals. It provides residents, students, artistes and scholars with access to mentors, counterparts and possible collaborators who would not otherwise be readily available. It facilitates research relevant to these countries and stimulates intellectual, creative and artistic activity in them. Through this initiative access to high quality teaching and learning is not only expanded, but also broadened in such a way that it affects all groups and levels of society. 74 Section 6: Graduate Studies In spite of the expected inability of the economy to absorb a growing number of well-educated persons, the demand for education in the Latin American and the Caribbean region is likely to remain intense. As the population gets more educated, persons with higher qualifications replace the less educated, even if no new jobs are being created, and if the economy is not growing or changing in a significant way. This relative advantage of the more educated is a very powerful incentive for individuals, even when the social and economic benefits of educational mobility for society are negligible or even negative. This expectation of better income and more stable jobs, however, is only part of a broader generational movement for more education, which is also part, if one wishes, of globalisation. (Simon Schwartzman)24 Over the last decade the UWI has made significant strides in improving access to postgraduate studies in the region. It remains today, despite postgraduate offerings by other institutions the main provider of the largest numbers and types of high quality programmes at the postgraduate level. Across the campuses, the various faculties, departments and research institutions, as well as the School for Continuing Studies in the various NCCs have developed or helped to facilitate the implementation of a range of postgraduate programmes comprising taught Masters degrees and Research degrees in various disciplines. The taught programmes such as the Masters in Education and the Masters in Library Studies, usually consist of lectures, course-work and project or research papers. The Research degrees on the other hand are based on independent study assisted by a panel of supervisors and the eventual production of a thesis. However, all research degrees, such as the Masters of Philosophy (M.Phil), the Doctor of Medicine (MD) and the Doctor of Philosophy (PhD), now carry a taught component. One of the main wishes of the University has always been that where possible the student should be encouraged to pursue the research on areas relating to their home countries. Consequent on a number of constraints, not least of which has been access to adequate supervision and supervisors, this wish is often not met especially with respect to the non-campus countries. 24. Schwartzman, Simon. The Future of Education in Latin America and the Caribbean. Working Paper presented to the Seventh Meeting of the Intergovernmental Regional Committee of the Major Project in the Field of Education in Latin America and the Caribbean, 2001, p.11. 75 With the start of the implementation of the Governance Report by 1994, and the formation of the Board for Non-Campus Countries, and the School for Graduate Studies and Research, however, much more progress has been made in expanding the provision of postgraduate studies to the citizens of the region. The Board for Non-Campus Countries and Distance Education has responsibility for promoting, developing and administering the work of the university in the non- campus countries and to facilitate the delivery of programmes to these countries. The mandate of the Board is fulfilled through its three constituent departments, the Distance Education Centre (DEC), the School of Continuing Studies (SCS), and the Tertiary Level Institutions Unit (TLIU). The School for Graduate Studies and Research on the other hand is mandated to increase graduate student enrollment and to foster research through intra-university, regional and international collaboration and partnerships. The increase in postgraduate offerings has also been as a result of the formation of active and well-led postgraduate student associations, as well as the strengthening, and in some cases revival, of the UWI Guild of Graduates in the various contributing countries and internationally. 2.20 Constraints on Expansion and Quality of Graduate Studies at UWI In spite of these advances, however, and as in the case of undergraduate enrollment patterns, enrollment in graduate programmes among students from the non-campus countries continue to lag significantly behind the campus countries because of a number of constraints internal and external to students in the NCCs, including inadequate financial resources and unavailability of trained supervisors, among others. Postgraduate enrollment is arguably also constrained and hampered by the variety of difficulties which post graduate students have historically and currently face. These may be itemized as follows: • Reduction in the number of postgraduate scholarships and grants, particularly in time of economic recession • Inadequate housing for graduate students on the campuses, articularly those from the NCCs. • The lack of responsibility on the part of some supervisors 76 • The absence of an Ethics Committee and a formal structure to enforce fair supervision • Cost of travel to and from the campus countries • Delays in vetting theses by the library • Inadequate remuneration (graduate students serving as teaching assistants/ demonstrators • Cramped conditions in certain Postgraduate Sections • A lack of student loan assistance for graduate students • A feeling of being inadequately prepared at the undergraduate level for work at the postgraduate level. 2.21 Towards a More Effective & Vibrant Graduate Studies Programme Some attempts have been made by the University, perhaps not systematically enough, to alleviate some of these difficulties encountered by post graduate students. However, in more recent times carefully articulated and defined initiatives detailed have been developed by the School for Graduate Studies and Research. The main strategies now being adopted may be summarized as follows: • That there is a need for the University to develop and implement a credit based fee structure for graduate programmes which non-sponsored students can afford and which would enable them to pay for and accumulate their required credits over a period of time. • Further financial and institutional strengthening of the various postgraduate associations should be undertaken. • There should be an increase in the number of teaching assistantships available to postgraduate students as well as improvement in their remuneration. • Academic staff applying for research grant from the Campus Research and Publications Committees should be encouraged, as is being done presently, to demonstrate an inclination to involve postgraduate students in their research projects. 77 • The various Institutes and Centres of the university should be encouraged to play an expanded role in the development of graduate studies, especially in terms of the NCCs. • There should be a programme of systematic training for persons wanting or qualified to be academic supervisors. • The provision of more adequate funding for graduate students through a variety of strategies including the development of a Caribbean Regional Funding Agency, encouraging governments to include graduate students in loan schemes, or to provide more scholarships to pursue graduate studies and, strategic research partnerships with public and private sector bodies. • Create other strategies which would enable the typical potential graduate student to be able to effectively pursue his/her studies while working. A 1998 survey of graduate students at the Mona campus (whose finding were regarded by the School for Graduate Studies and Research as been equally applicable to the Cave Hill and St. Augustine campuses) revealed that 53% are heads of households, and 44% parents of children under the age 20. Approximately 85% were employed and 87% held senior or middle management positions. • Modularization of courses (linked closely to a credit based fee structure) was seen as one way of providing students with the flexibility of doing modules in a manner convenient to them while they worked steadily towards earning the degree. • The greater use of distance education modalities, such as the Internet should be encouraged to facilitate the delivery of graduate programme. Distance modalities were seen as one way of reducing costs involved in pursuing post graduate degrees, as well as, facilitating the work/study paradigm presently being pursued by most postgraduate students, and enabling continuing education. • Measures should be adopted to encourage diversity among the graduate student population in terms of facilitating the entry of disadvantaged groups such as the disabled and lower income women, as well as others including persons from the indigenous groups of the region including, for example, the Amerindians in Dominica and Guyana. • More workshops, seminars, fact-finding and promotional visits by UWI officials and, increased marketing should be undertaken to better inform potential graduate students in the NCCs of the range of opportunities and programmes offered by the UWI. • A final strategy which has been proposed relates to the development of co- supervision programmes for graduate students, especially those in the NCCs. It should be noted that the current University regulations governing graduate studies 78 allow for co-supervision of students by persons deemed suitably qualified but who are not members of the UWI regular staff, along with a regular UWI staff. To this end the Board for Non-Campus Countries and Distance Education has undertaken the task of compiling a database of potential co-supervisors located in all contributing countries. These persons are to be utilized in the training and supervision of greater numbers of students at the graduate levels from throughout the non-campus countries. There is no questioning the fact that at this juncture in the regions development there is a confluence of factors which make it imperative that the University seeks to more aggressively expand its graduate programmes. Firstly, there is growing recognition that it is through their postgraduate programmes that any university might best effect its mandate or desire to make a direct and meaningful impact on the development issues affecting the society in which it exists. Secondly, it is increasingly being recognised that the expansion of higher education may well be a defining factor in the sustained development of any country. Thirdly, with the gradual decrease in the value of a first degree, as such degrees become more common, it seems that greater emphasis must necessarily be put on post graduate qualifications and training. Fourthly, within the NCCs more and more people are acquiring graduate degrees including the MA, M.Phil and PhD degrees, thereby generating an increased awareness of the utility and possibilities of acquiring such advanced qualifications. This awareness is further bolstered by that gained by students from the NCCs who have studied at the UWI campuses or other external universities which are now placing greater emphasis on graduate studies. Fifthly, through the modalities of distance education it is possible to reach more and more persons and afford them the opportunity of gaining advanced degrees while working, and at a relatively cheaper cost than conventional programmes. Finally, the proliferation of tertiary education institutions throughout the region has provided a healthy context for the UWI and other teriary institutions in the region to have access to the calibre of persons who might act as co-supervisors for its graduate programmes. 2.22 Conclusion There can be no doubt that among the most pressing challenges facing the tertiary education sector in the region, as indeed, other developing countries is that of creating greater access at both the post-secondary, undergraduate, and postgraduate levels. However, increased access can 79 be at a great price if this expansion is not properly conceptualized and managed. As the World Bank report, Higher Education in Developing Countries. Peril and Promise observed: In most developing countries higher education exhibits severe deficiencies, with the expansion of the system an aggravating factor. Demand for increased access is likely to continue, with public and private sectors seeking to meet it with an array of new higher education institutions. Rapid and chaotic expansion is usually the result, with the public sector generally underfunded and the private (for profit) sector having problems establishing quality programmes that address anything other than short-term, market-driven needs.... Developing countries are left with a formidable task— expanding their higher education system and improving quality, all within continuing budgetary constraints.”25 It may, however, be possible for the tertiary institutions in the region to put more emphasis on exploring and utilizing the enormous potentials the revolution in communication has brought to education, and the teaching-learning processes in particular. The following chapter provides some indication of how the UWI, and other tertiary providers outside the Caribbean have been attempting to harness the benefits of distance education teaching-learning modalities to provide greater access and more programme choices for citizens of the region. 25. World Bank. Higher Education in Developing Countries. Peril and Promise. Washington DC: World Bank Task Force on Higher Education and Society, 2000, p.36. 80 Chapter 3 ICR and Expansion of Tertiary Education Provision One specific dimension of scientific and technological progress that is already having a strong effect on the tertiary education sector is the information and communication revolution..... Today, technological innovations in informatics and telecommunications are once more revolutionizing capacity to store, transmit, access, and use information. Rapid progress in electronics, telecommunications, and satellite technologies, permitting high-capacity data transmission at very low cost, has brought about the quasi neutralization of physical distance as a barrier to communication and as a factor in economic competitiveness. (The World Bank: Constructing Knowledge Societies) 3.1 Introduction The significant developments resulting from the information and communication revolution (ICR) have generated tremendous challenges and opportunities for tertiary institutions in the Caribbean. They are being challenged like never before to utilize the new modalities of the communication revolution, not least the internet, to help broaden and expand access, as well as provide training and education to enable citizens to cope with the rapid changes in the economy and society of the region. This chapter provides an overview of the ongoing efforts of especially the UWI to utilize the new technologies for teaching and learning. The emphasis on the UWI being justified since the new distance technologies are only being marginally utilized by few other institutions including the University of Guyana, the University of Technology in Jamaica, and the University of Belize, all of which acknowledge the benefits that these new technologies can provide in helping them to meet their specific educational mandates. The second part of this chapter, however, considers how the over seventy-four (74) foreign institutions presently operating in the region’s tertiary education market have been seeking to exploit the rising demand for tertiary education in the region. 81 Section 1: Distance Education at the UWI 3.2 Origins, Rationale and Early Initiatives 1978-19831 Although distance education is often spoken of as a recent development in terms of UWI policy, in reality the concept is one which has been utilized, albeit in a very limited way, by the University since 1970 when the University Council endorsed recommendations for the further development of its work in the non-campus countries.2 Early interest in distance education was generated by the belief that this mode of teaching had various benefits which would enable the University to enhance and increase its service beyond the campus countries. Distance education was seen as both a means of overcoming barriers of distance, and as a way of increasing significantly, educational opportunities of people who because of their geographical location or socio-economic position in society would otherwise find it difficult to benefit from university level education. Against the background of the perceived need for, and benefits of distance education, the UWI through the Schools of Continuing Studies/University Centres, launched in 1977/78 the Challenge Programme through the Faculty of Social Sciences at Mona, and subsequently at the other campuses, offering the BSc Part 1 to off-campus students situated in campus and non-campus countries. The objective was to allow these students the opportunity to register for and write or ‘challenge’ the UWI final examinations. Typically, students in non-campus countries registered at the campus nearest to their home country. Although it is possible to claim that in its early phase the programme did achieve some of its intended policy, its organization and implementation left much to be desired. As one report would later observe, the Challenge scheme was truly a challenge since the University only provided the syllabus, booklists, and access to the library at 1This description of the evolution of distance education first appeared in Howe, Glenford. ‘>From Ideas to Practice: The Development of the University of the West Indies Distance Education Policies and Programmes’ in Glenford Howe (ed.), Higher Education in the Caribbean. Past Present and Future Directions, Kingston Jamaica: University of the West Indies Press, 2000. 2 Marjorie Moyston, Report on Challenge/UWIDITE Programmes, prepared for Distance Education Centre, Cave Hill Campus, 1995/96, p.2 82 each Extra Mural Centre but little else.3 By the early 1980s, however, some of the problems of the Challenge initiative had been alleviated and there was an effort by the faculty to provide course material, visits from staff to non-campus territories prior to examinations to assist the students, recruiting of and liaison with local tutors and, the offering of programmes to off-campus students in campus territories. This shift in the orientation and administration of the Challenge Programme meant that these students no longer existed in virtual isolation from the University. What developed instead was a moderately interactive relationship between the Challenge students and the University.4 Many Challenge students, including this present writer, eventually moved on to a campus country to complete or start a new degree. However, many problems remained chronic in the Challenge enterprise. Importantly, by the early 1980s the UWI had also become interested in the further expansion of its distance education programmes so as to provide a better and broader range of services to its constituents, especially the non-campus countries. This interest was partly rooted in the University’s development strategy which included, for example, a process of decentralization to, among other things, enable the individual campuses to responded to challenges and opportunities more effectively and rapidly. Decentralization, especially after the major restructuring initiative in 1984, however, had the unintended effect of compounding the problem of neglect of the non- campus countries as the various campuses became more inward looking and parochial in their outlook.5 Change was however also a consequence of pressure from the non-campus countries for the University to play a more active role in the overall development in those territories.6 These 3 Gerald C. Lalor and Christine Marrett, Report on the University of the West Indies Distance Teaching Experiment, (Senate House, UWI, Mona Jamaica, November 1986), p.52. 4 Moyston, Report on Challenge/UWIDITE Programme, p.4 5 See, Neville V. Nicholls and Ivan L. Head (Co-Chairmen), A New Structure. The Regional University in the 1990s and Beyond. Report of the Chancellor’s Commission on the Governance of UWI, July 1994. Hereafter referred to the Report of the Chancellor’s Commission, p.32 6 Zellyne D. Jennings, Innovation in tertiary education in the Caribbean: Distance Teaching in the Faculty of Education at the University of the West Indies, Centre for the Study of Education in 83 countries felt that they were missing out on such benefits as employment opportunities for non- academic staff and benefits from research which is conducted mainly in and on the campus countries. At the same time, even campus countries like Trinidad and Tobago were criticizing the University for among other things failing to adopt a leadership role in any national effort in science and technology.7 In addition, throughout the period of the Challenge Programme no real effort was made, as was a major objective of the programme, to foster the development of educational resources in the non- campus countries. What happened instead was the perpetuation of University/Campus control over all aspects of the teaching and learning involved in Challenge.8 An unwieldy management /organizational structure also created much delay and confusion in the implementation of the Challenge Programme. The successful administering of the programme depended on a great number of persons and bodies dispersed over a wide geographical area but there was no single unit which co-ordinated the programme. As a result, there was confusion among students and Resident Tutors as to whom complaints should be addressed, and other people described the Challenge Programme as often appearing ‘uncoordinated, haphazard and at best only incidental to the main on-campus operations’.9 Partly in an effort to counteract what they perceived to be neglect on the part of the UWI but also as a result of their own national developmental plans non- campus countries like St. Lucia, Antigua and Grenada began to develop or expand their own national tertiary institutions.10 developing Countries, The Hague, February 1990, p.7 7 Ibid, p.7 8 E.P Brandon, Distance Education in the Restructured UWI: Policy and Problems, Unpublished paper, 1996 9 Moyston, Report on Challenge/UWIDITE Programme, p.16. 10 See Patrick A.M. Emmanuel, ‘Academic Relations of Power: The case of UWI’, Paper prepared for the XVIIIth Annual Conference of the Caribbean Studies Association, Jamaica, May 1993, pp.1-28. 84 3.3 OUS and UWIDITE 1983-1992 In response to the various developments in, and pressures from, the non-campus countries, the University established the Office of University Services (OUS) to co-ordinate and manage its outreach programmes. The policy decision to create the OUS was based on the belief that this office could rationalize the delivery of the University’s services, including those performed by the various extra-mural centres which existed in all contributing Caribbean countries.11 This rationalization was however never realized. Instead, the OUS and the extra-mural departments which were grouped under the School for Continuing Studies (SCS), operated and developed separately as autonomous organizations with separate leadership. One consequence of this anomalous situation was that the expected benefits from the pooling of expertise and resources were not realized.12 Another major response of the UWI to these challenges and pressures was to launch in 1983 its Distance Teaching Experiment (UWIDITE). This enterprise followed upon an earlier experiment in 1978 called ‘Project Satellite’ which linked, in the first instance, the Mona and Cave Hill campuses via two National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA) satellites. The success of the experiment led to the Caribbean Regional Communications Study (CARCOST), a feasibility analysis undertaken to determine whether and how interactive distance teaching and teleconferencing could contribute to education and the public service in the Caribbean.13 UWIDITE represented an attempt to explore further the potential for utilizing telecommuni- cations technology to expand the University’s educational service to sites remote from the campuses of the UWI. The CARCOST report provided the blueprint for UWIDITE, and a three year grant of US$600,000, the audio equipment for teleconferencing rooms, approximately US$220,000 for communication costs and funds for technical assistance and training were 11 Ibid, p.25. 12 Report of the Chancellor’s Commission, p.34. 13 Jennings, Innovation in tertiary education in the Caribbean, p.7 85 provided by USAID.14 The project was implemented jointly under the auspices of the UWI and the Washington based Academy for Educational Development (AED). Each UWIDITE site or Centre was equipped with microphones, speakers and audio-graphic equipment for interactive teleconferencing and various printed material were used to support on-line and off-line interaction.15 The initial teleconference was held in March 1983 between the five existing sites in Jamaica, Barbados, Trinidad, St. Lucia, and Dominica.16 With its limited resources and inadequate planning, however, the early UWIDITE operation was plagued with numerous problems which significantly affected the implementation process. One of the first difficulties which surfaced was the scepticism expressed by some faculty members who expressed the concern that the UWIDITE student would not be able to cover as much material as in a classroom setting, that the absence of face to face contact with lecturers would impact negatively on the amount and quality of learning, and that the students would not be able to read sufficiently widely.17 Even though some faculty and administrative staff, the ‘street-level bureaucrats’, eventually developed greater confidence in the UWIDITE initiative, there subsequently emerged a widespread attitude that distance education was an ‘add-on’, extra work, and somewhat of an ‘outside child’ of the University.18 Some faculty members objected to 14 Lalor and Marrett, Report on the University of the West Indies Distance Teaching Experiment, p.12. Various organizations and regional governments also made contributions to the project. See, Ibid., p.12. 15 Hall and Marrett, Quality Education via Distance Mode, p.87. 16 Gerald Lalor and Christine Marrett (with input from Robert Davis and Vilma McClenan), UWIDITE: Report 1986-1993, April 1994, p. 1-2. 17 Lalor and Marrett, Report on the University of the West Indies Distance Teaching Experiment, p.74. 18 Verieux Mourillon, ‘A University’s desire to be rapidly transformed to a Mixed Mode Institution: What is the role of Staff development in this transition?’, Dissertation submitted in part requirement for the Med degree of the University of Sheffield, January 1995. See appendix V11 entitled ‘Excerpts of statement to UWI round table on distance education, Pro-Vice Chancellor responsible for distance education (January 1995)’; See also, Report of the Chancellor’s Commission, p.35. 86 writing material for the distance education students on the basis that this amounted to spoon- feeding of the students while others maintained that their subject could not be taught in this manner.19 It was also felt by campus staff that the work of distance education, in addition to their regular teaching or administrative work, was too strenuous and the remuneration in terms of assessment and promotion quite miserly. At the same time the locally based staff at the tertiary institutions who assisted with the teaching of the University’s courses felt isolated from their colleagues and departments in the campus countries.20 One consequence of the negative attitude on the part of UWI campus staff to UWIDITE was that the assignments done by the UWIDITE students were not always treated with the necessary urgency. Another problem which plagued UWIDITE was that of the breakdown and at times confusion with the teleconferencing facilities. Although the UWIDITE teleconferencing system was impressive, there were times when the equipment at a site could be down for an entire session in consecutive weeks, and there were also times, as happened in Trinidad, when the system could be down for weeks.21 In addition, many lecturers did not possess and did not develop the necessary familiarity and skills to be able to use the teleconferencing system effectively; there was no systematic or sustained training programme organized for these lecturers. A number of complaints were made by the UWIDITE students about various things including the costliness of transportation, as well as, the difficulties encountered with transport in getting to and from the UWIDITE centers. For example, students in the rural areas of Dominica who could not get a bus to return home after 4 pm were therefore forced to remain overnight in the city until they could get a bus about 1 pm the following day. This meant that attending class at the 19 Jennings, Innovation in Tertiary education in the Caribbean, p.15. 20 Report on the Chancellor’s Commission, p.35. 21 Lalor and Marrett, Report on the University of the West Indies Distance Teaching Experiment, p.21; Jennings, Innovation in Tertiary education in the Caribbean, p.12. 87 UWIDITE center often involved the loss of two full working days.22 The easy and cost effective education which the UWIDITE project was to facilitate for people in remote areas was thus often thwarted. Another difficulty which the students encountered was that the printed materials invariably arrived from the campus too late to allow students adequate time to use them in preparation for the interactive sessions. Although this problem was in part a consequence of difficulties with the regular mail system, the problem was also rooted in the fact that distance education was viewed by campus staff as being of secondary importance. To compound the problem the libraries and resource centers in the non-campus countries were often lacking in the necessary support and reference materials. Resident Tutors and other teaching staff in the non- campus countries therefore often had to rely heavily on personal contacts in order to obtain timely responses from the faculties and administrative staff on behalf of the UWIDITE students.23 Difficulties also arose with the articulation of the Challenge and UWIDITE courses with the full degree program on the campus. It was possible, for instance, for students, such as those taking Law or Social Sciences courses, to successfully ‘challenge’ the University exams in the home country but subsequently find that there was no room for them on the campus to complete their degree.24 In the Law faculty this problem stemmed in part from the very rigid quotas for entry into the LLB programme. Country quotas, among other things, have meant that for years many students who want to pursue a career in Law have found it difficult if not impossible to do so. Overwhelming pressure and fierce competition for places in the faculty of Social Sciences also meant that students completing Part One of any of the Social Sciences programmes by distance education are not guaranteed that they will be accepted by the faculty to complete their degree, even though the faculty has moved to significantly increase its intake of students. Clearly, in this case the University’s promises of what distance education would mean especially for non-campus students, were only partially fulfilled. An unwieldy and bureaucratic system of organization of the 22 Jennings, Innovation in Tertiary Education in the Caribbean, p.13. 23 Report on the Chancellor’s Commission, p.35. 24 Brandon, Distance Education, pp.2-3. 88 distance education programme, and the University more generally, also contributed to many of the problems and frustration experienced by UWIDITE students and staff in the non-campus countries.25 However, to stress the numerous problems and challenges which UWIDITE experienced since its conception is not meant to give the impression that the programme was a failure, or that it was heavy on rhetorical policy and short on implemented policy. Any assessment of UWIDITE must necessarily seek to establish the extent to which it was or was not able to achieve what it was intended to do as outlined in its objectives which included: • demonstrating that a sufficient level of demand existed to support an operational system • creating within UWI an interest towards meeting identified demands by teleconferencing so that the institution would incorporate these as part of its armoury • establishing a core of experience, and of experienced workers, to allow the efficient design, staffing and implementation of a fully operational system for distance teaching and outreach • helping to develop mechanisms and expertise for the production of educational materials, for example, print, audio, and audio-visual materials • developing a proposal for a permanent service. This type of assessment was precisely what the 1986 Lalor and Marrett Report sought to do and it concluded that UWIDITE had gone far in terms of meeting these objectives.26 The report noted that under UWIDITE multiple programmes had been organized for community aids, technicians, teachers, nurses, university undergraduates and government agencies. This it argued demonstrated that there was enough demand to support a distance education programme over the 25 Report on the Chancellor’s Commission, pp.34-36. 26 Lalor and Marrett, Report on the University of the West Indies Distance Teaching Experiment, p.78. 89 long term. Moreover, the report maintained, ‘the number and variety of programmes; the increasing number of programmes being developed in direct response to requests from governments or organizations in the countries on the network; the numbers of participants; and the extent of usage during term time; and the keenness of the other countries to join the system show clearly that a real demand exists to support an operational system’.27 Significantly, between the inaugural teleconference in March 1983 and 1999, UWIDITE sites were increased from five to over twenty-five in fourteen countries around the region.28 This expansion can be regarded as symptomatic of the demand for UWIDITE services and was critical in helping UWIDITE to overcome some of its problems and achieve its stated short term objectives. In terms of the second stated objective the report observed that UWIDITE had been accepted as part of the University’s armory. While there is much truth in this assertion one has to be cautious in accepting this conclusion of the report. As noted earlier, even though university official policies acknowledged the integral and important role of UWIDITE in its delivery of teaching, it must be remembered that many in the various faculties, the ‘street-level bureaucrats’ still viewed the distance education enterprise as an ‘add-on’ and as peripheral to the university’s mission. The third and fourth objectives, as the report rightly concluded, were pursued with some measure of success. Efforts are still continuing to create a pool of expertise in the region to support the distance education programme and to date various educational materials have been produced by the limited pool of experts so far developed. In terms of the final objective there can be no doubt that this was met in large measure. This is, however, not the type of goal which can ever be fully and completely achieved. Given that policy making and analysis is by nature an iterative and ongoing process it can be expected that any plan or policy for UWIDITE, and more generally, for distance education, will be subject to a continuous process of evaluation, refining and reformulation. Indeed, it is this process which led to what can be regarded as the third phase in the development of UWI distance education policy making and programmes. This third phase, it can be argued, started with the creation of the Board for Distance Education which held its first 27 Ibid, p.78. 28. DEC, UWI: The UWI Distance Education Centre, Document produced by DEC, 1996/97, p.3 90 meeting in September 1993. 3.4 A New Dispensation, 1992-Present The Board replaced the Advisory Committee, which when UWIDITE was established in 1983, was convened to advise on the structure and content of UWIDITE programmes, and to liaise with the wider University community. The main functions of the Board for Distance Education included the clarification of the goals and objectives for distance education; reviewing and restructuring of distance education at the UWI; and devising methods and techniques in distance education for the development and delivery of programmes as well as, rectifying the problems affecting the emerging system. The many problems of the UWI distance education enterprise were in part revealed by the various mechanisms for feedback which the University had built into its planning and implementation process. These mechanisms included periodic visits and regular dialogue between campus-based distance education officials and the implementors in the non-campus countries, as well as the contracting of consultants to assess the implementation process. These reports were critical in not only highlighting deficiencies in the system. The recommendations incorporated in them were to lead to the rethinking and refining of the University’s distance education policies. The most significant of the reports, the Renwick Report (1992), was in fact to provide the blueprint for profound changes in the University’s distance education policies and programmes. The Renwick Report recommended, among other things, that distance education needed to be fully incorporated as an integral part of the UWI teaching and learning system which meant that the University would become a dual mode institution. The report also recommended that a Distance Education Centre be established to liaise with the faculties and manage and coordinate all distance education programmes.29 A Caribbean Development Bank (CDB) Appraisal Report also provided the basis for the development of a new and more cohesive approach to distance 29 William Renwick, Doug Shale and Chandrasekhara Rao. Appraisal of Distance Education at the University of the West Indies. Vancouver: The Commonwealth of Learning, 1992. (hereafter The Renwick Report, p.5; Report of the Chancellor’s Commission p.19. 91 education policy formulation. The Appraisal Report was, for instance, critical of the University’s uncoordinated distance education programme, technical quality, and delivery of teaching. It also called for closer relations between the UWI and the tertiary level institutions of the region, and emphasized the need for a needs assessment survey, and for the quality and cost effectiveness of the University’s distance education programme to be improved. In July 1992 the powerful decision making body, the University Academic Committee (UAC) decided that the UWI should become a dual mode institution as recommended by the Renwick report. This decision was taken within the wider context of a major restructuring exercise gradually being undertaken in the University. The principal policy guide for this reform was to be the 1994 Report of the Chancellor’s Commission which had been set up to review the governance of the University in the light of its current and prospective developmental role in the region, and of relevant developments in university administration and practice elsewhere.30 In the execution of its task the commission was to be fully cognizant of the resolve of regional governments, as expressed in the July 1989 Grand Anse Declaration, to maintain the University as a regional institution indefinitely. The Commission’s report was significant for the distance education process in that it reiterated the numerous educational problems being experienced by the non-campus countries, endorsed the need for a major distance education thrust to help rectify these problems, and called for a structural reform of the distance education system of governance. Various reasons, some old and some new, were advanced by analysts and university officials, to explain the urgency and necessity for a revived distance education programme. It was argued that because distance education was closely linked to modern telecommunications technology, it had the potential to extend its benefits to greater numbers of people than in the past.31 Distance education was also seen as a response and attempt by the governments to meet the tremendous demands for educational services in the region. Moreover, it would enable the University to help the governments to extend the opportunities available for training and retraining, and in this way 30 Report of the Chancellor’s Commission, p.3 31 The Renwick Report, p.13. 92 the University could fulfill the wish of the governments that it maintain its regional character.32 Distance education was also seen as a way for the University to shed its elitist image through greater enrollment especially from the non-campus countries. This potential benefit of distance education was likewise expressed in terms of helping the islands to fulfill national goals by increasing access to higher education and thereby help to bring about greater equality of educational opportunities. For others, distance education was a way to help stem the ‘brain drain’ or steady outward migration of the region’s brightest and most skilled people. This view was linked to the belief that an effective UWI distance education programme was urgently required in order to survive the serious challenge and aggressive competition from off-shore universities in the United Kingdom and the United States.33 The challenge from foreign universities took on additional importance given that the UWI desperately wanted to reverse a declining trend in student enrollment from the non-campus countries. In 1960/61 students from campus countries comprised 66.5% of the total University enrollment, students from the OECS countries 11.8% and those from other territories constituted 21.7 %. By 1988/89, however, students from the campus countries made up 93.5% of the total enrollment, while those from the OECS countries and the British Virgin Islands together only comprised 4% of the enrollment and those from Belize, Bahamas, Turks and Caicos and the Cayman Islands made up 1%.34 This significant shift in enrollment from the OECS and other non- campus countries, it was recognized, was not simply a matter of the prohibitive cost of on-campus study. As part of its overall marketing strategy it was promised that under the new dispensation distance education would no longer be regarded as an ‘add-on’ or ‘outside child’, but as an integral part of the University. At the same time, there was a call for the University to become more customer-oriented, and recognize in this regard that its key customers are the students.35 32 Report of the Chancellor’s Commission, p.32. 33 Ibid, p.35. 34 Ibid, p.32. 35 Report of the Chancellor’s Commission, p.32. 93 Consequent on the Renwick Report and the Report of the Chancellor’s Commission, in early March 1995 a Distance Education Unit (Centre), headed by a Director, was established at the Cave Hill Campus in Barbados under the overall leadership of the Pro-Vice Chancellor for the now defunct Office of Academic Affairs. The centre’s three main functional areas include curriculum development, programme delivery and the telecommunications network. It also engages in research and evaluation, training, and special projects and continuing education.36 Another important structural change which resulted from the Commission’s report was the establishment of a Board for Non-campus Countries and Distance Education, to manage the distance education relationship and programmes in the non-campus countries. To complement these structural changes several other investigations were undertaken which focussed on various distance education issues and areas. These included a needs assessment survey conducted by personnel of the Open University (United Kingdom) which aimed to establish the level and types of needs for distance education in the English speaking Caribbean as voiced by potential students and their sponsors. This report, which clearly was performing an iterative function in the distance education policy process, reconfirmed the view of earlier reports that there was a tremendous need for UWI’s distance education programmes in the non-campus countries.37 Another report, this time by a local consultant, played a pivotal role in the creation of a Distance Education Unit, and the development in distance education awareness and work on the St. Augustine Campus in Trinidad.38 36 DEC, UWI: The Distance Education Centre, Document produced by DEC, 1996/97, p.1; Edith Bellot et al., The University of the West Indies Distance Education Unit: Mission and policy, Course Development procedures and plans, Support Services for Distance Students, Discussion Draft prepared by Edith Bellot, David Geer, Don MacDonald, Vilma McClenan, John Moore and Bevis Peters, DEC, September 1995. 37 Alan Woodley, Outcomes from the UWI Distance Education Needs Assessment Survey. Final Report. Student Research Centre, Institute of Educational Technology, The Open University, United Kingdom, June 1995. 38 Claudia Harvey, Third and final report of the Consultancy on Distance Education 15th April- 31st July, 1996 on the St. Augustine Campus The University of the West Indies, report submitted by Dr. Claudia Harvey, Consultant, Distance Education Centre, St. Augustine Campus, UWI, 2nd August 1996. 94 All of these developments were, in large measure, made possible through development loans provided under a US$82.0 million, Inter-American Development Bank (IADB) and Caribbean Development Bank (CDB) loan package to the University. US$ 9.1 million of the funds were utilized for a massive expansion and upgrading of the UWI distance education system and programmes aimed at, among other things, significantly broadening access (especially in the non- campus countries) to university level education. With the university attempting to increase its range of programme offerings and the number of enrolments, to the order of 20,000 (full-time equivalent) students by the year 2001, up from 16,000 in the 1990s, it was anticipated that up to 1000 students per year of this increase might be achieved through distance learning programmes. This continuous process of evaluation and policy modification or reformulation resulted in and reflected an attempt by the University since the early 1990s to overhaul its distance education policies and programmes and to develop a new and comprehensive statement of policies, principles and procedures the first draft of which was produced and adopted by the Board for Non-campus Countries and Distance Education in September 1996.39 Recognizing that the establishment of a vibrant distance education programme is an ongoing process the Board in the preamble to this statement acknowledged that the document would be modified in the light of experience and consultation.40 The 2001 Strategic Plan41 articulated for the University’s distance education enterprise focused on identifying and meeting the higher education learning needs of a wider population of the university students across the Caribbean and, where appropriate, beyond; identifying and developing or modifying programmes for areas in which there was high demand; developing programmes that would significantly increase UWI enrolments; developing programmes to meet the needs of all campus and non-campus countries; and developing 39 Board for NCC & DE. Distance Education at the University of the West Indies. Statement of Policies, Principles, and Procedures, Board for Non-campus Countries and Distance Education, Adopted September 1996. 40 Ibid. 41 Board for NCC & DE, Distance education at the University of the West Indies, Strategic Plan August 1996- July 2001, adopted by Board for Non-campus Countries and Distance education, September 1996. 95 programmes identified by UWI and its stakeholders as important for economic, cultural and social development. While it would be fair to claim that the UWI has made significant strides in the development of its distance education initiative much more needs to be done to enhance the results. The UWI Strategic Plan 2002 to 2006 has made the following observation about the current status of distance education at the UWI:42 UWI’s distance education programmes have ... been evolving but the distance education market place is a rapidly changing environment and it is fair to say that the gap between the University’s distance education products and that of its competitors is widening. There are only 2,500 students enrolled in distance education programmes at UWI at the present time. UWI’s distance education programmes are heavily concentrated in the Social Sciences complemented by other offerings mainly in Education and the Humanities. The operational model is characterised by synchronous delivery of tele-lectures and teleconferencing. Course material is predominantly paper-based. The quality of academic and administrative support services to students is generally poor. Students frequently get their examinations results late. Interactivity with academic staff is very limited. The communications infrastructure imposes severe capacity constraints on programme expansion. The programme is seriously under- resourced and the existing organizational structures appear to be inadequate to support the efficient delivery of a modern and substantially enlarged distance education programme. Added pressure is also being exerted on the system by the growth in enrollment and increasing diversification of programed offerings. Enrollment in distance education programmes have actually increased from 582 in 1990/1991 to 1,447 in 1997/1998 to 2,663 in 2000/2001. Currently the Distance Education Center offers such programed as the Certificate in Public Administration, Certificate in Business Administration, Certificate in Education, Certificate in Adult Education, B.Sc Social Sciences (Level 1), B.Sc in Management Studies, B.Sc in Agribusiness Management, B.Ed in Educational Administration, and a Postgraduate Diploma in Construction Management. Further programed are being developed for delivery within the next three years include the Certificate in Gender Studies, Certificate in Records Management, 42. UWI: The University of the West Indies (Draft) Strategic Planning Framework Document 2002/03-2006/07: UWI in 2007- Shaping our Future: A Position Paper. Office of Planning, St Augustine campus August 30, 2001, p.44. 96 Bachelor in Education, M.Sc in Family Medicine, M.Sc in Counseling, Postgraduate Diploma in Cultural Studies, Post Graduate Diploma in Distance Education, and Diploma in the Management of Non-Governmental Organizations. From a systems perspective the UWI’s distance education network has also grown. The UWI’s Distance Education Center (UWIDEC) now has within its regional network 30 University Centers with 46 teleconference rooms and 29 computer labs, each approximately 800 square feet and equipped with 12 push-to-talk and one lock-on microphone for interactivity, and 20 inch viewing monitors, high performance audio speakers and a desk top personal computer. 3.5 The Future of Distance Education There can be no arguing over the fact that the new telecommunication technologies have brought significant benefits to tertiary education in terms of the use of multimedia, the Internet, computers and related technologies. These innovations have in turn heralded new pedagogical strategies and approaches, creating potentials for greater access, improved quality, and the overall enhancement of teaching and learning, as well as improved efficiencies and effectiveness, but they also bring challenges. According to the World Bank:43 Appropriate, well-functioning information and communications technologies are of vital importance to tertiary education because they have the potential to (a) streamline and reduce administrative tasks and, in general, make possible greater efficiency and effectiveness in the management of tertiary education systems and institutions; (b) expand access and improve the quality of instruction and learning on all levels; and (c) vastly broaden access to information and data- cross-campus, or across the globe. The appearance and the rapid evolution of ICT have created at least two major challenges for education: to achieve the appropriate integration of ICT into overall education systems and institutions, and to ensure that the new technologies become agents of expanded access and equity and increase educational opportunities for all, not just for the wealthy or the technologically privileged. It is in the light of these potential benefits (but recognizing the challenges) that the UWI’s Strategic Plan for the period 2002 to 2006 argues that given the geographical dispersion of the university’s constituency distance education should continue to be positioned as a necessary and 43. World Bank. Constructing Knowledge Societies, p.15 97 natural extension of the UWI’s on-campus delivery channels, with several strategic objectives of inclusion including: • to make higher education and training opportunities accessible to more people in the non-campus countries. • to bring higher education to potential students in the remote, rural areas of the campus countries. • to bring higher education to non-traditional students in general. • to use distance technologies to deliver programmes in such areas as Caribbean cultural studies, in which the university has a strategic advantage, to prospective students in Canada, the United States and the United Kingdom, especially where there are large concentrations of people from the Caribbean or with Caribbean lineage. • to use distance education to more adequately meet the need for continuing professional education, and the training and development needs of corporations. In the context of attaining all these objectives it is envisaged that there needs to be an increase in distance education enrollment from the present level of about 2,663 to between 7,500 and 10,000 students. However, in order to successfully achieve these objectives the Strategic Plan suggests that the following changes should be made to current distance education strategies: • a shift to asynchronous delivery of distance education programmes, facilitating learning on an “anytime anywhere” basis • de-linking of distance education from the faculties • adoption of Web-based delivery of programmes as the preferred mode of delivery of these programmes • greater provision of course material on a downloadable basis or in the form of CD- ROMs, and extensive use of course-authoring software applications with strong technical support and training for course developers. • commitment to the provision of greater opportunities for interactivity through electronic communication modes such as e-mail, chat-rooms, interactive teleconferencing etc. • adherence to a policy of giving faculty involved in the provision of distance 98 education full credit for that time in the allocation of academic workloads. • improved academic support for distance education, including early incorporation of the needs of the programmes in implementing the new computerized student administration system • budgeting of adequate resources for delivery and management of the distance education programmes, on a centralized basis that gives the Distance Education Center effective control of required resources and accurate costing of services and accountability. • targeting of potential students outside the region • active use of the quality assurance mechanism to enforce appropriate standards • strengthening of the public relations effort in relation to outreach, including development of a consolidated university publication to be issued on a regular basis • implementation of a differential pricing mechanism consistent with the strategic objectives outlined in the paragraph above • aggressive and effective marketing of the distance education programmes. The UWI strategic Plan also warns against believing that delivering a high quality distance education programmes is cheap but acknowledges that in the long term potential economies of scale are possible. At present the UWI mainly utilizes its various distance education sites located in School of Continuing Studies across the region for the delivery of distance education programmes but there is a case to be made for a more widespread use of the technologies to accomplish more significant interface between the UWI and the range of other tertiary institutions in the region. This imperative will become increasing evident especially in the light of the increased activity in the region’s tertiary education market by educational institutions based mainly in the United States, Canada, Britain, and even Australia. 99 Section 2: Foreign Tertiary Providers in the Region The globalization of higher education can have damaging as well as beneficial consequences. It can lead to unregulated and poor-quality higher education, with the worldwide marketing of fraudulent degrees or other so-called higher education credentials a clear example. Franchise universities have also been problematic, where the parent university meets quality standards set in the home country but offers a substandard education through its franchised programs in other countries. The sponsoring institution, mainly in the United States or Europe, often has a “prestige name” and is motivated by pecuniary gain, not by spreading academic excellence to developing countries. (World Bank: Higher Education in Developing Countries. Peril and Promise) An examination of foreign tertiary/higher education providers in, or impacting on, the Anglophone Caribbean, is primarily and essentially an exploration of the still unfolding dynamics of the increasingly significant virtualization of tertiary education provision in the region, as well as, the use of new educational technologies to meet the triple challenges of access, cost and quality. Increasingly, educational institutions are being challenged and mandated to reach out to, and educate, an ever extending and broadening range of learners, irrespective of their location, disabilities, work or home schedules, or other traditional barriers to access to formal education. The challenge is not only to educate greater numbers and types of learners but equally important, to provide the type and quality of education which can produce as many enlightened and productive citizens as possible as the basis for continued and enhanced national development, cohesion, prosperity and competitiveness. But achieving these goals with persistently shrinking budgets is no easy task for educational and other national officials. These realities have been as mentioned previously, the basis of the rapid expansion in the tertiary education market over the past two decades. While the various public and private tertiary institutions in the region have been making the necessary adjustments to meet the demands for expansion and broadening of access, they are certainly not the only ones interested in exploiting the region’s tertiary education market. A number of foreign education providers, some located in the Caribbean and others operating from bases in the USA, UK and elsewhere, have been seeking to use the new technologies to enter the rapidly expanding regional and especially 100 international tertiary education market, particularly in the areas of business and management related programmes, medical/veterinary studies, and science & technology programmes. Internationally there has been a phenomenal growth in what is alternatively called digital, online, or virtual educational providers, including universities and various consortia. Formal schooling is now no longer restricted by limitations of space or time as at a rapid pace the new communication technologies such as the Internet, have made possible interactive connectivity between learners, teachers, researchers and other stakeholders, in an ever closely knit virtual learning society. Even though there are varying degrees of virtuality being displayed by these education providers, the new educational arrangements and modalities have the capacity, to among other things: ‚ more effectively deal with the urgent and changing needs of employers for certain types of trained workers. ‚ enhance students’ ability to access better incomes and vocational opportunities. ‚ promote the attributes of life long learning ‚ transcend time and space in the teaching learning environment. ‚ provide better and more effective customization of programmes being offered ‚ overcome, in many ways, the need for large expenditures on physical educational and administrative structures. ‚ provide synchronous and asynchronous student-faculty interaction. There are, of course, many questions and challenges which accompany the increasing virtualization of tertiary education in the Caribbean. Potential students will, for example, need significant assistance in distinguishing and evaluating the quality of programed being offered by the virtual mode, while employers will increasingly have to make judgements on the quality of credentials acquired by students via the virtual mode. While it is true that issues of certification and accreditation have always been difficult to address, the advent of the virtualization of higher education has produced unparalleled difficulties for all including students, teachers and employers. 101 Another major challenge attendant on the virtualization of higher education relates to the issues of access and cost. It may be true that the new technologies such as the Internet transcend limitations of space and time, but they do little to rectify the inequalities and disadvantages caused by disparities in income. Indeed, the new technologies may even exacerbate the inequality of access to tertiary education for not only do many students and potential students, not have access to, or training to utilize the new technologies, those fortunate few who do can now use their access to these enabling and dynamic technologies to compound the disparities and further widen the educational divide. The challenge then is in making the new technologies work effectively within the context of developing countries, as those in the Caribbean. As Professor Badri Koul, Director of Distance Education at the UWI has pointed out, the numerous benefits of technology in education can only be realized when efforts are focused on making judicious and affordable applications of technologies as this can then reduce inequalities and disparities. At present there are over seventy-four (74) foreign institutions which have been operating in or impacting on the Anglophone Caribbean tertiary education sector, and this number is likely to increase in the future. In 2000 a survey44 was conducted of foreign institutions operating in the region, and at that time some sixty-three significant institutions were identified, but this figure might have been an under-estimation, since more recent figures suggest that the current number might be as about 74 institutions. However, of the sixty-two (62) institutions surveyed in 2000, it was found that 16 of the institutions have a primarily medical focus; 5 are either veterinary or schools or involved in veterinary related activities; 23 offer a wide range of subject areas; 11 are mainly business and management oriented in focus; 4 are involved in the areas of the environment, and Science and Technology; 2 are involved in law programmes; and 1 is involved in offering theology related subjects. 44. Howe Glenford (with assistance from Edwin Brandon). Foreign Tertiary Education Providers Functioning in the Anglophone Caribbean. Report Prepared for the Office of the Board for Non- Campus Countries and Distance Education, Cave Hill Campus, UI, Barbados, January 2001. Summary of this report also appeared in Howe Glenford. “The Virtual Learning Society: The changing face of education in the Caribbean”. in CARICOM Perspective Projections for the future, No70, June 2001, 34-38. 102 Most of the medical and veterinary schools, while providing a good source of revenue for the countries in which they are located, seem to be having very little impact on enrollment in local institutions since the overwhelming majority of their students are drawn from areas outside the Caribbean. Competition is mainly being provided from those institutions offering general or multi-disciplinary and those offering business related programmes. Although it is difficult to make the point definitively, it also seems that greatest competition for local tertiary educational institutions emanates from those well established institutions operating out of the UK & USA, and who are now using the various distance education technologies to access student demands in the Caribbean. At least 8 different delivery or teaching mode types of tertiary institutions, including the indigenous and foreign ones, are presently operating in the Anglophone Caribbean, reflecting some of the various types of combination of distance and face to face teaching modalities which are possible. These categories are not rigid since as institutions develop and grow or rethink their delivery strategies, their methods of programme delivery may also reflect changing and varying degrees of use of education technology. ‚ Caribbean Government-funded, primarily face to face, (with the exception of UWI with its emerging Distance Education programme) National colleges, Community colleges, University Colleges, and Polytechnics. ‚ Caribbean Private Sector Funded, primarily face to face, such BIMAP: Barbados Institute of Management and Productivity and the numerous other specialist training institutions in the region. ‚ Well established or traditional institutions based in UK & USA especially offering programmes to the Caribbean by traditional correspondence ( with a limited but perhaps increasing degree of modern distance education modality) which may also involve some visit to the institution’s home base for face to face teaching. This category would include the University of London Law degree programmes. ‚ Well established or traditional institutions based in UK, USA, Australia etc offering programmes via modern day distance technologies such as Internet. ‚ Foreign Offshore institutions with Physical Structures in the Caribbean such as St Georges University Medical School in Grenada, as well as, most of the other 103 offshore medical schools. The actual size and sophistication of these physical structures vary considerably among the institutions. ‚ Foreign Offshore Virtual Universities based in the Caribbean and offering programmes to all parts of the globe. This would include such institutions as the Eastern Caribbean University based in St Kitts, and the Commonwealth Open University located in the British Virgin Islands. ‚ Foreign Offshore (mixed mode institutions based in the Caribbean and offering courses to all parts of the globe. This category would utilize the physical infrastructure of a local institution such as a community college since they have no physical structures of their own. Much of the teaching is done using various distance technologies but there are intermittent periods of residency in the Caribbean at the facilities of the community college or host institution. One such example is Berne University in St Kitts, which utilizes the facilities of the Clarence Fitzroy Bryant College. ‚ Professional Societies (usually with local branches/chapters) operating out of USA, UK, Canada, etc offering professional qualifications to people across the globe. These would ACCA, CGA, etc. 3.6 Some Considerations for the Future Given the rapidly changing nature of tertiary education provision in the region it seems imperative that both local and foreign institutions seek at the earliest possible opportunity to create mechanisms which would allow them to learn from each other’s experiences with a view to achieving greater efficiencies and effectiveness in the delivery of their programmes. Likewise, greater collaboration can produce substantial benefits not only in terms of meeting CARICOM and other educational enrollment targets for the tertiary education sector, but equally important with respect to producing the type of trained, productive and enlightened citizen the region desires. It seems somewhat of an anomaly to have membership of an organization like the Association of Caribbean Tertiary Institutions (ACTI) restricted to, or composed of, those institutions regarded as local or indigenous. In many ways some of the so-called, or perceived to be, foreign education institutions including St. Georges University in Grenada, have a very legitimate claim to be categorized as local or indigenous institutions. Apart from the fact that they are located no where 104 else, many now play a critical role in the development of the cultural, social and economic infrastructure of the region. Furthermore, as a group, the various foreign institutions operating in the region display some features which might be usefully adopted and adapted by the University of the West Indies and other local tertiary institutions. These include, for example: ‚ Flexible admissions policies and admission dates. ‚ An entrepreneurial approach to the marketing of their programmes and a belief that the world is their market place. ‚ Work internship programmes which may count for credits in a given academic programmes while bridging the gap between the academic institution and the workplace. Closer collaboration among the various institutions in the region can also provide the basis for stemming some of foreign exchange drain which results from Caribbean students having to do a range of professional qualifications through foreign bodies located primarily in the United States and the United Kingdom. Among the professional and accreditation bodies operating in the region are the: ACCA: Association of Chartered Certified Accountants ACP: Association of Computer Professionals CGA: Certified General Accountants (Canada) CIM: Chartered Institute of Marketing CIMA: Certified Institute of Management Accounting (British version of CMA) 105 CMA: Certified Management Accountants (Canada & USA) IMIS: Institute for the Management of Information Systems It would be quite informative to find out just how much money flows out of the region to these external accreditation bodies. To see the magnitude of the problem one only needs to reflect on the fact, for example, that increasingly most accounting and management students feel or are being pressured to acquire professional qualifications such as the ACCA, CGA or CMA, in order to get a “good” job. For the most part, education stakeholders tend to see the operations of these accreditation bodies as being acceptable and unavoidable, with little reflection on developing Caribbean/Latin American based accreditation institutions, associations and organizations, which may possibly be affiliated with those overseas. Such a move can be seen as desirable for the simple reason, as noted previously, that no one can question that the income which goes to these foreign accrediting organizations on an annual basis is substantial, even if not precisely known. We may therefore justifiably ask whether a consortia of universities in the Caribbean and Latin America, and including some of the foreign tertiary education providers in the region, through CARICOM or the Association of a Caribbean States could not develop appropriate accreditation programmes for the subject areas, which are comparable in quality to the ACCA, CGA, etc. One should remember that most of these graduates end up working in the Caribbean and Latin America, anyway. The experience of the Caribbean Examinations Council (CXC) as an indigenous testing and accreditation institution, now being used as a model for other countries around the world, should serve to inspire and build confidence in our ability to develop such bodies at the tertiary education level. There is clearly a compelling need for a paradigm shift within the regional education sector which emphasizes the development of more effective collaborative frameworks between those institutions regarded as indigenous and those regarded as being foreign. Such productive relationships ought necessarily to be the basis for any fundamental changes in curricular content as 106 well as in teaching/delivery modalities. This type of interface within the regional education sector is required not only to attain efficiency and effectiveness in the delivery and content of education, but also to properly define and develop quality assurance and bench-marking mechanisms and measures for the region’s tertiary education sector. The critical challenge for the various tertiary education institutions is not whether they can afford to develop these collaborative mechanisms and processes, but rather, in the light of the changing face of education world wide, whether they can afford not to institute the desired changes in a timely manner. 107 Chapter 4 Governance, Innovations & International Cooperation In many countries rigid governance models and management practices are preventing tertiary education institutions from embracing change and launching reforms and innovations..... (World Bank: Constructing Knowledge Societies) To successfully fulfill their educational, research, and informational functions in the 21st century, tertiary education institutions need to be able to respond effectively to changing education and training needs, adapt to a rapidly shifting tertiary education landscape, and adopt more flexible modes of organization and operation. (World Bank: Constructing Knowledge Societies) 4.1 Introduction Against a background of change and turmoil in the social and economic environments in which they operate educational institutions in the Caribbean are now recognizing, albeit in varying degrees, that there is need for more adequate consideration of issues of governance, innovations and international cooperation. Older institutions are now more cognizant that their structures and relations of governance and management are in need of transformation and re-engineering to achieve success, and remain relevant in the new highly competitive global environment. This includes a reconsideration of their relationships with the state, student and staff bodies, industry, the Alumni, other tertiary institutions both locally, regionally and globally, as well as a rethinking of their own financial operations, leadership styles and institutional capacities, among other concerns. But they also realize that good governance also stems from and requires innovations, as well as, regional and international cooperation. 108 In this chapter illustrations will be drawn primarily from the UWI experiences since it is that institution which has undergone the most sustained attempts at reform over time. Furthermore while it may be true that other institutions such as the Sir Arthur Lewis Community College, and the Barbados Community College, among others, have been involved in institutional reorganization with their own unique features, it would be fair to claim that the lessons of experience, both good and bad, of the UWI’s change process have helped to inform the processes of change now taking place in other tertiary educational institutions in the region. The changes at the UWI have also in turn been influenced by experiences of other tertiary education institutions, and business institutions, regionally and globally. 4.2 Definition and Configuration of Governance Governance is perceived and defined in this chapter much in the same way that the World Bank report “Higher Education in Developing Countries” conceptualizes the term. According to that report:1 The term ‘governance’ indicates the formal and informal arrangements that allow higher education institutions to make decisions and take action. It includes external governance, which refers to relations between individual institutions and their supervisors, and internal governance, which refers to lines of authority within institutions. Governance overlaps considerably with management; the latter is seen as the implementation and execution of policies... Formal governance is official and explicit. Informal governance refers to the unwritten rules that govern how people relate to each other within higher education: the respect accorded professors and administrators, the freedom to pursue research, and the traditions of student behaviour, to name a few. With the proliferation of private and public tertiary institutions in the region over the past two decades it is not surprising that there is considerable diversity in their approaches, methods and relations of governance. Roberts makes the following observation:2 1World Bank. Higher Education in Developing Countries. Peril and Promise. Washington DC: World Bank Task Force on Higher Education and Society, 2000. 2. Vivienne Roberts, “Programme Articulation: The Making of a Regional Tertiary Education System”, Journal of Education and Development in the Caribbean, Vol.3, no.2, 1999, p.147 109 Governance arrangements are ... varied with many institutions falling directly under the direction and management of the Ministries of Education; others are statutory under the control of a Board of Directors and yet others are private corporations. Governance structures usually impact on institutional autonomy in terms of academic programme development and quality assurance. Some public institutions under the direct control of ministries perceive disadvantages of flexibility, and responsiveness in programming and constraints on appointments, promotions and staff development. Even in these situations, however, some colleges at the operational level enjoy a considerable amount of public trust and institutional autonomy but aspire to official autonomy through legislation and stated philosophy. The variations in mission and extent of political control are reflected in the variations in programming–the range, levels and purposes of programmes. Depending on the college’s location and orientation, there may be more or less basic or advanced programmes, technical/vocational or academic programmes, part-time or full-time offerings, short or long-term programmes. It is therefore problematic to make sweeping generalizations with respect to governance at these institutions. Nevertheless, the experiences of the UWI and other institutions cited in this chapter might be instructive given the common nature of the challenges they face, and the environment in which they function. 110 Section1: The Crisis of Governance 4.3 Evolution of Governance at the UWI While the establishment of the UWI in 1948 can be said to have been in part the product of West Indian nationalist impulse, it also represented according to Lloyd Brathwaite, “a parting gesture intended to ensure the consolidation of an ideological and cultural venture by the British in the era of political independence”.3 As such, when the UWI began its teaching functions in Jamaica in October 1948, it was as a college in tutelage to the University of London. From the outset, then, the UWI was to inherit from the University of London on which it was modelled, a system of governance and organizational structure of the bureaucratic type. Significant, too, the original concept behind the founding of the UWI was that there would be one institution with a single campus, a central Governing Body, residential, with staff and students from throughout the West Indies and a programme of extra-mural studies. However, not only were new faculties added to the Faculty of Medicine which was the first unit of the UWI to be established in Jamaica, but other campuses were subsequently established at St. Augustine in Trinidad and at Cave Hill in Barbados. As a result the UWI was to evolve an even more elaborate, burdensome, and complicated organizational structure. The system of governance which developed at the UWI since its founding has been described by Emmanuel as being more, federal or plural than unitary, reflecting the reality of three campuses in three different independent states, as well as, several non-campus countries (NCCs) who are also contributing members.4 There developed a hierarchy of officials including a Chancellor, Vice- Chancellor, Campus Principals, Deputy Principals, Pro-Vice Chancellors (PVCs), Deans (including University and Campus Deans), and Heads of Departments, including Directors of 3As quoted in, Hopeton L.A. Gordon, ‘University and Nation Building in the Commonwealth Caribbean: Early Commitments’, Journal of Caribbean Education, vol. 11, nos.1 & 2, April- Sept., 1984, p.187 4 Patrick A.M. Emmanuel, ‘Academic Relations of Power: The Case of the UWI’, paper prepared for the XV111th Annual Conference of the Caribbean Studies Association, May 1993, Jamaica, p.10. 111 Institutes. The UWI’s organizational structure also consisted of a main University Council and other Councils for each of the campuses, comprising Government and University representatives. It also had a Senate which through a smaller University Academic Committee (UAC) was responsible for management of academic affairs. Appointments, tenure and promotion fell under the control of Appointments Committees of the University as a whole and of each campus as well as, a University Assessment and Promotions Committee which acted in an advisory capacity to the Appointments Committees. On each campus academic administration was handled, in descending, order by Campus Academic Boards, made up of representatives across Faculties, then of Faculty Boards and at the bottom level, Departments of each Faculty. The main point then is that the University was essentially run by a plethora of committees, some of which had overlapping functions. This elaborate system of committees might on the surface be regarded as being based on a Systems Approach to management but because of its size, complexity, and overlaps, among other things, in reality the system of governance did not function in harmony and close collaboration. Instead, what resulted was an enormous amount of ‘red tape’, much delay, and lots of paper being generated since a single item was likely to be addressed in various papers of different committees within and across campuses.5 The managerial system which evolved was one in which power, as in most highly bureaucratized organizations was centralized and restricted to a small number of people at the top of the administrative hierarchy. Emmanuel attempted to capture the essence of this situation when he pointed out that in addition to the Vice Chancellor and the Principals, Deputy Principals and other PVCs belonged as full members to all the key University (cross-campus) committees, especially the Academic Committee, the Appointments Committee and the Assessment and Promotions Committee, and they also sat on the parallel campus committees on their respective campuses. 6 This situation, in addition to grossly insufficient interaction between officials and staff, may partly 5 Ibid, p.14. 6 Ibid, p.12. 112 explain why there existed within the University “an absence of transparency in administrative decision-making” as well as, a “disturbing absence of the responsibility that Democracy demands”.7 The situation was compounded by the poor communications mechanisms within the University. The 1994 Chancellor’s Commission of Inquiry discovered much evidence which showed how poorly informed many staff were about how the University worked and what its policies were.8 The Inquiry revealed that this ignorance was due to the lack of effort on the part of the University to keep staff informed. It concluded that morale at the University would be greatly enhanced if staff were better informed, and misunderstandings and conflict would be less likely to arise if more information was available on a regular basis and in a digestible form. Clearly, a combination of the systems approach to management, emphasizing the interrelatedness of the parts of the University, as well as, the Human Relations approach, focussing on the workers as people, was required to significantly improve this state of affairs. Most of the academic staff only participated in University’s administration through membership of Department and Faculty Boards. As such, most had no institutionalized direct access to the University’s directorate. This does not mean that there was no opportunity for staff to consult with senior officials, but rather that the nature of any such contact tended to be individualistic rather than collective. To some degree then it would be fair to say that Michel’s thesis about bureaucratic organizations inevitably producing oligarchy, or rule by a small elite (the iron law of oligarchy), could be used to describe the managerial system which eventually developed at the UWI.9 One consequence of this apparent lack of meaningful participation in the running of the UWI, was the development of a pervasive sense of alienation and cynicism among staff. The Chancellor’s Commission of Inquiry noted that throughout the UWI there existed “severe dysfunctions and a 7 Report of the Chancellor’s Commission, pp.8-10. 8 Ibid, p.42. 9 See, Robert Michels, Political Parties: A Sociological Study of the Oligarchical Tendencies of Modern Democracy, New York: The Free press; London: Collier Macmillan, 1962. 113 disturbingly low level of morale” within and between academic and administrative staff and students, as well as, a “pervasive, unhealthy suspicion of the motivation and acts of others”.10 The report concluded that within the UWI unity was more evident in rhetoric than in reality.11 This alienation as Thoms, and others have observed, is usually a major consequence of a bureaucracy and results from a deficient integration of the individual’s needs, interests, and potentials with the goals of the organization.12 This ‘floating paranoia’, as C. Wright Mills described it, usually results from people feeling that they have little control over their job situation and the over- centralization of power.13 Throughout the period of its development there has been little real evidence of the encouragement of the ideals (self-realization, trust and openness), of the Human Relations Approach to management which might have helped to integrate the individual and the organizational goals. This alternative approach would, equally important, have helped to fulfill the multiple expectations, needs, rights, privileges, duties and obligations, of both the individual and the organization, which although they do not form part of a formal agreement, nonetheless exercise significant influence on staff behaviour and the overall people-organization relationship. In other words, there would have been a greater sense that the psychological contract between the staff and the organization was being satisfactorily honoured. Following the line of B. Guy Peters14, who argued that public apathy was the greatest danger to bureaucratic accountability and a democratic state, Emmanuel has suggested that the academic staff of the UWI must bear the major part of the responsibility for the sense of alienation which 10 The Report of the Chancellor’s Commission, pp.8-10. 11 Ibid, p.8. 12 Douglas J. Thoms, Educational Management and Leadership: Word, Spirit and Deed for a Just Society, Alberta: Detselig Enterprises, 1993, p.44. 13 Quoted in Thoms, Educational Management, p.44. 14 Cited in Ibid, p.321. 114 emerged.15 According to him the staff failed to develop a professional association to promote and safeguard professional interests in the management of the University. Moreover, he maintained, the academic staff seemed incapable of manifesting anything higher than a ‘trade union consciousness’ so that the West Indian Group of University Teachers (WIGUT), which is registered as a trade union, seemed obsessed only with issues of pay and perquisites. However, while there may be a good deal of truth in Emmanuel’s assessment, it may be argued that he failed to capture the complexity of the UWI’s staff response to the effects of the bureaucracy. More specifically, he seemed to have ignored the informal aspects of UWI’s organization, which are just as important, even if not very visible, in determining the culture at the UWI. Modern analysts of organizations have pointed out that people tend to deal with the shortcomings and ill-effects of bureaucracy by forming social groups or operating a ‘mock’ bureaucracy and acting instead within an informal organization that they themselves establish. These informal groups often develop their own aims which may or may not be consistent with those of the formal organizations. Significantly, however, while these groups represent important coping strategies among lower level staff, they may also operate among senior administrative staff and may be important in determining power relations between both groups. Although the configurations of these informal groups have never been easily identifiable at the UWI or any other tertiary organizations, in the region, the effects they produce are often readily felt. 4.4 Different Bottles, Same Wine?: Examples from St Lucia, Dominica, Belize & Jamaica 4.4.1 Sir Arthur Lewis Community College The experiences of the Sir Arthur Lewis Community College which has also been the subject of attempts at reform reveal, arguably, striking similarities to the UWI, of the inadequacy of existing governance structures which existed, and which precipitated initiatives to transform that institution. Due to repeated calls from staff and other stakeholders for a review of the college’s operations, in 1992 the Board of Governors of that institution appointed a team of educational 15 Emmanuel, Academic Relations of Power, p.14. 115 experts to undertake an assessment exercise under the auspices of the Association of Caribbean Tertiary Institutions (ACTI). The ACTI report concluded the following in respect of the weaknesses of the college:16 The organisational structure of the management and the divisional structure of the programmes engenders fierce loyalties to Divisions but undermine and subvert college unity. The organisational and divisional structures reflect the fact that the College is an amalgamation of several institutions: the `A' Level College, Technical College, Teacher's College, Nursing School and Agricultural College. These separate institutions have been incorporated in the College as Divisions and Departments, where the former Principals have become Deans or Co-ordinators. While staff and students remain very loyal to their Divisions, College unity and a collegiate spirit are still objectives to be achieved at some time in the future. While the divisional structure can be credited as a factor in the high levels of student achievement.... it is wasteful in the deployment of teachers as several duplications occur in the arrangements made for teaching the same subjects to students in different Divisions. Also, the divisional structure does not create the circumstances in which such wasteful deployments can be easily reconciled. One of the main weaknesses of this structure is that it is a fertile breeding ground for feelings and perceptions of discrimination, superiority/ inferiority, isolation, alienation and conflict. Another weakness, of equal importance, is that aspects of structural divisions of the College are reflective of social divisions within the larger St. Lucian society. Taken together it means that the College as it is currently organised, is making little contribution to deepening the bonds of unity, solidarity and social cohesion within St. Lucian society. This is an important consideration in that most of the future leadership of the society is likely to arise from the ranks of students educated at this College. Human relations in the college manifest several strains, anxieties and tensions that could eventually jeopardise the public image of the College and hamper its further development by generating unnecessary conflicts. Staff and students perceive themselves as remote from the governance of the College. At the same time their participation in College life is limited almost entirely to their substantive teaching and learning responsibilities. The results are inadequate communication between all the major stakeholders, feelings of alienation and frustration on the part of some 16. In July 1992, the Sir Arthur Lewis Community College Board of Governors appointed a team consisting of Dr. Alfred Sangster, Professor Errol Miller, Dr. Keva Bethel, Mr. Carol Keller, Mr. Fred Williamson, Ms. Mary Grant, Ms. Fay Saunders and Ms. Patricia Charles to review the work and progress of the College after five years of operations. This extract is from their report, sections of which was provided by the Ministry of Education, St Lucia. 116 staff and students, and perceptions of staff and students' resistance and lack of co- operation on the part of the leadership of the College. Underlying these strains in human relations are some important structural weaknesses. The Board has no representatives from the College. Inside the College, decision-making is largely confined to the Principal, Registrar, Deans and Co-ordinators with limited input from the rest of the staff and almost no input from the Students. At the same time student government is not effectively organised. This limits the possibility to mobilise their participation in College governance. The concatenation of these circumstances have led to many misperceptions of roles, responsibilities and actions and several misunderstandings concerning several sound and wise decisions taken by the Board and leadership of the College. This is despite the fact that the College plans, processes and procedures are well documented. The team of reviewers also expressed concern over the overwhelming number of courses and scheduled classes with which students had to cope. In some programmes, for example, students had to carry as many as fourteen subjects per semester and attend classes from 8am through 3pm or 4pm without any significant break for lunch. This problem, concluded the reviewers, was not only unhealthy, uncharacteristic of tertiary level education, expensive and counterproductive, but also made it impossible for staff and students to participate in research and exploration on their own, or be involved in important non-academic activities deemed vital to meaningful staff and student interaction outside of the classroom. These numerous problems of governance and management at the college led to major restructuring exercises with the additional help of advisors from Nipissing University. The ongoing re-organization of the college has been seeking to among other things: • allow both full-time and part-time students, with appropriate counseling and advice from College Advisors, to plan their programmes and to move expeditiously and economically towards their academic goals. • reduce the cost of College operations by reducing the cost of designing and redesigning programmes • allow for better time-tabling and more efficient and effective use of physical space and full-time college staff. 117 4.4.2 Dominica: Towards a Dominica College The tertiary education system in Dominica is presently composed of three colleges namely, the Nursing School, Clifton Dupigny Community College and the Dominica Teachers Training College which together have a combined enrollment of approximately 759 students, 47 full-time and 25 part-time instructors. Even though Dominica has had a college system for more than twenty-eight years it is generally acknowledged that a major cause of low productivity and lack of competitiveness in Dominica is the lack of trained human resources participating in the country’s economy, and the tertiary education system’s lack of capacity to deliver the required training for the knowledge economy was very weak. A recent (2000) study by Thomas and Peters carried out under the auspices of the OECS Tertiary Education programme reform strategy made the following uncompromising comments with respect to the challenges facing the tertiary education system in Dominica:17 Tertiary education and training in Dominica have been severely affected over the last two decades, mostly because of severe systems’ deficiencies and a general lack of vision at various levels of Government. The tertiary education system experiences a series of severely dilapidated buildings, archaic equipment, shortage of educational supplies, including minimum library facilities, and staff with severe training and professional deficiencies. For the past two decades, there have been unsuccessful attempts to amalgamate the existing three post-secondary institutions and make them more effective and responsive. One reason for those failed attempts has been the general lack of commitment by Government to follow-up and to implement those recommendations. This lack of action by government has been attributed, according to some senior Ministry of Education officials, to its lack of vision and its ability then, to successfully resist the pressure to change. Today, re-developing its post-secondary education system is not an option for government. It is an absolute necessity. Sources of development funding and technical assistance from traditional donor countries have literally evaporated. Dominica, like its other Caribbean neighbours, must develop its own base of human resources to replace the shortage of developmental capital and technical assistance that were once in abundance..... However, the task to modernize will not be easy. There are numerous systemic and other difficulties endemic within the current college system in Dominica. 17. Thomas, Hilroy, and Donald C. Peters. Re-Development Plan for The Dominica College. Final Report. Prepared for the Government of Dominica and the OECS Tertiary Education Programme, Castries St. Lucia, November 2000., pp.5 & 38. 118 Those difficulties range from the critical under-funding of both physical and learning/teaching resources (as is indicated by current expenditure on tertiary education representing 7% of the total education budget); a constricted and limited system of institutional leadership; inefficiency in programme content, development an delivery; to an overall deficiency in mission, vision, creativity and critical resources. In spite of the severity of these challenges and with the help of the OECS Secretariat, and other institutions, a clear plan has been formulated in an effort to help rectify the problems and weaknesses of the tertiary education sector in Dominica. The main aspects of the Dominica College’s redevelopment strategy seek to:18 • Provide the new re-developed college with the legislative authority to govern and regulate itself, and develop programmes and services independent of the Ministry of Education. • Consolidate and amalgamate the three existing colleges under one unified college structure and governance. • Upgrade and expand existing programmes and develop new ones along the lines of other similar programmes regionally and overseas. • Expand new programmes to include Hotel and Business, Agriculture and Environmental Science, Informational Systems, and Continuing and Adult Education. • Form affiliations with regional and international agencies and institutions to ensure the college system delivers quality programmes and services; that graduates of the college system meet industry standards; and they can proceed overseas for further training with the confidence that their education in the Dominica college system is equal in value to that of any other country in the world. • Obtain assistance from overseas institutions and governments for staff (on loan) and for professional and academic training for existing college staff. • Obtain assistance from overseas sources to develop and expand the physical facilities to create a truly “college campus environment” characterized by high academic achievement, student residence, recreational facilities and modern 18. Ibid. 119 equipment and other resources. The review by Thomas and Peters concluded that: “Today, there is no more room to resist the pressures to change and re-develop the college system. Traditional sources of development funding and technical assistance from donor countries are rapidly disappearing. Dominica must quickly develop the technical and professional skills of its citizens to be able to adequately compete globally in this ever-changing social and economic environment.”19 4.4.3 Challenges of Technical and Vocational Education in Belize The problems plaguing the tertiary education sector in the region are not restricted to the more academic type institutions, many of which also provide some degree of technical and vocational education and training. There is some evidence to suggest that throughout the region the technical and vocational sub-sector of the tertiary education systems have also being experiencing difficulties which impact on their capacity to meet the needs of national economies which are becoming increasingly knowledge based. A year 2000 Caribbean Development Bank commissioned report focusing on the technical and vocational education and training sector in Belize provided the following details on the problems and challenges currently facing that sub- sector of the education system, in the broader context of the overall tertiary system.20 The post-secondary/tertiary education system is not very well developed and includes the Junior Colleges which offer programmes in general education at the General Certificate of Education (GCE)/Caribbean Examinations Council (CXC), GCE Advanced Level and business education disciplines at the Associate Degree level. The Belize College of Agriculture (BCA), the Belize Technical College (BTC) and the University College of Belize (UCB) offer several technical specialties, such as Building and Construction Technology; Architectural Technology; Veterinary Technology; Mechanical and Electrical Technology; and Business Education to the Associate Degree level. The Belize Nursing School and Belize Teacher Training College (BTTC) produce nurses and teachers, respectively, for the public service. Five of the tertiary level institutions (BTC, BCA, UCB, Belize School of Nursing and BTTC) are to be merged to become the 19. Ibid. 20. CDB. Appraisal Report on Enhancement of Technical and Vocational Education and Training- Belize., October 2000. 120 University of Belize (UB) in an effort to increase access and efficiency in the tertiary system. Access to tertiary education is very limited and restricted providing limited career options and opportunities for the thousands of students leaving the secondary schools. In 1998/99 while there were 11,720 students enrolled in 33 secondary schools there were only 1,600 enrolled in all tertiary “schools” and UCB. It is estimated that between 6.5% and 8% of the age cohort, 18-24 are enrolled in tertiary education which falls short of the Caribbean Community (CARICOM) target of 15% and the 51% and 21% for developed and middle income developing countries, respectively. Given the limited capacity at the post-secondary level, access is likely to be adversely affected as efficiency in secondary education improves and more graduates exit placing increasing demands at the post- secondary level. TVET which represents a broad mix of programmes intended to prepare students for entering and progressing in the world of work is offered at the secondary and post-secondary level of the system. Planning and coordination of the TVET sub-sector is deficient in many respects, being characterised by a centralised management structure which limits opportunities for interventions and participation of critical stakeholders. There is no official national policy framework within which TVET activities are planned and implemented. There is a multiplicity of activities taking place in the sub-sector from the informal and pre-vocational activities conducted by NGOs to the more formal higher level programmes offered by MOES, yet they all operate in isolation of each other and of the economic imperatives and labour market. There is limited, usable and shared information about programmes which are in operation as it relates to enrolment, the level of programmes and the kind of certification to be gained at the end, and how each programme relates to, and articulates with others offered elsewhere. This situation has potential for causing duplication, fragmentation and waste of scarce resources. Further, there is no system for evaluating the usefulness of these initiatives and to provide feedback for making improvements and taking other kinds of corrective measures. The planning of TVET activities is not now being informed by appropriate labour market information. Arising from the deficiency in planning, there is a clear over emphasis on the supply side issues to the almost total exclusion of demand considerations of the labour market and the economic opportunities in the society. There also appears to be an almost exclusive focus on the basic and entry level education and training of youths while neglecting the needs of existing workers and adults in the society for retraining to meet certification requirements and for coping with new and emerging technologies, being introduced into the workplace. 121 Obviously, while the Belize case cannot be used to generalize about the region as a whole, it does nevertheless provide some insights into the myriad of difficulties facing the technical and vocational sector of education in the region, especially given the similarities of the challenges faced by the various Caribbean countries, with respect to economies and the technological and information/communication revolution’s impact on the world of work.. 4.4.5 From College to University Status: The Challenges of Change of UTECH, Jamaica This final example of the multiplicity of governance and managerial difficulties faced by the region’s tertiary sector seeks to highlight the fact that the various institutions not only have difficulties in their current state, but that these problems are often compounded and new ones added when they seek to upgrade from one level of the tertiary system to a higher level, as was the case of the University of Technology in Jamaica which was upgraded in 1995 from being the College of Arts, Science and Technology (CAST). The following were among the problems identified by a recent SWOT Analysis carried out on the University of Technology, with respect to the change from College status to a University status:21 • That the leadership of UTECH had limited experience in management of degree level programmes, or in the exploitation of its “entrepreneurial” potential or in coping with the rapidly changing environment in which the institution operated. • That UTECH needed a strong research component but that those skills being lacking among the staff and therefore had to be imported until systems could be put in place for developing/transferring this orientation to current staff not so disposed. • That staff were not sure what qualifications were needed for even though they knew the level of qualification required some might be acquiring them in inappropriate disciplines, or from unacceptable institutions. • That technical support staff in a number of faculties were inadequately prepared to 21. GMS Inc: SWOT Analysis of the University of Technology, Jamaica. Document provided by the Caribbean Development Bank, 2002. The document is Appendix A of another unspecified report. 122 provide the required support services in a university environment. • That most of the university was not wheelchair accessible whereas this type of accessibility was essential if the university was to be seen as serving the entire community. • That there was limited articulation between UTECH and UWI programmes, or with other private institutions operating in Jamaica and the Caribbean. • That there was no evidence of the existence of administrative and support staff development policies at UTECH. • That UTECH’s academic student services including academic counselling and access to learning centres were very weak. • That there was a lack of well defined academic management framework that clearly defined the roles and responsibilities of academic staff beyond teaching and marking of tests and examinations. • That UTECH’s relationship with its alumni was somewhat ad hoc, because there was no capacity within UTECH to sustain a strong alumni network. • Finally, that UTECH was caught between the CAST tradition of attracting students who were otherwise not eligible for admission to UWI, and the transition to degree programmes. Again, the UTECH experience ought not be used to make sweeping generalizations about the process of upgrading institutions within the tertiary education sector but there are certainly many lessons which may be learnt from the UTECH case and which will no doubt become evident as Barbados, for example, implements its rationalization of its tertiary institutions to form the new University College of Barbados. It was in the light of these numerous and widespread difficulties throughout the region’s entire tertiary education sector that most governments and other stakeholders by the late 1990s had come to general consensus that reform of that sector was an urgent imperative 123 Section 2: The Experiences of Implementing Change 4.5 The Era of Change: The UWI Experience It was against the background of a state of increasing bureaucratization and its ill-effects that in 1984 the UWI engaged in what was supposed to be a beneficial major restructuring exercise involving significant decentralization. In October 1984 a new mechanism for the governing of the UWI, usually called the ‘restructuring of the University’, was implemented.22 The objective of this restructuring was to give the campuses greater autonomy in order that the University could respond and contribute more effectively to the perceived national needs of its contributing members. The Vice Chancellor, Aston Preston explained that the contributing governments agreed that they wanted to retain the regional University but they felt that the former highly- centralized structure was not sufficiently responsive to their needs and hence they wanted a mechanism which would enable them to make a more direct input into the management and organization of the campus in their territory.23 At the same time the non-campus countries wanted some means of safeguarding their interests and ensuring that their needs were met. Additionally, members of the academic community felt that the time had come for each campus to have greater control over academic matters at the campus and that whereas central decision-making was essential for the maintenance of high and uniform academic standards, the procedures needed to be revised to eliminate delays.24 The 1984 restructuring was made against the background of a search since the 1970s especially, for ways of achieving devolution in order to allow the University to play a greater and more meaningful role in the national development of the campus and non-campus countries. To this end in 1972 the Charter and Statutes of the University were revised to facilitate the process of devolution. 22 Sir Roy Marshall (Chairman), The Marshall Report on the University of the West Indies Cave Hill Campus, 1986, p.4. 23 Gordan, University and Nation-Building, p.184. 24 Ibid. 124 As part of the 1984 restructuring and new system of governance, the Council, the Senate, the Appointments Committee, the Joint Assessment and Promotions Committee, the University Grants Committee and the Technical Advisory Committee were retained. In addition, however, new bodies were added at the campus level, paralleling the ones at the Centre. On each campus there was added a Campus Council, a Campus Grants Committee along with a Campus Technical Advisory Committee, and a Campus Finance and General Purposes Committee, to which the Campus Council delegated some of its responsibilities.25 These new committees were composed mainly of persons from the respective campus countries, but there was some representation from the non-campus countries, as well as, from the University’s central administration. Under the new system, the responsibilities of local matters was under the control of the campus officials while matters of general concern were dealt with by Central administration. The University Council thus maintained general responsibility for all common services, University programmes, and programmes in the non-campus countries, as well as, for senior administrative appointments. The Senate remained the main body responsible for academic matters and for the award of degrees, diplomas, and certificates. All other matters now became the responsibility of the local Campus officials. The Campus Council and the Campus Finance and General Purposes Committee were given control of the finances of the Campus. These bodies were responsible for, among other things, the appointment and promotion of faculty up to the level of senior lecturer. As mentioned previously, these changes were intended to strengthen significantly the ability of all the University and more precisely, the Campuses, to respond more effectively and efficiently to the challenges of development in both the Campus and non-campus countries. In many ways, however, the expanded bureaucracy of the UWI only served to compound the difficulties which existed prior to the restructuring, even though the campuses now had greater autonomy and power, while the control and influence of Central Administration was significantly weakened. The proliferation of new committees at the campus level significantly slowed down the speed in 25 The Marshall Report, p.4. 125 decision-making.26 The 1994 Report of the Chancellor’s Commission in commenting on the extent of increased bureaucratization and confusion created by the restructuring observed that: The constitutional changes implemented in 1984 gave much greater powers of internal management to the campuses but left much of the decision-making in the hands of a University committee structure. This committee structure is extraordinarily costly to maintain, very slow and cumbersome to manage, and tends to stifle initiative by imposing an artificial conformity on judgements about academic matters which does not correspond to the variety of needs within the region. One study has identified 161 different committees to govern the University Centre and a single campus. The result is a bureaucratic edifice which is highly academically conservative and which represents a severe restraint on the University’s development.27 In addition, the concept of the University as a regional institution was adversely affected, leading to the further marginalization and alienation of the non-campus countries. This was for example reflected in the dramatic decline in student enrollment from the non-campus countries. In 1960/61 students from campus countries composed 66.5% of the total University enrollment, students from the OECS countries 11.8% and those from other territories constituted 21.7 %. By 1988/89, however, students from the campus countries made up 93.5% of the total enrollment, while those from the OECS countries and the British Virgin Islands together only comprised 4% of the enrollment and those from Belize, Bahamas, Turks and Caicos and the Cayman Islands made up 1%.28 This significant shift in enrollment from the OECS and other non-campus countries, it was recognized, was not simply a matter of the prohibitive cost of on-campus study. Decentralization had the unintended effect of compounding the neglect of the non-campus-countries as the various campuses became more inward-looking and parochial in their outlook.29 Partly in an effort to counteract what they perceived to be neglect on the part of the UWI, but 26 Ibid, p.7. 27 Report of the Chancellor’s Commission, p.12. 28 Ibid, p.32. 29 Ibid. 126 also as a result their national development plans, non-campus countries including St. Lucia, Antigua, and Grenada began to develop or expand their own national tertiary institutions. They also became more receptive to the overtures of foreign universities from the United Kingdom and especially, the United States who were becoming increasingly interested in increasing the student enrollment from the Caribbean. In response to these various developments in the non-campus countries (in no small way a consequence of the cumbersome nature of UWI’s bureaucratic system), the University established the Office of University Services (OUS) to co-ordinate and manage its outreach programmes. The policy decision to create the OUS was based on the belief that this office could rationalize the delivery of the University’s services, including those performed by the various extra-mural centres which existed in all contributing countries. This rationalization was, however, never realized. Instead, the OUS and the extra-mural departments which were grouped under the School for Continuing studies (SCS), operated and developed separately as autonomous organizations with separate leadership. One consequence of this anomalous situation was that the expected benefits from the pooling of expertise and resources were not realized.30 In many ways then the realities of the UWI’s attempts to restructure, especially since 1984, clearly confirmed the view put forward by many theorists and analysts of organizations, that educational institutions which are usually very bureaucratic, often find it very difficult and slow to accept and implement change. An examination of the UWI’s relationship with the non-campus countries since its formation would show that bureaucratic form of management is incapable of effectively and efficiently meeting their needs and fulfilling their expectations. It would show that what may be required is a systems approach which would regard the students of the non-campus countries as an integral and interrelated part of the UWI system whose concerns and needs must be met effectively if the entire university system is to flourish. In the light of, among other things, pressures from the external environment, as well as within the UWI, and the problems created or exacerbated by the restructuring exercise of 1984, another 30 Ibid, p.23. 127 major effort was again launched in 1993/94 to reform the UWI. The primary mechanism for this latest reform was the Report of the Chancellor’s Commission on the Governance of the UWI (referred to earlier). The Commission had been requested to review the governance of the University in the light of its current and prospective developmental role in the region, and of relevant developments in University administration and practice elsewhere. It was asked to pay particular attention to the need to:31 • Achieve the greatest possible cost effectiveness in the operations of the University. • Speed-up the processes of decision making. • Assign well defined lines of responsibility to the principal officers and organs of the University. • Further clarify the relationship between the Centre and the campuses. • Achieve greater transparency in, and accountability for, the University’s operations, including specific identification of the financial implications of decisions made and projects being undertaken, as well as more adequate and timely financial reporting. • Improve communications between central administration and other parts of the University community. • Make provision for the increasing importance of outreach activities in the work of the institutions. • Provide for greater participation in the management of the University, and by outside persons. • Deal with any other major matters pertaining to governance. 31 The Report of the Chancellor’s Commission, p.3. 128 The identification of these areas for special consideration clearly suggests that the University officials had now come to realize that the UWI was not performing as efficiently and effectively as it could because of the dysfunctions of it bureaucratic structures and relations. This point was forcefully articulated by the Commission which noted:32 To the casual observer, UWI retains its image as a vibrant institution. In the judgement of the Chancellor’s Commission, however, based on the overwhelming weight of evidence presented to it, the health of the University of the West Indies is seriously endangered. In the absence of fundamental reforms within, and major attitudinal changes from without, UWI will not survive in recognizable form. The report further argued that the burden of structures borrowed from abroad, and processes imitative of other institutions, no longer served the peculiar needs of the UWI or responded positively to the introduction of modern techniques and technologies. It warned that unless the constitutional structure and other areas of the University were streamlined and simplified there was the danger of serious breakdowns and the strangling of the University.33 The Commission strongly urged that the following six principles of governance be implemented in order to achieve the necessary reform:34 • There must be a clear division of responsibilities between the centre and the campuses and the elimination of overlaps, redundancies, and confusion. This principle relates to clarity. • There must be an adequate assignment of authority, commensurate with the responsibilities to be discharged, to those responsible. This principle relates to competence. • The responsibilities so assumed, and the authority so assigned, must be transparent, as must the acts of all persons who are engaged in one or the other. 32 Ibid, p.8. 33 Ibid, p.12. 34 Ibid, p.11. 129 • The procedures employed for assignment, assumption, and discharge must provide for accountability to those University officers so delegated, and publicity to the several interested publics. • The composition of all governance structures must reflect with integrity the composition of the University community and not, as now, represent almost exclusively the academic staff and the senior administration alone. • Cost effectiveness must be introduced as a salient ingredient into the decision- making processes of all governance and management bodies. These principles have now become central to the University’s attempt to significantly reduce its bureaucracy, as reflected in the new governance arrangements depicted in and to create an institution more responsive to its various clients and stakeholders, and the overall achievement of its developmental role in the region. But what it may be asked, is the likelihood that this attempt at reforming the UWI will succeed? Although many factors will determine the success or failure of this ongoing and latest initiative, success is possible this time around because unlike the recommendations of 1984 which focussed on structural reform, those of the Chancellor’s Commission, recognized, in addition, that ‘human action and intention’ are as Greenfield and Ribbins, put it, ‘the stuff from which organizations are made’.35 It is this reality which has been the basis for a number of innovations which have been undertaken at the UWI, some of which utilize modern technologies to enhance management and governance to achieve greater flexibility, accountability and responsiveness. 4.6 ICR Enabling Innovations at the UWI Since the governance report in 1993 the UWI has committed itself, as other tertiary institutions in the region have been doing, to creating more student friendly and student centred environments. In the case of the UWI this meant improving the registration process; increasing contact hours between students and academic staff; enhancing academic counselling services; creating more classroom and study space; increasing student access to computers facilities; and facilitating 35 Thomas Greenfield and Peter Ribbins, Greenfield on Educational Administration: Towards a Humane Science, London and New York: Routledge, 1993, p.1. 130 student exchanges, as well as improved housing and recreational facilities.36 These many changes and improvements hold lessons for other tertiary institutions throughout the region which are thinking about or actually in the process of undertaking such reorganization in their management and governance structures and relations with the aid of innovative ideas, concepts and strategies. But institutions are also recognizing that implementation of these processes of change and innovations cannot simply be national or regional exercises but must necessarily interface with those changes and innovations taking place globally. Significant progress has already been made in achieving these goals but much more still needs to be done. From the perspective of administration, the UWI has long recognized that the new information and communication technologies can play a central role in improving governance and achieving administrative efficiencies. But there is also an acknowledgment that the issues surrounding the acquisition and use of the new technologies can be quite perplexing. The University Registrar of the UWI, Mrs Gloria Barrett-Sobers explains:37 For administrators, no less than faculty and students, issues related to technology are compelling. The cost and difficulty of keeping track of new information are major concerns but are not the only ones. The questions challenging administrators are relentless. How can the technology help us track our students? Is there a system that will effectively handle the variety of contract types and reflect the peculiar weightings of research and publications alongside teaching for our faculty? To what extent should the systems be integrated, and how is this best done? What computer platform is best? What database management system? Which software? Who needs what technology, and how do we decipher what is essential and what is superfluous? How will we identify and pay for the increasingly expensive and elusive information technology professionals, to design, implement and maintain the systems? Despite these challenges the various tertiary institutions across the region have adopted in varying degrees the challenge of using the new technologies to enhance the quality of communication and 36. UWI Strategic Plan 2002-2006, p.34. 37. Gloria Barrett-Sobers, “Management Information Systems in Universities: Is the University of the West Indies on Target?” in Glenford D Howe (ed). Higher Education in the Caribbean, Past, Present and Future Directions. Mona, Jamaica: UWI Press, 2000, p.343. 131 service with their multiple stakeholders, not least the students. To this end the UWI has now moved to implement a number of technology related improvements including the following:38 Χ A VSAT network that will link 23 non-campus locations around the Caribbean, thereby facilitating video transmissions from any of the three campuses to the regional site, as well as, provide for inter-campus video conferencing. Χ The computerization of two major administrative functions, namely, financial management and human resource management. Χ A CTC Banner Financial Management System has now been in use by the Bursaries for over five years, and is currently being extended to the faculties and other administrative departments. Χ A PeopleSoft a Human Resource Management System has also been implemented. Χ More recently the University acquired the Banner2000 Student System which will modernize the university’s student administration systems by permitting among other things, on-line applications, student recruitment, automated admissions letter generation, on-line course selection and registration, tuition and fee-assessment calculations, class scheduling and on-line application for transcripts Χ There is an ongoing initiative to implement a computerized maintenance management system (CMMS) software with assistance from the IADB. Χ The libraries of the different campuses are also in the process of being fully computerized to allow for, among other things, easier access to materials. • Each campus also possesses well-equipped computer laboratories that provide training in the science, application and development of computer hardware and software and provide access to computing capabilities needed for analysis in other disciplines. • There is in place on each campus a fibre-optic campus backbone and system interconnected local area networks (LANs) with scores of network access points to Internet Access, internal e-mail, file sharing, and shared access to application software and other departmental resources, and a wide area network (WAN) which will connect the campuses is now being tested. 38. UWI Strategic Plan, 2002-2006, pp.38-39 132 All these innovations which have been made possible by the information and communication revolution will no doubt significantly improve the management and governance of the UWI, and provide lessons of experience for other institutions in the region who desire to use the new technologies for these purposes. 4.7 Future Prospects and Threats to Governance Obviously, there are no definitive or final solutions to the problems of organization and governance, not least because of the nature of educational institutions and the fact that the environment in which they operate is becoming increasingly complex and subject to continual change. The frustrated attempts, as well as, the hard earned successes of reforming the UWI over the last decade have revealed much about the nature and dysfunctions of highly bureaucratic organizations such as educational institutions. More important, the developmental experiences of the UWI suggest very forcefully the need for the adoption of new techniques and strategies. However, it is critically important that the adoption or adaptation of new concepts and principles from alternative approaches to governance and management be done in a sensible, strategic, flexible and timely manner, taking into consideration the peculiarities of the Caribbean experience. This is why the current experiments with new innovations must be continually subject to scrutiny, analysis, and refinement so that each institution, system and nation may be in a better position to pin-point what best suits their particular needs. At the same time, the region must seek to exploit the opportunities and benefits which increased collaboration among institutions, locally, regionally, and internationally can bring to their educational institutions. The challenges faced, especially by developing countries, must out of necessity be seen as requiring a “shared responsibility” approach if maximum success is to be achieved in the quest for educational excellence. 4.8 Scourges of HIV/AIDS and Violence Notably, however, the new challenges which are now manifesting themselves within the tertiary education sector are potentially among the most devastating to a conducive teaching, learningand research environment in the Caribbean. HIV/AIDs, it is increasingly being acknowledged by 133 educational planners and officials in the region can have devastating impact on the region’s educational institutions both in terms of finance and human resources depletion, particularly since the region has the fastest growing rates of infection world wide. Approximately one half million Caribbean (broadly defined) citizens are infected, and HIV/AIDs is now the leading cause of death in the 15 to 44 year age group in the Caribbean. The UWI, CARICOM, and the various national governments have in response launched a number of multi-sectoral programmes and initiatives aimed at stemming the rising incidence of infections in the region. The impact of violence while being given fleeting acknowledgment seems to be generally ignored with stop -gap plasters being placed on sores of violence whenever isolated cases erupt. Violence, both in its physical and psychological forms, as phenomenon is not new to the educational setting in the region but as its incidence increases and/or character becomes more violent, the tertiary education sector is being threatened and affected as never before. Violence is being reflected in for example: • Suicides • Threats of violence and actual violence within and between the student and staff population, with spill over effects in the family setting of both groups • The destruction of the private belongings and research of other persons • Gang violence from surrounding communities being transferred onto the campus/institutional setting at, for example, student recreational activities such as fetes; and • Attacks, including rapes and robberies of students and staff by criminal elements. • Slander, and the deliberate spreading of malicious rumours In the context of the educational setting in small island states, the impact and implications of these forms of violence are amplified many times over, often with severe implications for the health and well-being of those being affected, and the image of the institution internally and externally. 134 Although the phenomenon of violence within the tertiary education sector in the region remains largely unrecognized and understudied, it may still be possible to speculate about some of its root causes which may include the following: • Deterioration in physical environments of some institutions • Changing student expectations and intolerance with poor service • Lack of modern and adequate emotional support services for both staff and students. • The prevalence of drugs on campus • Increased stress and mental illnesses associated with studying, and coping with the responsibilities of work, studying and family commitments, particularly with respect to the growing numbers of part-time or working students. • Personal conflicts between and among students and staff • Images of violence in educational settings elsewhere but particularly in the USA • Poor and deliberately divisive managerial styles of Supervisors, Heads of Departments, Deans, Principals, and other senior managers in the educational settings, as a strategy of inducing physical or mental illness, or causing embarrassment and distress to the person (s) being targeted for harassment, or to be discredited. These managerial styles severely undermine staff morale and collegiality within the educational environment. • Student and staff inability to cope with information overload characteristic of the learning societies emerging within the region. • Inadequate security in and surrounding educational institutions. • Inadequate legal sanctions for violations of confidential staff and student medical and other records, or the laxness in enforcing legal penalties even where they exist on paper. • A growing anti-intellectual atmosphere, and aversion to research and scholarship, and a preoccupation by some staff with being “managers”. 135 • Racism • Religious proselytization and intolerance within the educational setting • Ethnic animosities • Class conflict • Conflict between part-time and full-time staff • Inter-island and inter-generational conflicts If urgent collaborative measures are not adopted to curb and combat these and other emerging challenges to an environment conducive to teaching and learning, it is likely that their human and financial impacts will be nothing short of devastating. Only through the combined emphasis on more effective governance, innovations and cooperation can solutions be found to these new problems which compound and exacerbate traditional ones. 136 Section 3: Collaboration and International Collaboration As this 20th century ends we are witnessing processes of internationalization and globalization in all fields. Caught in the grip of the prevailing economic liberalism, markets are becoming global: many trade transactions take place without the goods being seen or touched by middlemen; capital is circulating more quickly than individuals; businesses relocate according to the ebb and flow of advantage; highly skilled human resources are becoming increasingly mobile; the competition to win contracts demands an ever-higher level of skill in lowering costs and improving quality. But this frenzied race to achieve an ever better and cheaper product reaching the greatest possible number of people relies on the dependence of economies on the applications of advanced knowledge, and research and thus on higher education. Society is becoming increasingly a knowledge society and therefore increasingly dependent on the quality of higher education and its openness to the outside world. As the 21st century approaches the challenges are many. Not only profound changes affecting all elements of society but inequalities of all kinds persist and may even increase without vigorous action: regions suffering from war, famine and malnutrition, an increasingly unequal distribution of resources among the regions of the world (whether financial, material, technological or educational resources). Without a reconsideration of co-operation policies, higher education will be unable to meet the challenges it faces. (UNESCO: World Conference on Higher Education)39 Implicit in the processes of globalization and the inevitable impetus towards the internationalization of higher education is the compelling imperative for universities and other institutions of higher learning to engage in mutually beneficial dialogue and practical cooperation. Increasingly, it is being realized that inter-college/university collaboration as expressed in staff and student exchanges and joint research projects, in distance and continuing education, among other areas, can provide a unique and lasting way of fostering international cultural understanding and appreciation, and building civil society. This section explores some, by no means all, of the collaborative initiatives the UWI has been involved over the past decade or two, and serves as a way of providing a sampling of the types of collaborative initiatives which might, or are already 39. UNESCO. World conference on Higher Education: Higher Education in the Twenty-First Century, Vision and Action, Vol. 3- Commissions (Part 1. Working and Background documents) Paris: UNESCO, 5-9 October 1998, p. 50. 137 being undertaken by other tertiary institutions in the region. 4.9 Case Study of UWI Collaborative Initiatives It was against the background of the importance of internationalization that on 5 November 1991 the Planning and Estimates Committee (UPEC) of the University of the West Indies (UWI) adopted a policy statement on the university’s co-operative programmes with regional and international universities. On 31 October 1994 a revised version of this statement was endorsed by the University Academic Committee (UAC). The development of a policy statement reflected the significant benefits the UWI had derived from co-operative programmes with various other tertiary and university-level institutions, the proliferation of requests for co-operative relationships, the several still-born projects conceived in memoranda of understanding, the uncoordinated approach to the development and implementation of programmes, and the rapid expansion over the years of staff, student, and technological exchanges among tertiary institutions worldwide. The statement was also reflective of the UWI’s mission to increase knowledge, foster intellectual stimulation, promote regional and international educational and cultural understanding, and to advance the priority programmes as described in its strategic plans, and to fulfill its commitment to developing relationships with similar institutions which conduce to those ends, including those which facilitate interchange in the area of foreign languages, To this end the UWI has sought to enter into co-operative and collaborative relationships with: • regional and international higher education institutions of high quality which possess resources to facilitate collaboration. • research centres, governmental and non-governmental, regional and international, which pursue programmes of research and other intellectual activity which harmonize with the interests of the UWI; and • such other universities, colleges and research centres which facilitate cultural ties or enable UWI to meet specific international obligations. Among the objectives of these co-operative programmes are, the improvement of undergraduate and postgraduate programme delivery; enhancement of staff development opportunities; sharing 138 of knowledge and skills in areas of competence; promotion of research; advancement of knowledge and skills in the area of management of institutions of higher education and, the promotion of cultural and educational ties between Caribbean students everywhere. The strategies for achieving these objectives may include, among other things, staff exchanges and joint appointments, consultancies, research collaboration, joint publishing, programme development, and the specific focus of this section, namely Student Exchanges and Study Abroad schemes. 4.10 Scope of UWI Collaborative Relationships 4.10.1 International Links To date the UWI has developed, both at the formal and informal levels, an extensive network of collaborative programmes with various colleges and universities throughout the Caribbean and Latin America, as well as internationally, including Aoyama Gakuin University in Japan, Aalborg University in Denmark, the University of Aix-Marseille in France, and the University of Turku in Finland, but especially with institutions in the United States, Britain, Canada and various Commonwealth countries. The UWI has active links with such American colleges and universities as Brown University, Bucknell University, City University of New York (Medgar Evers College), Florida International University, Florida State University, Louisiana State University, Colgate University, Meredith College, Morehouse School of Medicine, New York University, Spelman College, St. John’s University, Tulane University, University of California, University of Florida, University of Georgia, University of Wisconsin-Madison, etc. Its United Kingdom link partners include the University of North London, University of Sheffield, University of Surrey, University of Sussex, University of Warwick, and the United Medical and dental Schools (University of London), while on the Canadian side there are links with York University, Concordia University, and the University of Toronto. Co-operation with over thirty other universities in the United Kingdom, Canada and other areas of the Commonwealth are also being facilitated through the Commonwealth Universities Study Abroad Consortium (CUSAC), of which the UWI is a founding member and active participant. 139 CUSAC developed out of a need to diversify and increase student mobility from industrialized to developing countries and among developing countries. Even though the CUSAC arrangement does not involve the direct provision of funding for collaboration among its members the member universities have agreed to provide appropriate opportunities for their students to study in other member universities as a part of their course, and to initiate joint programmes for this purpose. Sometimes co-operative programmes may be initiated by an external institution and/or promoted by an external agency. Over the years the UWI has benefitted significantly from its participation in one such scheme initiated by the Committee for International Cooperation in Higher Education (CICHE) on which the Overseas Development Administration, the British Council and British universities were represented. The Committees general objective was to help higher education institutions in the Third World contribute to national and regional development through cooperation with British institutions. In terms of the UWI, the specific aim of the CICHE initiative was to support the university in its role as a major resource for economic, social and cultural development in the Caribbean region. As such, the emphasis has been on helping the UWI implement programmes with a direct impact on development related to the wider community or to increase its capability to undertake such programmes. The CICHE programme has benefitted the UWI in areas such as planning and development, heritage studies, educational planning and research, waste chemistry, industrial mineralogy, environmental chemistry, agroforestry, construction management, public sector management, academic control and community health. 4.10.2 Regional Links The UWI has developed a number of cooperative programmes with various tertiary institutions within the Caribbean and Latin America. The basis has, for example, been laid for collaboration between the UWI and Antom De Kom University in Suriname in such areas as teaching or supervision of undergraduates and graduate students or staff, joint research activities, and collaboration in Distance Education, among other things. Significantly, the UWI’s collaborative programmes with universities in the hemisphere has had as a main component the development and strengthening of the foreign language programmes of the cooperating institutions. Currently, 140 the UWI’s foreign language students have benefitted from links with such institutions as the Universidad Nacional De Colombia, University of Brasilia (Brazil), Universite des Antilles et de la Guyane (Martinique), Universite de Merida (Mexico), Universidad Simon Bolivar (Venezuela), Universidad de Quintana Roo (Mexico), and the Universidad de Concepcion (Chile). Foreign language students also stand to benefit from the UWI’s signing of a “Protocol of Intent of International University Cooperation” with the Universite de Caen in France. As with CUSAC, but in an even more immediate way, the Association of Caribbean Universities and Research Institutes (UNICA), has been a key mechanism for fostering inter-regional university cooperation. UNICA was founded in 1968 by a Conference of Caribbean University Heads and represents the vision and initiative of Sir Philip Sherlock, the first Vice-Chancellor of the UWI. The organization was conceived and continues to function as a voluntary pan-Caribbean association dedicated to positive, directed efforts for Caribbean development, by fostering cooperation among institutions of higher learning in the wider Caribbean area. UNICA is composed of institutional members which are universities or research institutes located in the Caribbean, broadly defined. These institutional members are represented at UNICA’s annual meeting by university presidents, chancellors or vice-chancellors, rectors and directors of the research institutes. UNICA’s membership presently includes the following institutions: Universidad De Puerto Rico, University of the Virgin Islands, Universite Quisqueya, Instituto Colombiano De Administracion, Universidad Tecnologica Del Cibao, Universite D’Etat D’Haiti, University of the West Indies, Universidad Del Sagrado Corazon De Puerto Rico, Universidad Nacional Pedro Henriquez Urena, Universidad Simon Bolivar, Universite Des Antilles Et De La Guyane, Instituto Tecnologico De Santo Domingo, Universidad Interamericana De Puerto Rico, University of the Netherlands Antilles, Universidad Iberoamericana, Pontificia Universidad Catolica Madre Y Maestra, Fundacion Servicio Para El Agricultor, Universidad Technologica De Santiago, University of Technology, Instituto De Estudios Del Caribe, Institute of International Relations, Institute of Social and Economic Research and, Small Business Development Center Network. 141 The goals and objectives of UNICA are: • To encourage multilingualism among members of the universities of the region. • To promote collaboration among member institutions in the form of student and staff exchanges, (including administrators) and joint research programmes. • To initiate and/or collaborate in curriculum development and in the design of joint degree programmes in selected fields. • To establish a comprehensive data bank within the broader framework of a Caribbean network. • To develop collaborative projects in the areas of information technology and distance education. • To promote Summer Institutes, Workshops or Seminars on subjects of significant importance to the Caribbean region. • Since its establishment UNICA has facilitated collaboration among its member institutions in such areas as culture, agriculture, science, education, and administration, and has facilitated a highly successful project in natural resource management (the Consortium of Caribbean Universities for Natural Resource Management). UNICA’s multilingualism programme which is being spearheaded by the University Simon Bolivar in Venezuela and Universite Antilles-Guyane in Martinique, as well as its efforts to encourage the exchangeof students, faculty and administrators, will no doubt significantly enhance the process of inter-university cooperation over the next decade. The LOME IV funded Cariforum University Level Programme which was recently implemented has also served as another vital mechanism for regional inter-university cooperation and cultural collaboration. Six regional institutions participated in the programme which was aimed at developing a critical mass of trained professionals who are expected to have a major influence on the economic, business and political relationships among the Caribbean countries, and on the relationship between the Caribbean and the rest of the global economy. The programme involved Master’s degrees in economic development and reform, public sector management, international business, agricultural diversification, natural resource management, and architecture. The degree programmes were also provided with some types of infrastructural support, specifically in 142 distance education, information technology and language training. The partner institutions involved in the scheme included Pontifica Universidad Catolica Madre y Maestra (PUCMM), Universidad Nacional Pedro Henriquez Urena (UNPHU), Catholic University of Dominican Republic, Quesqueya University of Haiti, and UWI and CAST/UTECH. 4.10.3 UWI Student Exchanges Recently, the UWI has been signing a number of agreements with various international and regional institutions which facilitate students exchanges. However, even though the programme is only now gaining momentum it is already evident that the movement of students has been mainly into the UWI, with few UWI students being able to go to the collaborating institutions. The lack of participation by UWI students in these student exchange schemes has not been due to ignorance or lack of enthusiasm on their part, but rather the consequence of inadequate institutional and financial support on the part of the UWI. This is not to claim that there is an absence of the necessary policy measures and financial support schemes, which would enable UWI students to participate in the scheme. As indicated before a policy statement is in existence, and there is a UWI Study Abroad Fellowship Scheme which is intended to promote student mobility among the UWI campuses; between UWI and selected Caribbean and Latin American universities; and between UWI and those American and Commonwealth universities with which UWI has entered cooperative agreements. 4.10.4 Future Challenges and Possibilities for International Collaboration Inter-university cooperation, student exchanges, and cultural collaboration both at the regional and international levels, as facilitated by the UWI and other institutions and organizations including Rotary International, offer many significant possibilities for the fostering of the social, cultural, economic and intellectual development of Caribbean people. More specifically, these forms of cooperation can help the people of the region to fulfill what Dr. Orville Kean, former President of UNICA and President of the University of the Virgin Islands, has identified as fundamental imperatives of higher education programmes and institutions in the Caribbean today. Dr. Kean, at the September 1996 annual meeting of UNICA posited that there was need to: 143 • Embrace Caribbean ways and traditions in the methodology we use to convey concepts. • Recognize that our assumptions are not serving the student bodies of the Caribbean and therefore regional educators should endeavor to build curriculums from the inside out. Discontinue the copycat syndrome, rely more on all the knowledge that shapes our lives, and become skilled in using knowledge of the outside world about our selves. • Consider what we teach our students and recognize the need to have a grounding experience for the students and the faculty that is based on, and builds upon creative energies. Consider how we determine what is knowledge, and also consider what students expect from higher education. • Recognize our strengths and our own creativity and seize opportunities to create. Enter into discourse about how to help the region to think critically on its own behalf, and become more opportunistic when it serves our needs. Help our students to be able to make the connections to the big world picture. Focussing on these key issues identified by Dr. Kean, and also acknowledged by the region’s brightest and most prolific scholars including Vice Chancellor of the UWI, Professor Rex Nettleford, as being of utmost importance, can help the institutions of the region to respond more effectively and innovatively to “The Winds of Change” which former UWI Vice Chancellor, Sir Alister McIntyre has felt “Blowing Through the Caribbean”. The challenges faced by education systems, institutions, philosophies, strategies and curricula of responding to local and global pressures and imperatives, and of meeting the challenges of access, quality, governance, and financing of higher education and training will no doubt intensify in coming years, and provide further stimulus for institutions to engage in mutually beneficial dialogue. There is also no doubt that the imperatives of globalization, the rise of knowledge based economies and societies and the scourge of HIV/AIDS, among other things, will provide additional reasons for collaboration. But there are a number of major challenges which need to be addressed if the benefits of international cooperation are to be realized. Dumitru Chitoran, the Special Advisor of the Director-General of UNESCO at the World Conference on Higher Education, has thus outlined the following four issues: 144 • There is a worsening uneven distribution of the benefits of internationalization among higher education institutions in various parts of the world, particularly in the developing world, since at present, net working and other linking arrangements are used primarily by the wealthiest countries, with enormous scientific and cultural benefits for themselves, while those left out of these arrangements feel increasingly marginalized and disadvantaged. • International cooperation is becoming increasingly complex; size, complexity and rising costs have brought about the need to undertake more systematic research on international cooperation, and on its basis, to ensure that it has better planning, management, efficiency and cost effectiveness. • There is also the problem with the Brain Drain phenomenon which continues to be a major dilemma for international cooperation, through its negative effects, particularly on those developing countries which lack the critical mass of highly skilled experts capable of putting an end to their perpetual dependence on foreign expertise and securing their self-sustainable development; the phenomenon needs to be addressed in a new, imaginative way since, in the increasingly globalized economy of today, it can no longer be looked at in the old, rather simplified terms. • Finally, despite the overall increase in the number of foreign students, when compared to the absolute growth in student enrollment worldwide, higher education tends to become, at least percentage-wise, less international in character. This is in part a reflection of the capacity of developing countries to train their own students at home. However, while student mobility in the developed countries is growing at a steady pace, it is increasingly limited to exchanges among themselves, or with the countries which have had a steady economic growth during the last few decades. As a result student mobility is becoming more North-North and less South-North, or South-South so that while the benefits of study abroad are increasingly recognized, because of the costs involved, it is increasingly becoming a privilege for those who can afford it. If these challenges are not resolved it is clear that the global system of tertiary education will rapidly accelerate towards severe imbalances and the potential benefits of international cooperation will be squandered. A triumphant response to these challenges requires nothing short of the fullest possible collaborative efforts of the international community, both rich and poor nations, but especially the former. 145 Chapter 5 The Challenges of Relevance, Quality and Sustainable Financing The challenge facing the University is necessarily a formidable one. Simply put, given the urgency attaching to the region’s need to remain competitive in a world of increasing liberalization and globalization, the UWI is already finding itself being called upon by the governments and peoples of the region to deliver quality education to progressively larger enrolments, and to do so in the context of tight budgetary constraints and often in deteriorating financial situations.(UWI, Chancellor’s Commission)01 The economic crisis of the 1980s may have exposed the vulnerabilities of the education sector in the region but it also reinforced the fact that if the region wants to remain competitive it must continue irrespective of the financial situation to invest in the development of its human resources. But to inspire continued public and private sector investment educational institutions, particularly those at the tertiary level must demonstrate a capacity to deliver relevant and high quality education and training to meet the developmental needs of the region. Re-occurring financial constraints will perhaps always be features of Caribbean economies given the nature of their integration in the global economy, but the will and capacity of regional tertiary institutions to utilize local skills and talents to generate endogenous solutions to the developmental challenges of the region, or harness and reconfigure internationally generated knowledge must likewise be permanent characteristics of their existence and mandate. Consequently, the quest for relevance, quality and sustainable financing must of necessity be unrelenting priorities and imperatives of the tertiary education sector in the region. 0 1. UWI. Chancellor’s Commission on the Governance of UWI. A New Structure: The Regional University in the 1990s and Beyond. Mona, Jamaica: University of the West Indies, 1994, p.50. 146 Section 1: Relevance and Caribbean Developmental Challenges The relevance of higher education is considered primarily in terms of its role and place in society, its functions with regard to teaching, research and the resulting services, as well as in terms of its links with the world of work in a broad sense, relations with the state and public funding and interactions with other levels and forms of education.... The question of relevance arises even more strongly during periods of change when paradoxical situations abound and when the forces in society pull different ways. At such times, higher education must more than ever play a fundamental role by placing all its resources and its spirit of independence in the service of what is relevant to humanity and society in general (UNESCO)2 As we have seen, societies and economies in the Caribbean, as elsewhere, are being rapidly transformed as a result of globalization, the information and communication revolution, and the growing importance of knowledge production, reconfiguration and utilization as the central ingredients enabling national development and competitiveness. These forces have begun to redefine the role of tertiary education and its relationship with other levels of education, the state, industry, as well as with its many other stakeholders including students and staff. As such, there is an ongoing rethinking of all dimensions of the teaching and learning process to enable tertiary institutions to meet the expectations and demands of their clients, both in the short and long terms. This of course means that different types, including private, public and other hybrid institutions are being challenged to respond to the specificities, particularities, and exigencies of their own local and regional environments but in the broader context of global changes and trends impacting on them and their immediate socio-economic surroundings. In the context of the Caribbean this means that a range of tertiary institutions, both old and new, large and small, private and public, must seek to transform their curricula, programmes, teaching and learning environments, research, structures and relations of governance and management, quality, efficiency, and international relations. They are now, more than ever before required to meet the demands and needs of modern-day Caribbean societies and their most critical 2. UNESCO. World Conference on Higher Education: Higher Education in the Twenty-first century. Vision and Action, Volume 3, (Working and Background Documents, Chapter 2), Paris: UNESCO, 5-9 October 1998, p. 25 147 developmental challenges including those pertaining to the environment, tourism, culture, agriculture, health, economic and fiscal challenges, as well as crime and violence, among other areas. The effects and impacts of these challenges are often exacerbated given the small size and vulnerabilities of Caribbean states. In essence then, effective responses to the challenges and requirements on the part of tertiary education institutions in the region constitute and reflect what it means to be relevant. Caribbean tertiary institutions must be the catalysts for, and producers of, the type of citizens who can effectively cope with change, devise innovative responses, harness and reconfigure the vast knowledge being generated locally and internationally to identify and solve the most pressing developmental problems facing the region. Relevance, or pertinence as it is sometimes called, must as the1998 World Conference on Higher Education suggested, be considered in terms of the fit or match between what higher education institutions do and what society expects of them. Hebe Vessuri of the Venezuelan Institute of Scientific Research explains further:3 It [relevance/pertinence] is particularly about the role and place of higher education in society, but it also covers access and participation, teaching and learning, the research function of the universities, the responsibility of higher education to other sectors of society, the world of work and the community service function of higher education. No less important is the participation of higher education in the search of solutions to the pressing human problems, such as population, environment, peace and international understanding, democracy and human rights. Another way to consider relevance is to focus on the particular services that higher education delivers and to evaluate the type and extent of this service, how it is delivered and how it is valued by ‘clients’. In the competitive contexts of a world increasingly oriented towards the market, actors with differing interests join the game, and thus the dimension of pertinence becomes a field of forces with conflicting values, philosophies and instrumental interests pressing in different directions, some of them quite arbitrary. In the context of developing countries with their scarce financial resources and underdeveloped or underutilized human talents, the challenge of relevance is however formidable for as the World 3. Hebe Vessuri. “Pertinence”, paper prepared by Hebe Vessuri, Department of Science Studies, Venezuelan Institute of Scientific Research (December 1997), for World Conference on Higher Education. Higher Education in the Twenty-first Century (Vision and Action), Paris: UNESCO, 5-9 October 1998, pp.75-98. 148 Bank observed:4 Although there are exceptions, the quality and relevance of research, teaching, and learning have tended to decline in public tertiary educational institutions in developing countries. Many universities operate with overcrowded and deteriorating physical facilities, limited and obsolete library resources, insufficient equipment and instructional materials, outdated curricula, unqualified teaching staff, poorly prepared secondary students, and an absence of academic rigour and systematic evaluation of performance. Similar conditions can be found in many of the new private universities and other tertiary institutions that have emerged in many countries, especially those that lack a formal system for licensing or accrediting new institutions. However, while it is certainly true that the UWI as the region’s premier and largest institution has faced and continue to encounter some of the difficulties and challenges outlined by the World Bank it would be equally true to say that the UWI, and indeed the Caribbean tertiary institutions as a whole, have a long and distinguished history of contributing in invaluable ways to the development process in the region. Prof Kenneth Hall, Principal of the Mona campus explains this, as well as how the information communication revolution has added impetus to the region’s and the university’s quest for continued excellence:5 While the emerging literature on higher education is now stressing the importance of relevance as one of the enduring contributions of universities, the relevance issue has always assumed centre stage for the Caribbean. Here, the development needs of our fragile economies have dictated the geo-political, socio-economic research and development agenda- a pivotal part of the scholarship for which the University of the West Indies has won international acclaim. What has brought about the recent transformation within the UWI, Mona, is the information technology explosion which has opened up myriad possibilities for applying relevant research data into relevant economic development. It is a welcome outcome of the new paradigm that an enhanced relationship between the output of universities and the successful participation of countries in the globalized information/knowledge economy is demanded. In this connection, the use of information and communication technology, innovation in governance, the building of an academic community, the relationship between universities and significant stakeholders such as the private sector and the public sector, and the 4. World Bank. Constructing Knowledge Societies, p.58. 5. UWI. Mona: Principal’s Report 2001, Mona, Jamaica: UWI, 2001, p.3. 149 commercialization of research results are now accepted as normal parts of a university committed to innovativeness, competitiveness and excellence in scholarship. With these heightened expectations, come the associated calls for improved programme quality and better preparedness for the workforce. Graduates are now expected not only to have knowledge of their disciplines but also to emerge from the institutions equipped with competencies that include leadership, communication, computer literacy, quantitative skills, and commitment to service. In the competitive environment of the 21st century, excellence is demanded by the stakeholders in the region to be the standard mark of the University of the West Indies, a distinction by which it can be recognized anywhere in the world. 5.1 Research & Development: Examples of Relevance in Action The previous sections of this report have already provided some details of how regional tertiary educational institutions have been attempting through, for example, reforms and rationalization, broadening of access, the use of new technologies including distance education modalities, curricula modifications, among other things, to respond to the multiple challenges and needs of the emerging knowledge-based economies of the Caribbean. Very little has been mentioned however about the ways in which through research innovations, whether endogenous, or obtained and reconfigured from other institutions internationally, tertiary education institutions have been attempting to make decisive progress with respect to the many developmental issues and challenges facing the region. In other words, how through research they have been confirming their value and relevance in the twenty-first century. As the World Bank has observed, the research work of higher education institutions provide one of the most compelling reasons and justifications for public support of higher education. According to the Bank:6 One of the most powerful arguments for a public interest in higher education is the value to a country of a well-developed system for research and generation of knowledge. This is of increasing importance within the emerging knowledge economy, allowing a country not only to generate new knowledge, but also to engage in scholarly and scientific commerce with other nations. While the various faculties of the University of the West Indies have long been engaged in 6.World Bank: Higher Education in Developing Countries, p.42. 150 outstanding research initiatives, over the past several decades the University has systematically established specialized research institutes and centres to address specific regional issues and developmental challenges, often with the direct support and continuing collaboration of governments, the private sector, with regional institutions such as the Central Banks, the Caribbean Development Bank and CARICOM, as well as with international bodies such as UNESCO, the World Bank, The Welcome Trust, USAID, and the Rockefeller Foundation, among others. These specialized institutes and centres include the: Sir Arthur Lewis Institute of Social and Economic Studies Centre for Gender and Development Studies Centre for Environment and Development Centre for Nuclear Sciences Centre for Marine Sciences Earthquake Unit Education Research Centre School of Continuing Studies Unit for Disaster Studies ANSA Mc Al Psychological Research Centre Caribbean Centre for Monetary Studies The Centre for Caribbean Land & Environmental Appraisal Research Centre for Language Learning Institute of International relations Seismic Research Unit The following examples, focusing on the responses of Caribbean higher education and research institutions to selected development challenges of the region, will serve to illustrate how through local innovation and international collaboration these institutions have been demonstrating their relevance and importance to the developmental needs of the region. 151 5.1.1 Example 1: The Challenge of Agricultural Development: CARDI & MPRG A: CARDI In 1974 the CARICOM Heads of Government decided to create the Caribbean Agricultural Research and Development Institute (CARDI) to replace existing agricultural research units and to provide for the research and development needs of its member states, and integrate the agricultural research and development efforts of the various institutions and agencies within CARICOM. Since then CARDI, which has officers stationed throughout the region, but is headquartered at the St Augustine campus of the UWI in Trinidad, has been playing a leading role in improving agricultural productivity throughout the region thereby reducing the region’s dependence on foreign food imports. Much of CARDI efforts have been supported by such agencies as the CDB, USAID and UNDP which have facilitated both institutional development and the transfer of developed world technologies to the Caribbean, while encouraging the development of endogenous solutions, in respect of such areas as farming systems, livestock production, post-harvest technology, crop germplasm improvement, feeding systems, soil and water management and Conservation, integrated Pest management, and information and communications, among other areas. B: The Microbial Pathogenicity Research Group (MPRG) The Microbial Pathogenicity Research Group located in the Department of Biological and Chemical Sciences at the Cave Hill Campus of the UWI, headed by Professor Leonard O’Garro has been involved in very active and fruitful research programmes focusing on yams, peppers, tomatoes, onions, papayas and anthuriums, with substantial financial support from UNESCO. The yam programme which was responsible for the rebirth of the yam industry in Barbados after it was decimated by disease focuses on the control of the anthracnose disease caused by Colletotrichum gloeosporoides. Commercial production of the White Lisbon yam variety in Barbados now continues to be dependent and driven by MPRG’s research, and Grenada has also embarked on a programme to expand yam cultivation utilizing anthracnose control methods made available by the MPRG. A related programme is likewise being implemented in Dominica where a 152 UWI Ph.D. student is helping to map the genetic characterization of a large collection of the yam anthracnose pathogen, and develop a strategy for anthracnose control in Dominica based on selective deployment of yam genotypes. The research focus on pepper and tomato is the control of the bacterial spot disease caused by Xanthomonas axonopodis pv. vesicatoria. During the 2000 academic year, the unit was involved in extensive research aimed at determining the genetic basis for the emergence of new damaging and copper-resistant strains of the bacterial spot pathogen and this research is being used to extend the durability of genes previously deployed for bacterial spot control in Barbados and St. Lucia. The unit’s onion research has been confined to efforts to control the onion blast disease in Barbados and efforts are being made to identify weed species which harbour the onion blast pathogen. Information on an extensive range of alternative host of the pathogen has now been made available to the local farming community. A papaya research programme which had been implemented in St. Lucia and Grenada has also been expanded to include St. Vincent and the Grenadines and is aimed at controlling papaya diseases. The unit also has an anthurium research programme in St. Lucia where in the academic year 2000 over 10,000 specially prepared disease-free anthurium plantlets were made available by the unit’s research programme for the purpose of expanding anthurium cultivation under forest conditions in St. Lucia. The unit’s other research programme which is being conducted as a collaborative effort between Winthrop-University Hospital in New York and the University of the West Indies is also aimed at introducing new effective chemical agents for control of bacterial diseases in anthurium and other ornamental plants. This initiative represents one of the many ways in which technology from developed countries is being transferred to developing countries to tackle their developmental problems. In this case, modified technology from Winthrop University Hospital is being utilized to bring about the desired effect with respect to the control of bacterial diseases in anthuriums. 153 5.1.2 Example 2: Meeting the Challenge of Chronic and Epidemic Diseases: The CDRC With the financial and manpower assistance of a number of international research institutions including the Wellcome Trust, the University has been making a decisive effort to find solutions to the problems of epidemic diseases like HIV/AIDs, and the rapidly emerging crisis of chronic diseases including hypertension, heart disease and diabetes, as well as other health concerns such as the state of the elderly in many countries. The Chronic Disease Research Centre (CDRC) located in the UWI’s School of Clinical Medicine and Research in the Queen Elizabeth Hospital in Barbados have for example been involved in a number of joint projects with international health institutions to examine a number of health problems affecting the region. One such initiative was a Wellcome Trust funded research project on amputations due to diabetes in Barbados, involving staff from the CDRC and colleges of the University of London. The study originated because of the very high amputation rate in Barbados with diabetic foot problems accounting for 80 per cent or more of female and 50 per cent or more of male general surgical ward admissions. The aims of this particular study were: • To determine incidence rates for lower extremity amputations in Barbados in people with and without diabetes. • To examine risk factors for amputations in persons with diabetes compared to a sample of population based controls who have not had an amputation; and • To determine the relative difference in risk of amputation in type 2 diabetes in Barbadians compared to British based Afro-Caribbeans and Europeans currently studied in the United Kingdom. Through these collaborative initiatives the UWI has been able to provide sound guidance to the region’s governments on the several health challenges which threaten to undermine the significant accomplishments, such as improvements in diet and life expectancy, which the region has made over the past several decades. 5.1.3 Example 3: The Natural Disasters Threat: Role of the Seismic Research Unit The Caribbean region is vulnerable to at least five natural hazards, namely hurricanes, floods (and associated hazards such as landslides), volcanic eruptions, earthquakes and tsunamis, which cause 154 millions of dollars of damage each year. Hurricanes and volcanic eruptions have however caused the most damage, with the former causing severe and region wide devastation each year and the latter being a permanent threat to most states and having totally destroyed two capitals in recent history, namely St. Pierre in Martinique in 1902 and Plymouth in Montserrat in 1997. The Seismic Research Unit based on the St Augustine campus in Trinidad has over the years been the main source information and guidance to regional governments with respect to preparedness, and the ongoing monitoring of the various volcanoes in the region, and along with the British established Montserrat Volcano Observatory, is giving advice on the ongoing volcanic crisis in Montserrat. 5.1.4 Example 4: Barbados’s Edutech 2000 Initiative & The UWI’s Education Evaluation Centre The point has already been made (see chapter 2.6) that tertiary education also has a critical role to play in strengthening the primary and secondary levels of the education sector. The relationship between the Education Evaluation Centre based at the Cave Hill Campus of the UWI and Barbados’s Education Sector Enhancement Programme (called the Edutech 2000 initiative) provides one clear illustration of how the tertiary sector can be used to assist in the reform processes which may be taking place at the lower levels. Edutech 2000, a technology intensive initiative, evolved out of the government’s White paper on Education (1997) which advocated a fundamental rethinking and new approach to education in Barbados, particularly with respect to such issues as the curriculum, teaching and learning methods, assessment, equity of access with respect to those with disabilities, and improving performances in maths and english at the primary and secondary levels. The Edutech 2000 initiative represents a comprehensive attempt to utilize information technology in the primary and secondary schools (and the wider community) to facilitate a paradigm shift to a constructivist notion of learning, enable the educational system to respond to the challenges of the global environment and move from the current emphasis on “chalk and talk” to a more interactive, student-centred and process-oriented model of teaching, learning and assessment. Given the enormous scope of this undertaking and the tremendous 155 investment involved the Government simultaneously established the Education Evaluation Centre at the UWI in an effort to utilize the skills and experience of highly trained staff to provide careful monitoring of the Edutech programme to ensure that it achieve its desired objectives. Among the specific objectives of the Centre’s evaluation and research programmes are to:7 1. Firstly, to monitor and evaluate: • the present of the relevant technology and the use of information technology in schools for teaching/ learning, communication and management • the impact of information technology on the teaching/learning process • the progress, process and quality of curriculum reform • the training and retraining of teachers to use information technology appropriately and creatively, and to understand and use competently, methods and approaches consonant with the new paradigm • the training and retraining of Ministry of Education personnel and School information technology Leadership Personnel to manage, supervise and sustain the reform programme • the pedagogical and technological support provided for teachers • attitudes and behaviours of administrators, and other leaders, school and systems wide with respect to the change process inherent in the reform programme • the development and relevance of approaches to and systems of, assessment congruent with the new technologies, paradigms and methodologies • the extent to which schools communicate with, seek to educate and to involve parents in the education of their children especially with respect to the reform programme 7. UWI. Barbados: Education Sector Enhancement Programme (Evaluation Proposal), 1999/2000. 156 2. Secondly, to evaluate and ascertain the extent to which the programme has: • enhanced pupil achievement in Language Arts, Mathematics, Social Studies, Sciences and other subject areas in relation to particular curriculum targets • enhanced pupils’ attitudes to. and interest in, learning, schooling, and specific curriculum areas, with particular focus on Language Arts and Mathematics • promoted cooperative learning skills, thinking skills and creativity • promoted a greater incidence of student-centred methodologies in classrooms and schools • promoted a wider repertoire of pupil assessment techniques, including the use of authentic assessment, for example portfolios and profiling • promoted willingness on the part of teachers and administrators to become more familiar with the use of Information Technologies as a tool for teaching and learning • promoted more effective management of classrooms and the administration of schools in general, and the use of Information Technology as a management tool • promoted greater understanding on the part of parents as to the objectives of the Programme. In fulfilling these research and evaluative objectives the Education Evaluation Centre, like the various teacher education colleges around the region, is making a vital contribution to the overall education system. These evaluative and teacher training institutions make a significant contribution to policy formulation and implementation as well as teacher preparation to meet the challenges of the new millennium. Their activities constitute major developmental functions and more directly, help to ensure a better quality student coming out from the primary and secondary levels, thereby ensuring the quality of the overall pool of citizens available to undertake tertiary education. One of their most pertinent challenges, as for the tertiary education sector as a whole, will therefore be how to enhance their relevance through sustained improvement in the quality of the services they provide. 157 5.2 Quality as Relevance The degree to which an institution successfully meets its stakeholders’ expectations will determine the degree to which it will be considered a quality institution. (Jonathan D. Fife)8 Since the 1980s the manifold changes occurring with respect to knowledge, technology, and globalization in general, have spawned an aggressive debate surrounding the issue of quality and its link to relevance in the context of tertiary education. The debates surrounding the quality issue are particularly complex. The word quality is often difficult to apply in practice because it is still ill-defined, meaning different things to different persons. Johnathan Fife explains:9 What is meant by the word quality? Most people think they know what quality is when they see it but few know how to define it. The simplest and most often used definition of quality is that it is a perception of the degree that an item, service or organization is able to meet or exceed the expectations of another person. For higher education, the simplicity of this definition raises several very complex questions: Who are the people that a higher education institution needs to be concerned about when assessing quality? How, and in what ways, have their expectations for higher education changed? What must an organization, as complex as a higher education institution, do to ensure that it will meet the expectations of these people? What type of an organizational framework would promote a quality culture? And finally, what processes currently exist that can be used to help an institution monitor and improve efforts to produce consistent quality results..... The first step to understanding how to define and improve the quality of an institution is to understand who has the greatest influence on making the collective decision that “This is a quality institution!”.....To understand who the stakeholders of a higher education institution are, it is necessary to understand who gave permission for an institution to exist, who financially supports the institution, who are primarily responsible for the outcomes of the institution, and who receive and benefit from these outcomes. In the context of the Caribbean these stakeholders include staff, students, parents, trade unions, 8. Johnathan D. Fife. “>From Quality Promised to Quality Certain: Creating systematic Approach to Mission Fulfillment”, in Steven M. Janosik, Don G. Creamer and M. David Alexander (eds.) International Perspectives on Quality in Higher Education. Virginia: Educational Policy Institute of Virginia Tech, Department of Educational Leadership and Policy Studies, College of Human Resources and Education, 2000, p.27. 9. Fife. From Quality Promised to Quality Certain, pp.16-39. 158 non-governmental organizations, governments, industry, regional and international organizations, and most important the general Caribbean population resident in the region and in the diaspora, who provide the bulk of the resources to finance tertiary education in the region. The common philosophical bond among this diverse group of stakeholders is to see these tertiary educational institutions, and particularly the UWI, fulfill their developmental mandate. But this ostensibly straightforward goal is certainly not as simple as it may appear on the surface, for among the stakeholders there exist a diversity of opinions, philosophies and views of how best this goal might be achieved, what are the priorities, and indeed, what the developmental mandate is all about. The pertinent task of tertiary education meeting and exceeding the expectations of its stakeholders strikes at the very root of an even more fundamental issue, namely, the purpose and role of education in society, especially in societies increasing being influenced by neo-liberal ideas and philosophies. Some may indeed, interpret quality and relevance in terms of education and training meeting the changing needs of the knowledge-based economies but even within this labour- market orientation perspective there has already evolved an awareness of the inadequacy of this narrow focus. As Fife notes:10 The business sector used to define quality as meeting the expectations of their customers and a customer as anyone who buys and uses their goods or services. Increasingly, this simple concept of quality as solely being measured by customer satisfaction is being seen as inadequate in producing an overall quality organization because it does not include the indirect customer who has a stake in how an organization performs. Examples of these indirect customers would be employee unions that are concerned with fair wages and benefits, the surrounding neighbourhoods of the organization that are concerned with pollution, or state and federal regulatory agencies who are concerned with fair trade or employee safety standards. Thus, more frequently the narrow concept of customer satisfaction is being broadened to the more inclusive concept of stakeholder satisfaction. Caribbean educational policymakers are keenly aware of these competing conceptions and orientations of education but as Nettleford rightly points out, tertiary educational institutions in 10. Ibid, pp.16-17. 159 the region must keep focused on both the short and long term goals of education as well as the specificities of the cultural context of the region : For some years now there has been an ongoing global debate as to the place of higher education in development. For a developing region like the Caribbean the issue is more precisely the role of quality higher education in its growth and development.... The multi-cultural and multi-racial nature of our region continues to provide special challenges and the inculcation of a greater knowledge and appreciation of the cultures of the Caribbean must be a central focus of our education systems. The University of the West Indies (UWI) must ensure that its graduates are not only well trained in their particular disciplines but also sensitive to these various issues, and imbued with a strong sense of social responsibility, in order that they might contribute to the debate.11 In the trenches of everyday life and in the regular interface of tertiary institutions with their manifold stakeholders the often conflicting perceptions of the role of education in society can, however, evoke heated emotions, condemnations and even reorientation of funding. Yet despite these difficulties there is a growing recognition that improving quality is a critical responsibility of tertiary education at this time, not only because of the swelling enrollments and fears about its impact on quality or because of the ongoing reconfiguration and diversification occurring among the institutions in the region but equally important because issues of accountability and relevance are now centre stage in the developmental discourse. 5.3 Evolution of Quality Mechanism in the Caribbean As in the case of many other developing regions of the world, quality assurance systems evolved with local institutions relying heavily on external mechanisms for approval that their quality was “good”. Roberts has documented this phenomenon in the Caribbean context:12 11. Rex Nettleford, “Foreword” in Beckles, Hilary, Anthony Perry and Peter Whiteley. The Brain Train. Quality Higher Education and Caribbean Development, Kingston Jamaica: Pear Tree Press, 2002. 12. Roberts, Vivienne. ‘Global Trends in Tertiary Education Quality Assurance. Implications for the Anglophone Caribbean’. Journal of Educational Management & Administration vol. 29, no. 4, 2001, p.437. 160 Formal quality assurance systems in the Caribbean are now emerging. Historically, the university used selectivity, results, external examiners, as such mechanisms. Some colleges like the teachers’ and theological colleges earned programme validation through endorsement from the local University of the West Indies, or from overseas universities, as in the case of Codrington College from Durham University. Many colleges demonstrated and controlled their quality through the taking of external examinations from the Royal Society of Health, City and Guilds and the University of Cambridge. Most were guided by standards set or approved and monitored by their Ministries of Education. The offerings of overseas universities in countries or overseas were often assessed and granted equivalence by Ministries of Education. It is true to say therefore that... Ministries of Education have exerted considerable control over tertiary education quality assurance in the Caribbean. But while this aspect of the region’s colonial legacy has without doubt served some good there has long been a recognition that it was inadequate for the needs of the Caribbean, particularly in terms of influencing what was relevant or “excellence” in the context of regional development. Thus increasingly there has been a shift both by regional educational institutions, and in particular the UWI, to engage in institutional reform for the purposes of enhancing relevance and quality. One component of these reforms, evident in institutions in the developing world, being attempts to develop stronger internal procedures for programme review and improvement.13 Since the late 1980s there has been as shift in the Caribbean from a situation where the locus of control has moved from a purely external to a mixed system of quality assurance. This has been reflected in the emergence of, for example:14 • the University Council of Jamaica (UJC) as a national accreditation body established in 1987; • the Regional Nursing Body (RNB) as a regional regulatory body for nursing 13. See, Elaine El-Khawas, Developing Internal Support for quality and Relevance, Washington DC: The World Bank. Latin America and the Caribbean Regional Office, November 1998; Elaine El- Khawas, Robin DePietro-Jurand and Lauritz Holm-Nielsen, Quality Assurance in Higher Education: Recent Progress; Challenges Ahead, September 1998. 14. Roberts. Global Trends in Tertiary Education Quality Assurance, p.437. 161 established in 1972; • the University of the West Indies Quality Audit Initiative set up in 1997; and a • Regional Mechanism for Articulation, Equivalency and Accreditation proposed in 2000. 5.4 The Development of the UWI Quality Assurance Unit The development of formal quality assurance processes and mechanisms at the UWI perhaps deserve some further elaboration for the simple reason that its efforts to respond to the quality challenge in this manner has been the most extensive and there is the real likelihood that its efforts, and lessons of experience, will inform and influence similar efforts at other tertiary education institutions in the region. Following years of planning and consultations around 1997/1998 the Board for Undergraduate Studies which has responsibility for general policy at the undergraduate level, embarked on the establishment of a moderately staffed quality assurance unit to formulate and develop quality assurance policies and strategies across the three campuses of the UWI. At present the responsibilities of the Quality Assurance Unit includes: • organizing quality assurance reviews of undergraduate and postgraduate taught programmes • supporting the major self-assessment that is undertaken before each review, and guiding the work of review teams during the visits and drafting the reports of the reviews. • conducting audits of the learning environment, such as those into the operation of the Summer School, registration procedures, foundation courses, the operation of the libraries etc. • participating in activities and visits to monitor quality assurance within the development of articulation agreements between UWI and regional tertiary institutions; and • supporting professional faculties and departments in preparations for accreditation visits, with a particular focus on the quality assurance procedures being employed (and with, when necessary and useful, a quality audit-that is, a review of these quality assurance procedures). 162 Although the quality audits and reviews inevitably have implications for staff and departments being reviewed, the objective of these measures is to improve quality as opposed to being punitive. This was made explicit in the Unit’s 2002 publication “The Brain Train. Quality Higher Education and Caribbean Development” which explained: 15 At UWI periodic reviews of teaching of all the different disciplines are undertaken in a five-year cycle. These reviews are quite separate from the academic assessment of members of staff, which is the responsibility of the Campus or University Appointments Committee. Quality assurance reviews do not assess individuals and, in contrast to the assessment of staff members for promotion or contract renewal, the internal quality assurance system at UWI is of a formative and developmental nature. The intent is to assure stakeholders of the continued high quality and standards of UWI’s academic work and to enhance that work. 5.5 Future Considerations for Relevance and Quality Assurance in the Region 5.5.1 The Future of Relevance & Research The search for relevance will no doubt continue to be a major preoccupation of tertiary education institutions in the region. To this end it may be possible to identify a few issues which are likely, or will continue, to be areas of concern and challenge in the future. These include: • The need for more endogenous research, but also more reconfiguration given that so much of the cutting-edge research is done outside developing countries • Constant evaluation to maintain relevance and quality • The lack of adequate comparable educational statistics to inform research and policy formulations. • The need to expand graduate programmes to provide cadre of quality researchers 15. Beckles, Hilary, Anthony Perry and Peter Whiteley. The Brain Train. Quality Higher Education and Caribbean Development, Kingston Jamaica: Pear Tree Press, 2002, p.68. 163 • The challenge of getting more staff involved in research, and in the case of colleges upgraded to university status, more assistance in creating a high quality research environment. • More but better directed research funding • Greater regional and international inter-institutional linkages, to facilitate technology transfer and knowledge sharing. • Building more dynamic linkages between research and teaching • More efficient use of the new technologies to enhance research and communication • More research on issues affecting non-campus countries; and • More basic but also more applied research in order to increase relevance with respect to the link between education and industry, as well as mitigating or solving the other key developmental challenges and issues of the region. 5.5.2 The Future of Quality Assurance Although it is unlikely that the quality assurance movement will disappear as have some educational “fads”, it is reasonable to believe that over time the very notion of quality will undergo further rethinking, and quality assurance processes and strategies will likewise be altered to reflect the new realities and conceptualizations. Nevertheless, there is much value in the assertions of Salenga & Fazel, that the following obstacles ought to be considered in achieving success and avoiding failure in developing strong internal quality assurance initiatives and mechanisms:16 16. G. Salegna and F. Fazel. “Obstacles to implementing quality”, Quality Progress, July 2000, pp.53-57. As cited in Johnathan D. Fife. “From Quality Promised to Quality Certain: Creating systematic Approach to Mission Fulfillment”, in Steven M. Janosik, Don G. Creamer and M. David Alexander (eds.) International Perspectives on Quality in Higher Education. Virginia: 164 • An organization wide definition of quality that is unclear . • A formalized strategic plan for change that is imprecise. • A stakeholder focus that is ill defined. • Inter-organizational communication that is inefficient. • Poorly conceived employee empowerment programs. • Low employee trust in senior management. • Senior management that views quality programs as a quick fix. • Quality systems are seen as a way to achieve short-term financial results. • Politics and turf issues are ignored when implementing a quality program. • A strong motivation for the implementation of a quality system throughout the organization is absent. • A feeling that there is a lack of time available to devote to a quality initiative. • And, a lack of serious, committed leadership. Educational Policy Institute of Virginia Tech, Department of Educational Leadership and Policy Studies, College of Human Resources and Education, 2000, pp.27-28.. 165 Overcoming these challenges and issues may indeed appear daunting since they relate to an organization’s culture as well as to its management, organization and strategic planning. However, as Fife has indicated, “most of these obstacles are overcome when the principles of quality culture are firmly integrated with a quality culture organization framework.”.17 But this is no easy task. The development of internal quality assurance processes is certainly desirable throughout the tertiary education sector in the region but as with all such new educational initiatives there needs to be ongoing evaluation of the benefits versus the costs, and a constant search to achieve greater efficiencies. Quality assurance systems have been known to bring such institutional benefits as making academic institutions give greater attention to issues of effective teaching and learning, improvements in degree completion rates in some systems, as student services and advising have received more attention, and greater acceptance today of the need for having open and accountable management procedures.18 However, a number of drawbacks have also been identified, including concern that quality assurance systems have led to “compliance” behaviour and inordinate paperwork burdens, as well as considerable administrative and financial burdens on governments.19 Thus in their search for quality a constant consideration of educational institutions and systems is often the financial implications of every educational initiative towards that goal. 17. Fife. From Quality Promised to Quality Certain, p.27-28 18. El-Khawas et. al, Quality Assurance in Higher Education, p.7. 19. Ibid. 166 Section 3: Towards Sustainable Financing ...very small nations have to invest more heavily in their human resources given that their participation in the world trading system depends on their being able to adjust their output quickly in the light of changes in demand. Their resilience, adaptability, and capacity to respond to change are a function of their production frontier which, in the case of very small countries, is defined more directly by the skills and knowledge that reside in their human resources. Thus, whatever the system of financing education, there is need for such countries to mobilize a high level of resource provision for education. (Ralph Henry)20 The twenty-first century knowledge-based economy needs more and more young (and not so young) students from all groups in society benefitting from higher education. Successive governments have recognized this and are working to create a truly mass system. They do not admit publicly however that taxpayers cannot afford to fund in full a mass system.” (David Greeanway et.al)21 How Caribbean governments and societies view education and expenditure on education, in relation to the development process and the value of their human capital, will to a large extent determine their willingness or unwillingness to provide more adequate resourcing for education at all levels (preschool, primary, secondary and tertiary), as well as for technical and vocational and continuing, life-long education and training, whether in formal, informal or non-formal educational learning environments. Yet, whatever the predispositions of the governments and peoples of the region towards educational spending there is a growing recognition spurred by certain economic constraints and developmental imperatives that the region’s entire approach to education financing is due for comprehensive reconsideration and overhaul in order to respond to the challenges and opportunities inherent in the new global economic and political environments of the twenty-first century. This section will provide a brief description of the historical and evolving nature of tertiary education financing in the Anglophone Caribbean, (with focus on the 20. Henry, Ralph, Report on Economic and Financing issues in Education in the Caribbean: Final Report, Washington DC: World Bank, March 2000, p.vii. 21. Greenaway David and Michelle Haynes. Funding Universities to Meet National and International Challenges. School of Economics Policy Report, University of Nottingham. Report commissioned by the Russell Group of Universities, 2000, p.4. 167 UWI), the factors which impact on the availability of funds especially for public tertiary educational institutions, and focus on the mix of strategies required and are being adopted in this new century to more adequately provide the resources needed to make tertiary education provision more expansive, equitable, relevant and quality oriented. In spite of the relatively recent emergence of private, for-profit tertiary educational institutions, it would still be accurate to claim that the tertiary education sector in the region, which is dominated by public institutions, is overly dependent on governments for its financing. Given the demonstrated and historical economic vulnerabilities of regional economies, tertiary educational institutions have in recent times, found themselves in a situation of double jeopardy. On the one hand they are being pressed by their stakeholders, including regional governments, to broaden access, democratize and remove inequities from tertiary education, and produce better quality products, while on the other, there is declining financial support from governments. This bind which public tertiary institutions in particular, have found themselves in has been dramatically illustrated by the experiences of the UWI as the region’s largest provider of tertiary educational opportunities, but is also very evident at other institutions such as the University of Guyana where the bind is even much tighter and more difficult to escape. 5.6 Regional Economic Travails and UWI Financial Woes The 1993 Chancellor’s Commission which investigated the conditions at the UWI was appalled at the extent of the financial predicament which existed at the UWI at that time. The following extract from its report clearly reveals the degree to which over reliance on government support had resulted in a dire situation developing at the UWI:22 The financial difficulties which UWI has been experiencing for the past several years are so serious that it would be no exaggeration to state that the University is facing a financial crisis of major proportions. This is intended, not as an alarmist statement, but rather as a call to Contributing Governments and the University itself to take urgent action to address the University’s financial problems. Failure to do so effectively and in a timely manner could seriously endanger the continued 22. Report of the Chancellor’s Commission, pp.44-47. 168 existence of the University..... The present decade [1990s] has already provided Contributing Countries with problems and challenges more difficult and complex than those which they faced during the 1970s and 1980s. But unfortunately, these problems and challenges are arising at a time when many of the Contributing countries are less equipped, in economic terms, to face them and when the international economic environment is much less favourable than in earlier decades. It is in this deteriorating economic and financial situation, with the worsening fiscal performance of Contributing Governments, and especially of the three campus governments, that there has been a significant build-up in arrears of contributions to UWI. At the end of July 1992, arrears of contributions amounted to US$52 million or 53% of Governments’ accrued contributions to UWI for the financial year ended on that date. The precarious financial situation of UWI clearly poses a serious threat to the institution’s continued operation unless urgent steps are taken by Contributing Governments to eliminate arrears. Contributing Governments must, therefore, face reality and recognize the plain economic truth that the economies of Commonwealth Caribbean countries cannot afford or support adequately free University education, especially if wider access to such education is to be provided. This situation is unlikely to improve in the foreseeable future.....Consequently, the Commission considers that the UWI and the Governments of its Contributing Countries need to work out some alternative budgetary process and funding approval mechanism for the University. 5.7 Impact of the Crisis on the UWI The financial crisis had a profoundly negative impact on the operations of the University and its ability to address in aggressive and innovative ways, many of the pressing developmental issues and challenges of the region. The Commission outlined the following as among the negative effects stemming from the financial crisis: • The UWI was forced to operate on substantial bank overdrafts with its commercial bankers at each campus, especially at Mona and St. Augustine. These large overdrafts were very costly either for the UWI or for the relevant campus Government where the Government accepted financial responsibility for the overdraft. • To avoid exceeding overdraft limits, UWI meetings scheduled to take place at one campus at very short notice had to be switched to another campus thus causing the disruption of administrative arrangements originally made for the meeting. 169 • There were unacceptably long delays and arrears in payments by UWI campus authorities to suppliers of goods and services • A considerable amount of time of Campus Bursars and Deputy Bursars, especially at Mona and St Augustine was spent in arranging overdraft facilities to prevent interruption of essential teaching and other activities on the campuses. • The campuses were unable to engage with any degree of confidence in meaningful medium to long-term planning as a result of financial uncertainty. • Campuses were unable to carry out the required maintenance of campus buildings and infrastructure, etc., which led to a depreciation of the building stock, and an earlier need to replace it than would otherwise be necessary, and at great capital cost. This led to inadequate and worsening physical facilities for students, and academic and administrative staff. 5.8 Recommendations of the Chancellor’s Commission In the light of the deteriorating conditions and their impact on every aspect of the governance and operations of the UWI the Commission made the following recommendations with respect to funding alternatives and creating a sustainable financial situation at the UWI: • That Governments should accept, especially in the light of planned expansion in student numbers that the University could no longer be financed on the basis of a free education for all students. • That the UWI should move towards full recovery of economic costs and must ensure that all of its activities are carried out cost-effectively, including streamlining its governance structure, and reducing administrative costs through greater utilization of new information technologies. • That the UWI must ensure that any “perks and privileges” provided to its senior academic and administrative staff are not out of line with those provided by private sector employers to similar levels of their employees, especially if the UWI expected to raise, on a continuing basis, increasing amounts of financing from the private sector. • That there should be an expansion of the distance education modality at the UWI as a way of reducing unit costs of delivering courses and facilitating greater access. • That the University should continue as a matter of urgency to seek external funds. 170 • That the University should review the financing of graduate education in order to put it on a more secure and equitable footing. • That the Governments should make provision for an adequate system of student loans to ensure that no eligible person is denied access to the University because of a lack of financial means. 5.9 UWI’s Response to Crisis & Search for Sustainability Since the difficulties of the 1980s and early 1990s, the UWI has emerged a much stronger institution financially and otherwise, due in large measure to the governments of the region clearing up their arrears, thanks in part to some encouragement from the CDB and other regional organizations, as well as to the rise to power of a number of former UWI graduates as Prime Ministers in several Caribbean countries who displayed a renewed commitment to the UWI. In addition, the UWI has been adopting an entrepreneurial approach to its operations. The following are some of the measures, both cost cutting and income generating, adopted by the UWI to meet the challenge of achieving financial sustainability. • The achievement of greater efficiencies through the utilization of new technologies in administration and governance. • The establishment of a number of Profit-Centres including the building of more Halls of residence for students, and the upgrading of the bookshops on the campuses. • The establishment of Summer School programmes offered at the three campuses during the long vacation period around July and August. In the academic year 2000/2001 the Summer School programme at the Mona campus in Jamaica had 2871 registered students. Enrolment is usually heaviest in the Faculty of Social Sciences, but also significant in the Faculty of Humanities. • The generation of income from technical services and consultancies aided by the establishment of Business Development Offices on each of the campuses. • The establishment of a Capital Campaign, which is led by the Vice Chancellor of the University, to mobilize financial resources from throughout the region and internationally. • At the Mona campus several commercial leases with private sector companies such 171 as Kentucy Fried Chicken, and the Bank of Nova Scotia, have in addition to generating income from rents, resulted in spin-offs including improvements to the building stock, beautification, and contributions to scholarships. • At the Mona campus the Senior Common Room was recently refurbished into a modern facility with a number of exquisitely decorated hotel rooms and state of the art conference and banqueting facilities. • At the St Augustine campus a large multipurpose sports gymnasium with numerous facilities and playing grounds to facilitate a variety of sporting activities has also been recently constructed, and is intended to be a source of income generation. • A number of specialized units have been established by various faculties to undertake applied research for commercial purposes. These include at Mona campus the Natural Products Institute, and the Mona Institute of Applied Sciences. • Additionally, a UWI Development and Endowment Fund has been established to help raise funds for the UWI. The UWI Development and Endowment Fund, a separate legal entity with its own Board of Directors, was established in 1990 to assist in soliciting funds particularly from the local business community to help with the upgrading and development of projects and programmes. There are Development and Endowment Offices on each of the three campuses. Since 1995 the Mona Fund alone has provided over Jamaican $40 million to support such projects as the establishment of Distance Teaching Centres in Jamaica, the work of the Campus Research and Publications Committee, the building of computer labs, the creation of the Hopwood Medical Education Computer Centre, provision of grants for overseas study in the Department of Government, etc. Through the combined efforts of these various initiatives the UWI is once again becoming a financially vibrant institution but much more needs to be done by way of innovative entrepreneurial initiatives to substantially reduce its dependence on governments, and before its quality and other institutional strengthening initiatives could be self-sustaining. 5.10 Resolving Inequities in Regional Access: 5.10.1 The Case of the OECS/Non-Campus Countries As we seen in chapter two of this report, students from the non-campus countries, many of which are OECS states, have historically suffered severely from the inability or lack of commitment by 172 their governments to fund large-scale participation in tertiary education. Former Pro-Vice Chancellor of the UWI Gerald Grell outlined the predicament faced by students in these countries relative to their colleagues in the campus countries: UWI students admitted from the campus Countries of the UWI are automatically sponsored by their respective Governments, and it is the general expectation that this approach to developing the human resources potential of citizens of the Caribbean will be implemented by all UWI contributing countries. Except for scholarship holders and other specially supported OECS students, Non-campus Country (NCC) students have traditionally had, individually, to find financial support and pay the full economic cost to attend UWI at one of the three campuses. Only recently Jamaican and Trinidad and Tobago students have had to pay a small “Cess” instituted by their Governments so that the concept of “payment” is now becoming a palpable issue to students of all contributing countries of UWI except those from Barbados who are still entirely funded by Government.” (Gerald Grell p.63.) While it is true that students in Barbados do not pay major costs like tuition they do however pay minor fees pertaining to such things as registration, obtaining student identification cards, caution money and Guild fees. Since the early 1990s the situation with respect to government support for students from the non-campus countries have improved marginally with some governments undertaking to meet the economic cost of many more students accepted by the UWI, particularly in priority areas of national development. The Governments of the OECS have also undertaken other initiatives to help their citizens access tertiary education particularly among their various national colleges and other tertiary institutions located in the subregion One such initiative is the OECS Centres of Excellence Endowment Fund which is now being created. The OECS Secretariat is now in the process of creating an endowment fund to assist in increasing access of OECS citizens to tertiary educational opportunities. The specific aim of the Fund “is to provide a continuous stream of income to help support regional collaboration in human resources development in the key sectors of the economy in the OECS”.23 The Fund which is to be independently managed by the Eastern Caribbean Central Bank will be used to support students 23. White, Michael. OECS Centres of Excellence Endowment Fund. Revised Draft Fund Instruments prepared for the OECS/OERU, February 2002. 173 who wish to attend college in one of the OECS Member states for the full length, or part of their training and education programme, and would cover such items as tuition, living expenses, learning resources and other special expenses. The Fund will target four main areas for financial support to students, namely Tourism, Agriculture, Information Technology, and Marine Services. In addition, as part of the OECS education enhancement programme which is in part being funded by the European Union, an investigation was recently completed focusing on the financing of tertiary education in the subregion. The report prepared by consultants Gaston Franklyn and Monica Woodley made the following recommendation with respect to increasing opportunities for citizens of the OECS to access tertiary education: • That the governments of the region and their individual colleges should establish a comprehensive financial assistance programme for college education students that recognize both academic needs and financial needs. This would include the provision of scholarships, bursaries, government loans, and special opportunity grants targetted to designated special needs groups such as women in rural communities. • That the OECs governments create greater accessibility to scholarships and bursaries by allocating an equal number of these to students going to academic tertiary institutions and those going to technical and vocational institutions. • That tertiary institutions be allowed the legal flexibility to engage more directly with the private sector and the community to obtain financing. • That cost recovery schemes be instituted for the various colleges in the OECS; and finally that, • That there be greater sharing of college staff/resources across the sub-region. 5.11 Conclusions and Future Prospects for Financing It is very likely that the recommendations made with respect to the OECS will significantly contribute to the broadening of access to tertiary education among citizens in that sub-region. However, as for the rest of the English speaking Caribbean, the governments must continue to nurture the perspective that the democratization of access to tertiary education can and will bring 174 numerous developmental benefits. As such, adequate funding must be provided to develop the tertiary level of the education sector while encouraging rationalization and greater efficiencies in the use of scarce resources. Ultimately, however, citizens across the English-speaking Caribbean must acknowledge the fact that the governments of the region are severely constrained and cannot provide the levels of funding needed or which they might want to provide. As such, the funding of higher education, as with investments in other developmental areas, must be a shared responsibility among all relevant stakeholders, including students, and their families, and the private sector. These groups in particular because of the enormous private returns which accrue to them must assume an increasing responsibility and share of the costs of providing tertiary education in the region. At the same time, governments must recognize that they have an obligation to put mechanisms in place to ensure that no citizen, particularly those from disadvantaged groups, including the poor and disabled, is excluded from accessing tertiary education, even though they might academically or otherwise, be suited to undertake this level of learning. 175 Appendix 1 Declaration About Higher Education in Latin America and the Caribbean1 Ratifying the terms of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights, which states in its article 26, paragraph 1 that ‘every person has the right to education’... and that ‘the access to higher education studies will be equal for all, on the basis of their corresponding merits’. Ratifying, in turn, the contents of the Convention against Discrimination in Education (1960), which states in its article IV, that the signatory States commit themselves ‘to ... offer all people alike higher education on the basis of a real equality and pursuant to the skills of each individual .....’ Starting by assuming the trends identified in the Policy Paper for Change and Development of Higher Education, published by UNESCO in 1995. And on the bases of the studies, debates and reflections on that document that have been performed since that date in the region, which have set forth the recommendation of strengthening equity, quality, relevance and internationalization of higher education. Taking into account the fact that as we enter the XXI century, and faced with the growth of unemployment, poverty and misery, mankind must actively address the following issues: growth with equity, the protection of the environment and the peace-building process. Furthermore, following the recommendations made by the United Nations, via: (a) the Programme for Peace, that contains principles and suggestions bearing on the preventive measures that will protect peace, as well as effective actions for restoring peace when uncontainable conflicts emerge, and (b) the Programme for Development, that sets forth the conceptual bases for fostering a 1Regional Conference on Policies and Strategies for the Transformation of Higher Education in Latin America and the Caribbean, Havana, Cuba, 18-22 November 1996; Also, World Conference on Higher Education: Higher Education in the Twenty-first Century Vision and Action, UNESCO, Paris, 5-9 October 1998, Vol.1, Final Report. 176 sustainable and permanent human development. Highlighting that human development, democracy and peace are inseparable elements -as stated in the medium-term strategy of UNESCO (1996-2001), that aims the higher education programmes of the Organization at three objectives: expanding access to higher education with no discrimination whatsoever, as well as expanding permanence in the system and the possibilities of having success; improving its management and strengthening the links with the labour work; while at the same time contributing to build peace and foster a development founded on justice, equity, solidarity and freedom. Taking up the report submitted to UNESCO by the International Commission on Education for the Twenty-first Century. The latter, in fact, does not only reaffirm the above mentioned options. It also sets forth that the universities of developing countries have the obligation of carrying out a research that can help solve the most serious problems that those countries are suffering. This is due to the fact that ‘they are the ones that should propose new approaches for development, so that they can build a better future and do so in a more effective manner.’ Acknowledging that economic and social development highly depend on training a highly skilled staff, specifically in this most special stage in history, characterized by the emergence of a new production paradigm based on the power of knowledge and the adequate handling of information. Acknowledging, in turn, that it depends on the potential to create a knowledge that satisfies the specific needs and lacks of the region, and that the latter is derived almost solely from higher education institutions - the knowledge instances that generate, criticize and disseminate it. Accepting, on the one hand, that the gap that is currently setting aside the countries of the region from the developed nations, is evidenced -among other aspects- in the following elements: education (rates of third-level schooling), technological research and development (size of the scientific and technical staff, investment in R&D), as well as information and communications. In fact, these aspects are set forth in the Report on Human Development of the United Nations 177 Development Programme, that was published in 1996. Likewise, accepting, on the other hand, that the source of R&D in almost all the countries in the region is public and that the highest percentage of research units operates within the framework of universities, as set forth in the World Report on Science published by UNESCO in 1993. Warning that, without adequate higher education and research institutions, developing countries can not except to adopt and apply the most recent development. And warning, likewise, that it would be even less feasible for them to make contributions of their own to development and to close the gap that keeps them away from industrialized nations. Taking due note of the fact that higher education in the region evidences the following trends: (a) an outstanding expansion of the student roll; (b) a persistence of inequalities and difficulties when attempts are made at democratizing knowledge; (c) a relative restriction of public investments in this sector; (d) a fast-paced increase and diversification of institutions that work in the field of third-level education; and, (e) a growing participation of the private sector in the composition of the education offer. Estimating that efforts have been made by higher education institutions, the governments of some Latin American and Caribbean countries, or else, the societies themselves of several countries that make up the region, aimed at increasing the rates of post secondary education. And further estimating that, despite those efforts, many of these nations are still far from achieving the coverage and quality required by globalization, regionalization and economic opening processes, as well as from achieving a real democratization of knowledge. Specifying that these trends are also evidenced at an international level. And, further, specifying that they coincide with simultaneous, though sometimes contradictory processes, namely: internationalization, regionalization, polarization, democratization, isolation and fragmentation, that have an effect on the development of higher education. And specifying, in turn, that the burden of the foreign debt, the increase in the value of imports of goods and services, the drop in 178 the share of world trade, are elements evidenced in the region leading to a situation of social inequality. Furthermore, specifying that the countries of the area make attempts at facing the latter problems with regional and sub-regional groups and implementing several social policies. Highlighting that, in these times of economic, political or social change - both positive and negative in nature - higher education is called to take up a leading role and to critically study these changes, while at the same time making prospective efforts aimed at predicting and even conducting them via the creation and dissemination of the pertinent knowledge. And, further highlighting that, to this end, higher education must take up its own transformation with the help of society as a whole, not only that of the education sector alone. Reminding that in the case of Latin America, the Cordoba Reform (1918) - though responding to the needs of a society that was completely different from our own - was characterized by its clear support to the movement of university democratization. Reminding, in turn, that it insisted on the need to create solid and diversified links between university activities and the needs of society - a process that is currently re-emerging to guide the process of transformation of higher education that is underway in the region. And, further reminding that the latter is seen as a continuous phenomenon aimed at designing an original institutional scheme adapted to satisfy the current and future needs of their countries. Pointing out that any attempt at improving the quality and relevance of higher education requires a significant transformation of the education system as a whole. Furthermore, pointing out that the solution of the financial problems faced by higher education in Latin America and the Caribbean will not stem from redistributing the scarce resources that are allocated to the different levels in this sector. Likewise, pointing out that, on the contrary, they will be the result of transferring resources of other sectors that are not a real priority, while at the same time improving the distribution of income and diversifying financing sources. Pointing out, in turn, that all this has to be the result of a search undertaken with the participation of the State, the civil society, professional and business communities in order to respond - jointly and equitably - to the 179 needs of the different sectors that make up society. The participants of the Regional Conference of UNESCO on Policies and strategies for the transformation of higher education in Latin America and the Caribbean, coming from 26 countries, and assembled in Havana, Cuba, from November 18 to 22, 1996, do hereby declare that 1. Education, in general, and higher education, in particular, are essential instruments for facing up with success the challenges posed by the modern world and for educating citizens that can thus build a more open and fair society. It will be a society based on solidarity, respect for human rights and the shared use knowledge and information. At the same time, higher education is an unavoidable element for social development, production, economic growth, strengthening the cultural identity, maintaining social coherence, continuing the struggle against poverty and the promotion of the culture of peace. 2. Knowledge is a social asset that can only be generated, transmitted, criticized and recreated for the benefit of society, in plural and free institutions that have a full autonomy and academic freedom. However, the latter must also have a clear awareness of their responsibility and a will of service that cannot be turned down. Hence, they will be prepared to search for solutions to the demands, needs and lacks of society. This is indeed a society it should be accountable to - as a requirement - in order to exercise fully its autonomy. Higher education will be able to fulfil this important task only if it demands itself the highest quality. In this respect, a continuous and permanent assessment is indeed a most valuable instrument. 3. Higher education must strengthen its capacity to perform a critical analysis, to anticipate and to have a prospective vision. It must do so in order to prepare alternate development proposals and face the emerging problems of a reality undergoing a process of continuous and rapid transformation, in a long term horizon. 180 4. Higher education institutions must adopt organizational structures and education strategies that render them highly dynamic and flexible, thus enabling them to respond with both the timeliness and anticipation needed to creatively and efficiently face an uncertain future. They are called to facilitate an exchange of students between institutions and between different degree courses of the same institution. They will have to take up - without any further delays - the paradigm of permanent education. They will have to turn into pertinent centres for facilitating professionals to be up to date, duly retrained and reconverted. Hence, they will have to offer a solid training in the basic disciplines, along with a wide diversification of programmes and studies, intermediate diplomas and links between courses and subjects. Likewise, they must endeavour to ensure that the activities of extension and dissemination are an important element of the academic life. 5. The nature itself of contemporary knowledge -in a process of constant renewal and most sudden and dramatic growth - fully agrees with the current notion of permanent education. This must be an indissoluble supplement of studies aimed at obtaining degrees and titles. They offer graduates the possibility of taking refresher courses and of adapting to changing realities that are very difficult to anticipate. Besides, permanent education should also enable any person - at whatever stage of his/her life - to go back to the classrooms and to find in them the opportunity to be a part of the academic life once again. In this way, people are allowed to attain new levels of professional training. In fact, the competence acquired has a value in itself that goes beyond the mere credential. 6. Higher education must implement pedagogical methods based on knowledge, in order to train graduates that learn how to learn and how to undertake. In this way, they will be better prepared to generate their own jobs. They might even be able to create production entities that can help combat the scourge of unemployment. There is a clear need for promoting the spirit of inquiry. Hence, the student will have the tools to search for knowledge in a permanent and systematic manner. In turn, this implies revising the 181 pedagogical methods that are currently in effect and the emphasis now placed on the transmission of knowledge will switch to the process for generating it. In this way, students will count on the instruments they require in order to learn how to learn, how to know, how to live together and how to be. 7. A changing society demands people to have a comprehensive, general and professional education. The latter must encourage the development of a person as a whole and should favour his/her personal growth, autonomy, socialization and the skills to turn the assets that perfect it into elements having real value. 8. A higher education system will be fulfilling its responsibility and conscientiously carry out its mission - thus turning into a profitable social element - if a part of its teaching staff and institutions also performs intellectual creation (scientific, technical and humanistic) activities. The latter, in turn must be in agreement with the specific objectives of the institution, its teaching capabilities and its material resources 9. It is absolutely necessary to introduce a solid culture of information in the higher education systems of the region. The adequate combination of information and communication redefines the need to update pedagogical practices at a university level. Besides, its players need to participate in the major academic networks and have access to the pertinent exchange with all the related institutions. Likewise, they must increase their degree of opening and their interactions with the international academic community. At the same time, higher education institutions must take up the main task of preserving and strengthening the cultural identity of the region. In this way, the above mentioned opening will not endanger the cultural values that are typical of Latin America and the Caribbean. 10. Among the challenges posed by this turn of the century, higher education is now facing the need to participate resolutely in the qualitative improvement of all the levels of the education system. Its most concrete contributions can be made a reality via: training 182 teachers; transforming students into active agents of their training; promoting socio- educational research into problems as could be the case of early school drop-out and repeating; and ensuring its contribution to the design of State policies in the field of education. Every higher education policy must be comprehensive and must address and take into due account all the components of the education system. Most specifically, it must do so under the umbrella of an ‘education for all’, as set forth in the Conference of Jomtien (Thailand, 1990) - at a world scale and in the Main education project for Latin America and the Caribbean - at a regional level. 11. Higher education institutions of our region must instil in their graduates the awareness that they really belong to the community of Latin American and Caribbean nations. Hence, they must promote processes aimed at regional integration. Furthermore, cultural and educational integration should be the bases for political and economic integration. Faced with the formation of new economic spaces within the current framework of globalization and regionalization, higher education institutions must address their studies of Latin American integration in the light of their economic, social, cultural, ecological and political aspects, among others. This will be their main task and they should address the problems with an interdisciplinary approach. 12. Founded on the Regional convention and the international recommendation on validation of studies, degrees and diplomas, there is a need to encourage academic and professional mobility. The purpose is no other than that of favouring the process of economic, educational, political and cultural integration of the region. 13. Both the transfer and the exchange of experiences between higher education institutions - key elements of the UNITWIN/UNESCO Chairs programme - are indispensable for promoting knowledge and ensuring that the latter is applied to encourage development. Interuniversity co-operation can be further facilitated by the constant progress evidenced in the field of information and communication technologies. In turn, it can be 183 strengthened by the current economic and political integration processes, as well as by the growing need for a real inter-cultural understanding. 14. The considerable expansion of different types of networks and other instruments and mechanisms for linking up institutions, professors and students is a key issue in the collective search for equity, quality and relevance in higher education. This is specifically the case now, when no institution can hope to master all the areas of knowledge. 15. Public support for higher education is still indispensable. The challenges faced by higher education are also challenges for society as a whole. They include governments, the production sector, the labour world, the organized civil society, academic associations, along with regional and international organizations that are responsible for the training, research, development or financing programmes. 16. On account of all the considerations above, all the social players must combine efforts and start acting so as to foster the process of in-depth transformation of higher education. To this end, they must be based on a new ‘social consensus’ that enables higher education institutions to be better positioned and thus have respond to current and future needs for a sustainable human development. In the immediate future, this aspiration will gradually turn more concrete, as the action plan designed in this Conference will be executed. 184 Appendix 2 List of Major Anglophone Caribbean Tertiary Education Providers Jamaican Tertiary Level Institutions B & B Institute of Business Bethlehem Moravian College Brown's Town Community College Caribbean Graduate School of Theology Church Teachers' College College of Agriculture, Science and Education Edna Manley College of the Visual and Performing Arts Excelsior Community College G.C. Foster College of Physical Education and Sport Individual Systems Ltd. Institute of Computer Technology Institute of Management and Production Institute of Management Sciences Institute for Theological and Leadership Development Insurance College of Jamaica Jamaica Constabulary Force Staff College Jamaica Institute of Bankers Jamaican Institute of Management Jamaica Maritime Institute Jamaica Theological Seminary Knox Community College Management Institute for National Development Mico Teachers' College 185 Moneague College Montego Bay Community College PBS Training Institute Portinore Community College Production Institute of Management Sciences Sam Sharpe Teachers’ College School of Medical Radiation Technology School of Physical Therapy Shortwood Teachers' College St. Joseph's Teachers' College St. Michael's Seminary Toolmakers Institute United Theological College of the West Indies University of Technology University of the West Indies, Mona Campus University of the West Indies Department of Nursing Education University of the West Indies School of Physical Therapy Vector Technology Institute Vicariate of Mandeville College Vocational Training Development Institute West Indies College West Indies School of Public Health Trinidad Tertiary Level Institutions Caribbean Union College Eastern Caribbean Institute of Agriculture & Forestry (ECIAF) John S. Donaldson Technical Institute Joint Services Staff College NIHERST Information Technology College 186 NIHERST School of Languages Royal Bank Institute of Business and Technology (ROYTEC) San Fernando Technical Institute (SFTI) Trinidad and Tobago Hospitality and Tourism Institute (TTHTI) Barbados Tertiary Level Training Institutions Barbados Community College Erdiston Teachers’ College BIMAP: Barbados Institute of Management & Productivity Non-Campus Tertiary Level Training Institutions Antigua State College Belize Technical College Belize College of Agriculture Clarence Fitzroy Bryant College (St. Kitts/Nevis) Clifton Dupigny Community College (Dominica) College of Bahamas Community College of the Cayman Islands Community College of St. Vincent and the Grenadines Dominica’s Teachers’ College H. Lavity Stoutt Community College (BVI) Montserrat Technical College Princess Margaret Hospital School of Nursing (Dominica) Sir Arthur Lewis Community College (St Lucia) St Vincent Technical College T.A. Marryshow Community College (Grenada) 187 Appendix 3 Categorizations of Main Foreign Institutions Operating in The Caribbean Categorization by Country/Region of Operation The categorization used here does not simply imply that institutions actually have physical bases in, or operate from the country under which they are listed. This is only so in some cases, and these are identified by means of an asterisk(*). Rather, the categorization reflects evidence of actual physical bases, or operations run from the respective countries, as well as, evidence that students in the respective countries do programmes offered by these institutions, either directly through the use of distance education technologies such as the Internet, or traditional correspondence, or various combinations, or through local institutions administering the programmes on behalf of the foreign institutions. Antigua *School of Medicine, University of Health Sciences Antigua (UHSA) Aruba, Netherlands Antilles *Universidat di Aruba Bahamas Douglas University Nova Southeastern University St Thomas Moore University University of Miami Barbados 188 Carnegie Mellon University (in collaboration with Barbados Community College) Civil Service College of Singapore in collaboration with BIMAP Commonwealth Secretariat in collaboration with BIMAP McGill University (Canada): Via UWI Bellairs Institute in Barbados University of Surrey (UK)in collaboration with BIMAP Belize *School of Medicine, Central America Health Sciences University (CAHSU) *St Matthews University School of Medicine (Affiliated to St Joseph’s College of Maine & Intercollege of Cyprus) British Virgin Islands *Commonwealth Open University SUNY University *University of the Virgin Islands (may rightfully be regarded as an indigenous institution. Based in the US Virgin Islands.) Wright State University Cayman Islands University of Liverpool (Law degree programme) Dominica *Ross University School of Medicine *University of New Orleans (pending) Grenada *Saint Georges University Guyana 189 *American International School of Medicine (AISOM) Jamaica Barry University Florida State University Nova Southeastern University University of Manchester (in collaboration with the Jamaica Institute of Bankers) University of New Orleans University of Wales (in collaboration with the Jamaica Institute of Bankers) Montserrat & St. Maarten *American University of the Caribbean (AUC) [Relocated to St. Maarten due to volcanic activity] *St. Johns University (Pending) Saba: *Saba University School of Medicine St. Eustatius, Netherlands Antilles University of Sint Eustatius School of Medicine St Vincent: *Kingston Medical School St Lucia: * Spartan Health Sciences University St Kitts & Nevis 190 *Berne University Chicago Medical School (via Ross Vet. See No 10) *Caribbean Primates Ltd). McGill University *Eastern Caribbean University *Grace University School of Medicine *International University of the Health Sciences (IUHS) in St. Kitts *Medical University of the Americas (MUA) *Norma Ross International University *Northwestern University (via Ross Vet. See No.10) *Ross University School of Veterinary Medicine *Windsor University School of Medicine Yale University (via Ross Vet) Trinidad Drexel University (in collaboration with T&T Institute of Technology) Southern Alberta Institute of Technology (in collaboration with T&T Institute of Technology) University of New Brunswick Caribbean Region-Wide Institutions Athabasca University Memorial University British School of Computing & Commerce Mount St Vincent University Edinburgh Business School Nottingham Trent University Heriot-Watt University Ryerson University Howard University University of Greenwich ICS Learning Systems University of London Institute of Marketing & Business Studies University of Sunderland Leicester University University of Sheffield London College of Management 191 Alphabetical List of Foreign Tertiary Institutions Operating in Caribbean2 The country/region indicated in square brackets point to the primary base from where the institution is operating. American University of the Caribbean (AUC) [Caribbean] American International School of Medicine (AISOM) [Caribbean] Athabasca University [Canada] Barry University [USA] Berne University [Caribbean] British School of Computing & Commerce [UK] Chicago Medical School (via Ross Vet/St Kitts Biomedical Research Foundation)[USA] Civil Service College of Singapore (in collaboration with BIMAP) [Singapore] Commonwealth Open University [Caribbean] Commonwealth Secretariat (in collaboration with BIMAP) [Canada] Douglas University [USA] Drexel University (in collaboration with T&T Institute of Technology) [USA] Eastern Caribbean University [Caribbean] Edinburgh Business School [UK] Florida State University [UK] Grace University School of Medicine [Caribbean] Heriot-Watt University [UK] Howard University [USA] 2 As has been indicated in the case of Northern Caribbean University and the University of the Virgin Islands (and others like the American University of the Caribbean may be added) the categorization of some institutions as being “foreign” may be problematic and may need revisiting in the future as more data is collected. Fundamental questions which may be asked in terms of what represents a foreign institution may allude to such issues as the location, ownership and national/regional acceptance of the particular institution. Delineation of these issues may help us to develop a clearer understanding of the term “foreign institution”. 192 ICS Learning Systems [USA & UK] International University of the Health Sciences in St. Kitts (IUHS) [Caribbean] Kingston Medical School [Caribbean] Leicester University [UK] London College of Management [UK] McGill University (business of staff member: Caribbean Primates Ltd) [Canada] McGill University (Canada): Via UWI Bellairs Institute [Canada] Medical University of the Americas [Caribbean] Memorial University [Canada] Mount St. Vincent University [Canada] Norma Ross International University [Caribbean] Northern Caribbean University (Despite external linkages might be considered an indigenous institution [Caribbean] Northwestern University (via Ross Vet) [USA] Nottingham Trent University [UK] Nova Southeastern University [USA] Ross University School of Medicine [Caribbean] Ross University School of Veterinary Medicine [Caribbean] Ryerson University [Canada] Saba University School of Medicine [Caribbean] School of Medicine, University of Health Sciences Antigua (UHSA) [Caribbean] School of Medicine, Central America Health Sciences University (CAHSU) [Caribbean] Southern Alberta Institute of Technology (in collaboration with T&T Institute of Technology) [USA] Spartan Health Sciences University [Caribbean] St Thomas Moore University [USA] St Matthews University School of Medicine [Caribbean] St. Johns University [Caribbean] St. Georges University [Caribbean] SUNY University [Caribbean] 193 Universidat di Aruba [Caribbean] University of Wales (in collaboration with the Jamaica Institute of Bankers) [UK] University of Manchester (in collaboration with the Jamaica Institute of Bankers) [UK] University of Sint Eustatius School of Medicine [Caribbean] University of New Brunswick [Canada] University of New Orleans [USA] University of Surrey (in collaboration with BIMAP) [UK] University of Sheffield [UK] University of Sunderland [UK] University of London (UK) University of Greenwich (UK) University of Miami [USA] University of the Virgin Islands (may be considered indigenous) [Caribbean] University of Liverpool [UK] Windsor University School of Medicine [Caribbean] Wright State University [USA] Yale University (via Ross Vet) [USA] 194 Explicitly Questionable/Dubious Institutions American University of the Suriname This dubious university is owned by the same individuals who own other dubious universities including Capitol University and Ashington University, and Trinity Colleges & University. Capitol University is apparently registered in the BVI, and as such claims to be a British university. Capitol University is apparently owned by one Dr Kristiaan De Ley who interestingly has a PhD from Trinity College & University. A Dr. Payne is mentioned as a reference for Dr. Ley who lives in Louisiana, USA. There is also at least one University Registered in the Caribbean Region (most likely for tax purposes) but located elsewhere. This is St. George University International. This university is located in Naruto, Japan, but its business name is registered in the Turks & Caicos Islands in the Caribbean. 195 Categorization of Institutions by Discipline/Curriculum Focus In this category some institutions may be listed under more than one sub-heading in order to distinguish major areas of focus of the institution in question, in the context of their offerings in the Caribbean. Alphabetical List of Medical Institutions American International School of Medicine (AISOM) American University of the Caribbean (AUC) Grace University School of Medicine International University of the Health Sciences in St. Kitts (IUHS) Kingston Medical School Medical University of the Americas (MUA) Norma Ross International University (Psychology) Ross University School of Medicine Saba University School of Medicine St. Georges University School of Medicine, University of Health Sciences Antigua (UHSA) School of Medicine, Central America Health Sciences University (CAHSU) Spartan Health Sciences University St Matthews University School of Medicine St. Johns University University of Sint Eustatius School of Medicine Windsor University School of Medicine List of Veterinary Institutions Caribbean Primates Ltd (McGill University: business of staff member) Chicago Medical School (via Ross Vet/ St Kitts Biomedical Research Foundation) Northwestern University (via Ross Vet/St Kitts Biomedical Research Foundation) 196 Ross University School of Veterinary Medicine St. Georges University Yale University (via Ross Vet/St Kitts Biomedical Research Foundation) List of General (multiple disciplines) Category Institutions Athabasca University Barry University Berne University Commonwealth Open University Douglas University Eastern Caribbean University Florida State University ICS Learning Systems Leicester University Memorial University Mount St. Vincent University Nova Southeastern University Ryerson University Saint Georges University St Thomas Moore University SUNY University Universidat di Aruba University of New Brunswick University of New Orleans University of Sheffield University of Greenwich University of Miami Wright State University 197 List of Business & Management Oriented Institutions British School of Computing & Commerce Civil Service College of Singapore (in collaboration with BIMAP) Commonwealth Secretariat (in collaboration with BIMAP) Edinburgh Business School Heriot-Watt University London College of Management Nottingham Trent University University of Manchester (in collaboration with the Jamaica Institute of Bankers) University of Surrey (in collaboration with BIMAP) University of Sunderland University of London University of Wales (in collaboration with the Jamaica Institute of Bankers) List of Environment, Science & Technology Oriented Institutions Drexel University (in collaboration with T&T Institute of Technology) McGill University (Canada): Via UWI (Cave Hill) Bellairs Institute Southern Alberta Institute of Technology (in collaboration with T&T Institute of Technology) University of Sunderland List of Law Oriented Institutions University of Liverpool University of London List of Theology Oriented Institutions Howard University (USA) 198 Some International Accrediting Associations & Organizations Operating in the Caribbean These organizations listed below (and there are others operating in the Caribbean covering a wide variety of subject areas) are regarded as being important in any analysis of foreign offshore educational providers even though for most part we tend to see their operation as being acceptable and unavoidable. We need to reflect on developing Caribbean/Latin American based accreditation institutions, associations and organizations. Such a move can be seen as desirable for the simple reason that no one can question that the income which goes to these foreign accrediting organizations on an annual basis is very substantial. One only needs to reflect on the fact, that increasingly most accounts and management students feel the need, or are being pressured, to acquire professional qualifications such as the ACCA, CGA or CMA, in order to get a “good” job. We may justifiably ask whether a consortia of universities in the Caribbean and Latin America, through CARICOM or the Association of a Caribbean States could not develop appropriate accreditation programmes for the subject areas, which are comparable in quality to the ACCA, CGA, etc. One should remember that most of these graduates end up working in the Caribbean and Latin America, anyway. ABE: Association of Business Executives ACCA: Association of Chartered Certified Accountants ACP: Association of Computer Professionals CGA: Certified General Accountants (Canada) CIB: Chartered Institute of Bankers CII: Chartered Insurance Institute CIM: Chartered Institute of Marketing CIMA: Certified Institute of Management Accounting (British version of CMA) CMA: Certified Management Accountants (Canada & USA ICSA: Institute of Chartered Secretaries and Administrators IMIS: Institute for the Management of Information Systems 199 APPENDIX 4 TERTIARY EDUCATION AND RELATED EDUCATIONAL STATISTICS 200 List of Tables Table 1 Socio-Economic Data for the Caribbean Sub-Region, 1998 Table 2 Tertiary Enrolment by Country of Origin and Location of Study, 1998 Table 3 Caribbean Tertiary Students Studying in Other Caribbean Countries, 1998 Table 4 Caribbean Tertiary Students Studying in OECD Countries by Country of Origin, 1998 Table 5 Caribbean Tertiary Students in OECD Countries by Country of Origin and by Level of Study, 1998 Table 6 Caribbean Tertiary Students in Canada by Level of Study and Gender, 1990 and 1998 Table 7 Students from the English-speaking Caribbean Enrolled in Higher Education Institutions in the United States: 2000/2001 Table 8 Caribbean Students in Britain (1999/2000) Table 9 Number of Foreign Students in the Caribbean, 1998 Table 10 Tertiary Students Coming to the Caribbean by Country of Origin, 1998 Table 11 Regional Output of Secondary School Graduates Satisfying UWI’s Lower Level Matriculation, 2000 Examinations (School Candidates Only) Table 12 Regional Output of Secondary School Graduates Achieving 2 or More Passes at One Sitting Cambridge GCE Advanced Level Examinations Table 13 Current Demand and Supply for Undergraduate Places at UWI: High-level Gap Analysis Table 14 Scenario II (High Growth) Enrolment Projections (University of the West Indies) Table 15 High-Growth Enrolment Projections Faculty-Level Distributions: Full-time Equivalent (FTE) Basis (University of the West Indies) Table 16 Comparative Student Registrations at On- and Off-Campus Locations in 1999/2000 and 2000/01 (University of the West Indies) 201 Table 17 Comparison of FTE Enrolment between 1999/2000 and 2000/2001 (University of the West Indies) Table 18 Actual FTE Enrollment by Campus and Faculty/School, 2000/01 (University of the West Indies) Table 19 FTE Enrollment by Campus, Student Status and Programme - 2000/01 (University of the West Indies) Table 20 University Enrollment by Campus, Student Status and Programme - 2000/01 (University of the West Indies) Table 21 Percentage Distribution of Male and Female Registrations in On-campus First Degree Programmes by Faculty/School and Campus - 2000/01 (University of the West Indies) Table 22 On- and Off-campus Student Registrations by Programme and Campus - 2000/01 (University of the West Indies) Table 23 Comparison of On-Campus Student Enrollment between 1999/2000 and 2000/01 (University of the West Indies) Table 24 Total On-campus Registration of Students by Faculty/School and Country of Origin - 2000/01 (University of the West Indies) Table 25 Number of OECS Students as a Percentage of Total On-campus Student Population by Campus, 1995 - 2000 (University of the West Indies) Table 26 Total On-campus Enrollment by Campus and Country of Origin - 2000/01 (University of the West Indies) Table 27 Environment for Technician Courses in Technical Schools in Trinidad and Tobago, by Course, Year and Sex, 1996/97 Table 28 Programme Offerings at Samuel Jackman Prescod Polytechnic Table 29 Samuel Jackman Prescod Polytechnic Statistics Based on the Pass and Drop-Out Rates for Certification in Full-Time Programmes, 1997/98 Table 30 Total Enrolment in Higher Degree Programmes (ending April 30, 2001) – Mona Campus (University of the West Indies) Table 31 Registration in Graduate Programmes – Cave Hill Campus (University of the West 202 Indies) Table 32 Postgraduate Student Enrolment for Schools/Faculties –St. Augustine Campus for the period 1996/97 to 2000/2001 (University of the West Indies) Table 33 Postgraduate Degree Registrations 2000/2001 – St. Augustine Campus (University of the West Indies) Table 34 Recurrent Expenditure on Education in Selected Countries (Period Averages*) Table 35 Human Development Index Table 36 Enrolment by Programme Cluster (UWI, School of Continuing Studies) Table 37 Student Numbers by Centre 2000-2001 (UWI, School of Continuing Studies) Table 38 Enrolment Figures by Programme Cluster, Course and Centre 2000-2001: Business and Administrative Studies (UWI, School of Continuing Studies) Table 39 Enrolment Figures by Programme Cluster, Course and Centre 2000-2001: Computer Studies (UWI, School of Continuing Studies) Table 40 Enrolment Figures by Programme Cluster, Course and Centre 2000-2001: Health & Human Services Studies (UWI, School of Continuing Studies) Table 41 Enrolment Figures by Programme Cluster, Course and Centre 2000-2001: Languages, Creative Writing, Drama & Media Studies (UWI, School of Continuing Studies) Table 42 Enrolment Figures by Programme Cluster, Course and Centre 2000-2001: Pre-University & Access Programmes (UWI, School of Continuing Studies) Table 43 Enrolment Figures by Programme Cluster, Course and Centre 2000-2001: Special Offers & External Studies (UWI, School of Continuing Studies) Table 44 Enrolment Figures by Programme Cluster, Course and Centre 2000-2001: UWI Offers (UWI, School of Continuing Studies) Table 45 Enrolment Figures by Programme Cluster, Course and Centre 2000-2001: Vocational & Job-Oriented (UWI, School of Continuing Studies) Table 46 Number of Certificates Awarded by Centre 2000-2001 (UWI, School of Continuing Studies) Table 47 Age Distribution of full-time Academic Staff at the Mona Campus, 2000/2001 203 (University of the West Indies) Table 48 Full-Time Academic Staff at the Mona Campus by Faculty/School and Academic Qualification, 2000/2001 (University of the West Indies) Table 49 Full-time Academic Staff at the Mona Campus by Faculty/School and Category, 2000/2001 (University of the West Indies) Table 50 Enrolment by Main Divisions of Specialization at Sir Arthur Lewis Community College, 1993/94 to 2000/01 Table 51 Male Enrolment by Main Divisions of Specialization at Sir Arthur Lewis Community College, 1996/97 to 2000/01 (University of the West Indies) Table 52 Growth of Female Enrolment according to the Main Divisions/Departments of Specialization at Sir Arthur Lewis Community College, 1996/97 to 2000/01 Table 53 Percentage Share of Female Enrolment in the Main Divisions/Department of Specialization at Sir Arthur Lewis Community College, 1996/97 to 2000/01 Table 54 Percentage of Male Enrolment in the Main Divisions/Department of Specialization at Sir Arthur Lewis Community College, 1996/97 to 2000/01 Table 55 Percentage Distribution of Enrolment by Main Divisions/Departments of Specialization at Sir Arthur Lewis Community College, 1994/95 to 2000/01 Table 56 Dropouts at Sir Arthur Lewis Community College by Division/Department, 1994/95 to 1990/00 Table 57 Total Leavers at Sir Arthur Lewis Community College, 1998/99 and 1999/00 Table 58 Changes in Student/Teacher Ratios at Sir Arthur Lewis Community College, 1997/98 to 2000/01 Table 59 Allocations of Expenditure per Student by Ministry of Education for Sir Arthur Lewis Community College, 1994/95 to 2000/01 Table 60 Total Enrolment by Main Departments of Specialization at Vieux-Fort Comprehensive School - Post Secondary Department, 1996/97 to 2000/01 Table 61 Male Enrolment by Main Departments of Specialization at Vieux-Fort Comprehensive School - Post Secondary Department, 1996/97 to 2000/01 Table 62 Female Enrolment by Main Departments of Specialization at Vieux-Fort Comprehensive School - Post Secondary Department, 1996/97 to 2000/01 204 Table 63 Percentage Share of Females by Enrolment by Main Departments of Specialization at Vieux-Fort Comprehensive School - Post Secondary Department, 1996/97 to 2000/01 Table 64 Allocation Pattern of Current Educational Expenditure by Levels of Education and Programs, 1994/95 to 20001/02 (St. Lucia) Table 65 Percentage Distribution of Current Educational Expenditure by Levels of Education and Programs, 1994/95 to 2001/02 (St. Lucia) Table 66 Allocation to Education Sector in Relation to Current and Capital Budgetary Expenditures, 2001/02 (St. Lucia) Table 67 Projections of Public Expenditure by Levels of Education and Programs at Current Prices in St. Lucia, 2000/01 to 2005/06 Table 68 Actual and Projected Educational Expenditure at Current Prices in Reaction to Gross Domestic Product, 1994/95 to 2005/06 (St. Lucia) Table 69 Actual and Projected Educational Expenditure in Relation to Total Government Recurrent Expenditure, 1994/95 to 2005/06 (St. Lucia) Table 70 Barbados Community College Full-time Student Statistics 2000 - 2001 Table 71 Barbados Community College Student Enrollment According to Division 2000 - 2001 Table 72 Summary of Expenditure on post-Secondary/Tertiary Institutions for the Period 1995/96 - 2000/01 (Barbados) Table 73 No. of Applicants Accepted and Not Accepted at BCC, SJPP and ETTC in 2000/01 (Barbados) 205 Table 1 - Socio-economic data for the Caribbean sub-region, 1998 Area (km2) Estimated Inhabitants GDP per capita Population per km2 (US$) Area (km2) Estimated Population Inhabitants per km2 GDP per capita (US$) Anguilla 96 8 103 84 11 678 Antigua and Barbuda 442 66 843 151 9 370 Aruba 193 93 979 487 … Bahamas 13 878 296 110 21 11 395 Barbados 430 268 106 624 8 717 Belize 22 696 229 796 10 2 741 Bermuda 53 63 568 1 199 38 652 British Virgin Islands 153 20 263 132 29 795 Cayman Islands 264 35 739 135 27 187 Dominica 751 70 770 94 3 630 Grenada 344 93 065 271 2 997 Guyana 214 969 849 559 4 846 Haiti 27 750 7 952 408 287 443 Jamaica 10 990 2 538 284 231 2 707 Montserrat 102 10 678 105 3 570 Netherlands Antilles 800 212 694 266 13 827 St Kitts and Nevis 261 39 044 150 7 440 St Lucia 622 150 232 242 4 081 St Vincent and the 388 112 374 290 2 815 Grenadines Suriname 163 265 413 786 3 2 454 Trinidad and Tobago 5 130 1 282 897 250 4 622 Turks and Caicos Islands 430 15 623 36 … Source: UNESCO Statistics and Indicators on Education, 1998/90 , The Caribbean and Latin America - ‘Good Neighbours: Caribbean Students at the Tertiary Level of Education’. 2001 206 Table 2 - Tertiary enrolment by country of origin and location of study, 1998 Studying in the Studying in Total Total primary Tertiary Total Total number of Caribbean OECD tertiary plus enrolment as population tertiary students countries enrolment secondary % total per 10 000 not in in home enrolment prim/sec population home country enrolment country Anguilla 12 - ... ... 2 581 ... 8 103 ... Antigua and 83 - 305 388 ... ... 66 843 58 Barbuda Aruba - 1 446 75 1 521 15 255 10.0 93 979 162 Bahamas 155 ... 2 138 ... 79 411 ... 296 110 ... Barbados 251 6 317 970 7 538 ... ... 268 106 281 Belize 56 ... 444 ... 66 336 ... 229 796 ... Bermuda 2 1 942 967 2 911 9 525 30.6 63 568 458 British Virgin 10 - 127 137 4 268 3.2 20 263 68 Islands Cayman Islands 3 196 ... ... ... ... 35 739 ... Dominica 56 - 269 325 19 170 1.7 70 770 46 Grenada 64 ... 219 ... ... ... 93 065 ... Guyana 57 ... 562 ... 173 702 ... 849 559 . .. Haiti 1 ... 1 567 ... ... ... 7 952 408 ... Jamaica 388 21 217 3 560 25 165 ... ... 2 538 284 99 Montserrat 24 ... ... ... 664 ... 10 678 ... Netherlands - 2 320 345 2 665 40 824 6.5 212 694 125 Antilles St Kitts and Nevis 82 - 143 225 11 690 1.9 39 044 58 St Lucia 216 3 881 379 4 476 ... ... 150 232 298 St Vincent and the 117 ... 181 ... ... ... 112 374 ... Grenadines Suriname 8 3 000* 1 056 4 064 98 591 4.1 413 786 98 Trinidad and 301 6 860 3 011 10 172 287 215 3.5 1 282 897 79 Tobago Turks and Caicos 20 27 48 95 2 936 3.2 15 623 61 Islands Total** 1 906 75 100 16 550 93 556 4 018 300 2.3 14 823 921 63 Source: UNESCO Statistics and Indicators on Education, 1998/90 , The Caribbean and Latin America - ‘Good Neighbours: Caribbean Students at the Tertiary Level of Education’, 2001 ** Totals include UIS estimates when data are not available. * National estimates. 207 Table 3 - CARIBBEAN TERTIARY STUDENTS STUDYING IN OTHER CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES, 1998 Country of study Cayman Trinidad and Total Country of origin Barbados Islands Jamaica Tobago Total (%) Anguilla 9 - 3 - 12 0.6 Antigua and Barbuda 42 - 23 18 83 4.2 Aruba - - - - - - Bahamas 24 - 74 57 155 7.9 Barbados 3 106 142 251 12.7 Belize 10 - 34 12 56 2.8 Bermuda - - - 2 2 0.1 British Virgin Islands 7 - 2 1 10 0.5 Cayman Islands - 3 - 3 0.2 Dominica 24 - 9 23 56 2.8 Grenada 25 - 7 32 64 3.3 Guyana 17 3 18 19 57 2.9 Haiti - - - 1 1 0.1 Jamaica 120 21 247 388 19.7 Montserrat 14 - 8 2 24 1.2 Netherlands Antilles - - - - - - St Kitts and Nevis 38 - 40 4 82 4.2 St Lucia 63 - 46 107 216 11.0 St Vincent and the 43 - 33 41 117 5.9 Grenadines Suriname - - - 8 8 0.4 Trinidad and Tobago 152 1 148 301 15.3 Turks and Caicos Islands 6 - 12 2 20 1.0 Unspecified 4 - 57 2 63 3.2 Total Caribbean 598 28 623 720 1969 100.00 students in other Caribbean countries Source: UNESCO Statistics and Indicators on Education, 1998/90 , The Caribbean and Latin America - ‘Good Neighbours: Caribbean Students at the Tertiary Level of Education’, 2001 208 Table 4 - CARIBBEAN TERTIARY STUDENTS STUDYING IN OECD COUNTRIES BY COUNTRY OF ORIGIN, 1998 Antigua and - 34 - - - - - - 1 - - 49 221 - 305 1.9 Barbuda Aruba - 2 - - - - - - - - - - 73 - 75 0.5 Bahamas - 171 1 2 1 - - - 2 - - 157 1802 2 2138 13.1 Barbados 1 107 2 3 - - 2 1 1 3 - 289 560 1 970 5.9 Belize - 13 1 24 1 1 - 1 1 - - 30 370 2 444 2.7 Bermuda - 237 - - - - - 1 - - - 217 512 - 967 5.9 British Virgin - 8 - - 1 - - - - - - 37 81 - 127 0.8 Islands Dominica 1 25 14 6 - 7 - - 2 1 1 43 168 1 269 1.6 Grenada - 16 3 1 - - - - 1 1 - 34 163 - 219 1.3 Guyana 2 30 13 4 - - 5 - 2 - - 82 423 1 562 3.4 Haiti 45 127 464 29 - - - - 6 1 22 9 862 2 1567 9.6 Jamaica 5 121 8 7 - 3 1 1 2 - 2 544 2859 7 3560 21.8 Netherlands 2 1 - - 1 - 2 1 - - - - 338 - 345 2.1 Antilles St Kitts and Nevis - 17 - - - - - - - - - 24 102 - 143 0.9 St Lucia - 65 10 1 - - - 1 - 2 1 145 154 - 379 2.3 St Vincent and the - 15 2 - - - - 1 - - - 41 122 - 181 1.1 Grenadines Suriname 23 - 9 1 - - 901 1 - - - 3 114 4 1056 6.5 Trinidad and 1 293 19 12 21 2 2 7 2 2 - 509 2138 3 3011 18.4 Tobago Turks and Caicos - 2 - - - - - - - - - 11 35 - 48 0.3 Islands Caribbean1 80 1284 546 90 25 13 913 15 20 10 26 2224 11097 23 16366 100.0 students in OECD countries Total (%) 0.5 7.8 3.3 0.5 0.2 0.1 5.6 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 13.6 67.8 0.1 100.0 209 ISCED 5A and ISCED 6 only Source: UNESCO Statistics and Indicators on Education, 1998/90 , The Caribbean and Latin America - ‘Good Neighbours: Caribbean Students at the Tertiary Level of Education’, 2001 210 Canada France Germany Ireland Japan Netherlands New Zealand Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom United States Other OECD Total Total (%) Table 5 - CARIBBEAN TERTIARY STUDENTS IN OECD COUNTRIES BY COUNTRY OF ORIGIN AND BY LEVEL OF STUDY, 1998 Country of Origin Numbers enrolled Percentage Total ISCED 5B ISCED 5A/6 ISCED 5B ISCED 5A/6 Antigua and Barbuda 50 1 49 2 98 Bahamas 164 13 151 8 92 Barbados 303 22 281 7 93 Belize 59 - 59 - 100 Bermuda 218 8 210 4 96 British Virgin Islands 36 7 29 19 81 Dominica 75 8 67 11 89 Grenada 40 4 36 10 90 Guyana 108 9 99 8 92 Haiti 578 30 548 5 95 Jamaica 581 47 534 8 92 Netherlands Antilles 5 1 4 20 80 St Kitts and Nevis 24 3 21 13 87 St Lucia 160 11 149 7 93 St Vincent and the 44 2 42 5 95 Grenadines Suriname 942 10 932 1 99 Trinidad and Tobago 559 144 415 26 74 Turks and Caicos 11 - 11 - 100 Islands Total 3957 320 3637 8 92 Note: Not all OECD Countries provided the enrolment counts by level of education Source: UNESCO Statistics and Indicators on Education, 1998/90 , The Caribbean and Latin America - ‘Good Neighbours: Caribbean Students at the Tertiary Level of Education’ , 2001. 211 TABLE 6 - CARIBBEAN TERTIARY STUDENTS IN CANADA BY LEVEL OF STUDY AND GENDER, 1990 AND 1998 1990 1998 Graduate Under- Career Total Graduate Under- Career Total graduate Technical graduate technical Total 247 1486 289 2022 212 1249 414 1875 Females 90 821 147 1058 109 769 244 1122 Males 157 665 142 964 103 480 170 753 Males in % 64 45 49 48 49 38 41 40 om the Caribbean Source: UNESCO Statistics and Indicators on Education, 1998/90 , The Caribbean and Latin America - ‘Good Neighbours: Caribbean Students at the Tertiary Level of Education’, 2001 212 TABLE 7 - STUDENTS FROM THE ENGLISH-SPEAKING CARIBBEAN ENROLLED IN HIGHER EDUCATION INSTITUTIONS IN THE UNITED STATES: 2000/2001 Country of Origin Undergraduate Postgraduate Other Total Anguilla 62 1 0 63 Antigua 224 51 12 287 The Bahamas 1,525 239 38 1,902 Barbados 521 157 23 701 Belize 317 139 8 464 British Virgin Islands 77 5 1 83 Cayman Islands 232 17 0 249 Dominica 195 54 7 256 Grenada 229 59 4 292 Jamaica 2,963 650 149 3,762 Montserrat 15 3 0 18 St. Kitts/Nevis 164 27 5 196 St. Lucia 199 28 4 231 St. Vincent 184 21 4 209 Trinidad and Tobago 2,235 457 70 2,762 Turks and Caicos Islands 77 17 0 94 All Contributing 9,319 1,925 325 11,569 Countries Source: Institute of International Education/UWI Strategic Plan 2002/UWI Strategic Plan (Data) 213 TABLE 8 - CARIBBEAN STUDENTS IN BRITAIN (1999/00) Country Total # # ug # pg taught # pg (research) students Jamaica 580 139 353 41 Trinidad and Tobago 465 164 122 46 Barbados 290 109 147 27 St. Lucia 153 69 70 9 Bahamas 143 77 49 10 Cayman Islands 95 67 24 4 Guyana 78 22 38 15 Antigua and Barbuda 53 30 21 1 Montserrat 47 28 9 3 St. Vincent and the Grenadines 46 18 23 2 Dominica 39 18 171 St. Kitss and Nevis 32 9 17 3 Belize 28 9 15 2 Grenada 28 9 13 3 British Virgin Islands 27 17 6 3 Anguilla 19 8 9 1 Turks and Caicos Islands 17 10 4 2 Cuba 15 3 5 5 Other West Indies/Leeward/ 82 20 44 6 Windward Isles Totals 2,237 826 986 184 Source: HESA Student Return December 1999/Higher Education Statistics Agency Limited, 1999 Reproduced by permission of the Higher Education Statistics Agency Limited 214 TABLE 9 - NUMBER OF FOREIGN STUDENTS IN THE CARIBBEAN, 1998 Country of study Region of Origin Barbados Cayman Jamaica Trinidad Total Islands and Tobago Africa - - - 19 19 Asia - 1 - 123 124 Europe - 8 - 56 64 Oceania - 1 - - 1 Caribbean 598 28 623 720 1969 Other North and South America - 11 - 86 97 Total 598 49 623 1004 2274 Total minus the Caribbean students - 21 - 284 305 Source: UNESCO Statistics and Indicators on Education, 1998/90 , The Caribbean and Latin America - ‘Good Neighbours: Caribbean Students at the Tertiary Level of Education’ 215 TABLE 10 - TERTIARY STUDENTS COMING TO THE CARIBBEAN BY COUNTRY OF ORIGIN, 1998 Country of study Country of origin Cayman Islands Trinidad and Tobago Total Africa - 19 19 Nigeria - 10 10 Rest of Africa - 9 9 North America 10 84 94 Canada 5 37 42 United States 3 45 48 Rest of North America 2 2 4 South America 1 2 3 Asia 1 123 124 India - 19 19 Malaysia - 86 86 Sri Lanka - 12 12 Rest of Asia 1 6 7 Europe 8 56 64 United Kingdom 7 53 60 Rest of Europe 1 3 4 Oceania 1 - 1 Total 21 284 305 Source: UNESCO Statistics and Indicators on Education, 1998/90 , The Caribbean and Latin America - ‘Good Neighbours: Caribbean Students at the Tertiary Level of Education’, 2001. 216 TABLE 11 - REGIONAL OUTPUT OF SECONDARY SCHOOL GRADUATES SATISFYING UWI’S LOWER LEVEL MATRICULATION, 2000 EXAMINATIONS (School Candidates Only) Country Number of Number of Number of Success Rate Ratio of Candidates Candidates Candidates Candidates among Obtaining 5 or Sitting CXC Sitting 5 or more Obtaining 5 or Candidates more passes to General subjects more CXC passes Sitting 5 or more Total Candidates Proficiency at a single sitting subjects (%) (%) Exams Barbados 2,865 1,296 812 62.7 28.3 Jamaica 24,417 10,803 5,021 46.5 20.6 Trinidad and Tobago 22,499 12,414 6,040 48.7 26.8 Sub-total, Campus Countries 49,781 25,513 11,873 48.4 23.9 Antigua 518 442 280 63.3 54.1 Belize 850 456 273 59.9 32.1 Dominica 452 413 305 73.8 67.5 Grenada 1,327 833 449 53.9 33.8 St. Kitts 363 227 174 76.7 47.9 St. Lucia 1,167 1,020 696 68.2 59.6 St. Vincent 719 521 354 67.9 49.2 Other Contributing Countries 386 197 128 65.0 33.2 Sub-Total, NCCs 5,782 4,109 2,659 64.7 46.0 Regional Total 55,563 28,622 14,532 50.8 26.2 Source: Compiled from CXC Examinations Statistics/UWI Strategic Plan 2002-2006 Note: Lower-level Matriculation is defined as passes in five subjects at CXC General Proficiency or GCE ‘O’ Level (including English Language); prior to 1998 only CXC Grades I or II qualified, since 1998 Grade III is accepted. 217 TABLE 12 - REGIONAL OUTPUT OF SECONDARY SCHOOL GRADUATES ACHIEVING 2 OR MORE PASSES AT ONE SITTING CAMBRIDGE GCE ADVANCED LEVEL EXAMINATIONS Country 1995 EXAMINATIONS 2000 EXAMINATIONS Candidates Sitting Candidates Obtaining Candidates Sitting Candidates Obtaining Examinations Passing Grades in at Examinations Passing Grades in at least 2 subjects least 2 subjects Barbados 625 566 547 283 Jamaica 4,288 1,324 4,527 1,340 Trinidad and Tobago 2,455 2,065 3,772 2,730 Sub-Total, Campus 7,368 3,955 8,846 4,353 Countries Antigua/Barbuda 284 55 313 49 Belize 286 71 120 23 Dominica 199 99 187 97 Grenada 336 107 479 137 St. Kitts/Nevis 197 78 322 75 St. Lucia 241 154 345 225 St. Vincent 198 88 413 115 Other Contributing 32 25 8 0 Countries Sub-Total, NCCs 1,773 677 2,187 721 Regional Total 9,141 4,632 11,033 5074 Source: UWI Strategic Plan 2002-2006 218 TABLE 13 - CURRENT DEMAND AND SUPPLY FOR UNDERGRADUATE PLACES AT UWI: HIGH- LEVEL GAP ANALYSIS FACULTY Cave Hill Mona ⊥ St. Augustine UWI Humanities and Education Qualified Applicants 349 1,764 988 3,101 Total Offers 283 1,182 580 2,045 Offers Accepted 228 845 378 1,451 Law Qualified Applicants 1,023 --- --- 1,023 Total Offers 320 --- --- 320 Offers Accepted 249 --- --- 249 Medical Sciences Qualified Applicants --- 539 485 1,024 Total Offers --- 144 211 355 Offers Accepted --- 107 172 279 Pure and Applied Sciences Qualified Applicants 511 861 751 2,123 Total Offers 411 674 424 1,509 Offers Accepted 311 328 329 968 Engineering Qualified Applicants --- --- 972 972 Total Offers --- ---- 283 283 Offers Accepted --- --- 271 271 Social Sciences Qualified Applicants 1,099 2,195 1,144 4,438 Total Offers 616 956 791 2,363 Offers Accepted 483 873 444 1,800 All Programmes Qualified Applicants 2,982 5,359 4,340 12,681 Total Offers 1,630 2,956 2,289 6,875 Offers Accepted 1,271 2,153 1,594 5,018 Source: UWI Strategic Plan 2002-2006 219 TABLE 14 - SCENARIO II (HIGH GROWTH) ENROLMENT PROJECTIONS CAMPUS/ENROLMENT STATUS ACTUAL ENROLMENT PROJECTED ENROLMENT 2000/2001 Change Average Annual Cumulative 2006/2007 1995/96- Annual Growth Increase Enrolment 2000/01 Growth Rate Level Rate CAVE HILL Full-Time Undergraduate Enrolment 1,963 195 2.1 5.0 542 2,505 Part-Time Undergraduate Enrolment 1,239 186 3.3 5.0 342 1,581 Total Undergraduate Enrolment 3,202 381 2.6 5.0 885 4,087 Full-Time Postgraduate Enrolment 321 216 25.0 12.0 245 566 Part-Time Postgraduate Enrolment 193 23 2.6 5.0 53 246 Total Postgraduate Enrolment 514 239 13.3 9.6 298 812 Total On-Campus Enrolment 3,716 620 3.7 5.7 1,1183 4,899 Total On-Campus FTE Enrolment 3,000 516 3.8 5.8 985 3,985 MONA Full-Time Undergraduate Enrolment 4,695 287 1.3 3.6 907 5,602 Part-Time Undergraduate Enrolment 2,115 431 4.7 3.0 338 2,453 Total Undergraduate Enrolment 6,810 718 2.3 3.4 1,245 8,055 Full-Time Postgraduate Enrolment 776 286 9.6 7.5 340 1,116 Part-Time Postgraduate Enrolment 1,091 57 1.1 2.1 119 1,210 Total Postgraduate Enrolment 1,867 343 4.1 4.5 459 2,326 Total On-Campus Enrolment 8,677 1,061 2.6 3.7 1,704 10,381 Total On-Campus FTE Enrolment 7,074 817 2.5 3.9 1,475 8,549 ST. AUGUSTINE Full-Time Undergraduate Enrolment 4,264 810 4.3 12.3 3,336 7,600 Part-Time Undergraduate Enrolment 637 241 10.0 8.0 299 936 Total Undergraduate Enrolment 4,901 1,051 4.9 11.7 3,635 8,536 Full-Time Postgraduate Enrolment 365 205 17.9 15.1 371 736 Part-Time Postgraduate Enrolment 1,277 391 7.6 10.0 780 2,057 Total Postgraduate Enrolment 1,642 596 9.4 11.2 1,151 2,793 Total On-Campus Enrolment 6,543 1,647 6.0 11.6 4,78 11,329 Total On-Campus FTE Enrolment 5,586 1,331 5.6 12.0 4,246 9,832 TOTAL UNIVERSITY Full-Time Undergraduate Enrolment 10,992 1,292 2.5 7.5 4,785 15,707 Part-Time Undergraduate Enrolment 3,991 858 5.0 4.5 980 4,971 Total Undergraduate Enrolment 14,913 2,150 3.2 6.8 5,765 20,678 Full-Time Postgraduate Enrolment 1,462 707 14.1 10.6 956 2,418 Part-Time Postgraduate Enrolment 2,561 471 7.2 6.5 952 3,513 Total Postgraduate Enrolment 4,023 1,178 ? 8.1 1,908 5,931 Total On-Campus Enrolment 18,936 3,328 ? 7.0 7,673 26,609 Total On-Campus FTE Enrolment 15,660 2,664 ? 7.4 ,707 22,367 Source: UWI Strategic Plan 2002-2006 220 TABLE 15 - HIGH-GROWTH ENROLMENT PROJECTIONS FACULTY-LEVEL DISTRIBUTIONS FULL-TIME EQUIVALENT (FTE) BASIS CAMPUS/FACULTY ACTUAL ENROLMENT PROJECTED ENROLMENT 2000/20 Change Average Annual Cumulative 2006/2007 Enrolment Level 01 1995/96- Annual Growth Growth Rate 2000/01 Growth Rate Rate CAVE HILL Humanities and Education 615 113 159 774 Law 345 -28 50 395 Medical Sciences 77 8 30 107 Science and Technology 782 241 464 1,246 Social Sciences 1,182 183 282 1,464 Total On-Campus 3,000 516 3.8 5.8 985 3,985 Enrolment MONA Humanities and Education 2,012 306 201 2,213 Law 55 17 6 61 Medical Sciences 743 10 105 848 Science and Technology 1,266 -164 653 1,919 Social Sciences 2,954 605 496 3,450 Total On-Campus 7,030 773 2.4 3.8 1,460 8,490 Enrolment ST. AUGUSTINE Humanities and Education 1,023 350 5.6 12.0 577 1,600 Law 1,175 287 1,110 2,284 Medical Sciences 37 5 17 54 Pure and Applied Sciences 900 216 551 1,451 Science and Technology 1,120 60 1,024 2,144 Social Sciences 1,333 414 967 2,299 Total On-Campus 5,586 1,331 4,246 9,832 Enrolment TOTAL UNIVERSITY Humanities and Education 3,650 769 937 4,587 Law 1,175 287 1,110 2,284 Medical Sciences 436 1 73 509 Science and Technology 1,719 233 686 2,405 Social Sciences 3,168 136 2,141 5,308 5,469 1,201 1,745 7,213 15,615 2,620 3.8 7.4 6,692 22,307 Total On-Campus Enrolment Source: UWI Strategic Plan 2002-2006 221 TABLE 16 - COMPARATIVE STUDENT REGISTRATIONS AT ON- AND OFF CAMPUS LOCATIONS IN 1999/2000 AND 2000/01 Student Registration 1999/ % 2000/ % Number % change 2000 of total 2001 of total change On-Campus Cave Hill 3995 20.1 3938 19.9 -57 -1.4 Mona 9073 45.6 8854 44.7 -219 -2.4 St. Augustine 6839 34.4 6995 35.4 156 2.3 Total On-Campus 19907 100.0 19787 100.0 -120 -0.6 Off-Campus Distance Education 2066 58.8 2395 60.3 329 15.9 Programmes Tertiary Level Institutions 1250 35.6 1364 34.3 114 9.1 Affiliated Institutions 200 5.7 216 5.4 16 8.0 Total Off-Campus 3516 100.0 3975 100.0 459 13.1 GRAND TOTAL 23423 - 23762 - 339 1.4 Source - UWI Vice Chancellor’s Report to Council 2000/2001 222 TABLE 17: Comparison of FTE* Enrollment between 1999/2000 and 2000/01 CAMPUS & FACULTY/SCHOOL 1999/2000 2000/01 Number % change change CAVE HILL Humanities 502 522 20 4 Education 96 94 -2 -2 Law 337 347 10 3 Clinical Medicine & Research 88 77 -11 -13 Science & Technology 755 782 27 4 Social Sciences 1326 1385 59 4 TOTAL 3104 3207 103 3 MONA Arts 1430 1509 79 6 Education 598 597 -1 0 Law 54 56 2 4 Medical Sciences 800 810 10 1 Pure & Applied Sciences 1339 1284 -55 -4 Social Sciences 3223 2975 -248 -8 TOTAL 7444 7231 -213 -3 ST. AUGUSTINE Agriculture 295 233 -62 -21 Humanities 761 787 26 3 Education 378 393 15 4 Engineering 1152 1165 13 1 Law 43 37 -6 -14 Medical Sciences 937 933 -4 0 Natural Sciences 883 894 11 1 Social Sciences 1291 1429 138 11 TOTAL 5740 5871 131 2 UNIVERSITY Agriculture 295 233 -62 -21 223 Arts/Humanities 2693 2818 125 5 Education 1072 1084 12 1 Engineering 1152 1165 13 1 Law 434 440 6 1 Medical Sciences/Clinical Medicine and 1825 1820 -5 0 Research Natural Sciences/Pure & Applied 2977 2960 -17 -1 Sciences/Science & Technology Social Sciences 5840 5789 -51 -1 TOTAL 16288 16309 21 0 * For the purpose of computing FTE, 2 part-time students are counted as one FTE. No weighting is given for postgraduate students. It should be noted that these FTE figures are only computed for on-campus students. 224 TABLE 18 - ACTUAL FTE ENROLLMENT BY CAMPUS AND FACULTY/SCHOOL, 2000/01 FACULTY/SCHOOL CAVE MONA ST. AUG. TOTAL HILL Agriculture 0 0 233 233 Arts/Humanities 522 1509 787 2818 Education 94 597 393 1084 Engineering 0 0 1165 1165 Law 347 56 37 440 Medical Sciences/Clinical 77 810 933 1820 Medicine & Research Natural Sciences/Pure & 782 1284 894 2960 Applied Sciences/Science & Social Sciences 1385 2975 1429 5789 TOTAL 3207 7231 5871 16309 Science & Technology % 27 29 55 38 Note: The Science and Technology group includes the faculties of Agriculture and Natural Sciences, Science and Technology, Pure and Applied Sciences, Engineering, Medical Sciences and the School of Clinical Medicine and Research. Source - UWI Vice Chancellor’s Report to Council 2000/2001 225 TABLE 19: FTE ENROLLMENT BY CAMPUS, STUDENT STATUS AND PROGRAMME - 2000/01 UNIVERSITY CAVE HILL MONA ST. AUGUSTINE T M F T M F T M F T M F ON-CAMPUS Undergraduate 1st Degree 12,397 4,471 8,466 2,585 846 1,739 5,725 1,677 4,048 4,627 1,948 2,679 Certificate 223 71 152 0 0 0 20 2 18 203 69 134 Diplomas 327 90 237 203 60 143 110 26 84 14 4 10 Sub-Total 13,487 4,632 8,855 2,788 906 1,882 5,855 1,705 4,150 4,844 2,021 2,823 Graduate Higher Diplomas 108 35 73 0 0 0 0 0 0 108 35 73 Higher Degree 2,645 1,039 1,606 419 164 255 1,325 474 851 901 401 500 Sub-Total 2,753 1,074 1,679 419 164 255 1,325 474 851 1,009 436 573 Specially Admitted 69 20 49 0 0 0 51 15 36 18 5 13 TOTAL 16,309 5,726 10,583 3,207 1,070 2,137 7,231 2,194 5,037 5,871 2,462 3,409 Postgraduate Degree % 16 18 15 13 15 12 18 22 17 15 16 15 Source - UWI Vice Chancellor’s Report to Council 2000/2001 226 TABLE 20: UNIVERSITY ENROLLMENT BY CAMPUS, STUDENT STATUS AND PROGRAMME - 2000/01 UNIVERSITY CAVE HILL MONA T M F T M F T M F TOTAL ENROLLMENT 23,928 7,978 15,950 5,297 1,614 3,683 10,951 3,198 7,753 ON CAMPUS 19,787 6,895 12,892 3,938 1,334 2,604 8,854 2,668 6,186 Full-time 12,768 4,526 8,242 2,466 802 1,664 5,585 1,709 3,876 Part-time 7,019 2,369 4,650 1,472 532 940 3,269 959 2,310 OFF CAMPUS 4,141 1,083 3,058 1,359 280 1,079 2,097 530 1,567 Full-time - - - - - - - - - Part-time - - - - - - - - - ON-CAMPUS Undergraduate 1st Degree 14,892 5,054 9,838 3,202 1,065 2,137 6,748 1,959 4,789 Certificate 381 130 251 0 0 0 20 2 18 Diplomas 368 101 267 222 67 155 123 29 94 Sub-Total 15,641 5,285 10,356 3,424 1,132 2,292 6,891 1,990 4,901 Graduate Higher Diplomas 181 61 120 0 0 0 0 0 0 Higher Degree 3,840 1,515 2,325 514 202 312 1,867 651 1,216 Sub-Total 4,021 1,576 2,445 514 202 312 1,867 651 1,216 Specially Admitted 125 34 91 0 0 0 96 27 69 TOTAL 19,787 6,895 12,892 3,938 1,334 2,604 8,854 2,668 6,186 Source - UWI Vice Chancellor’s Report to Council 2000/2001 228 TABLE 21: PERCENTAGE DISTRIBUTION OF MALE AND FEMALE REGISTRATIONS IN ON-CAMPUS FIRST DEGREE PROGRAMMES BY FACULTY/SCHOOL AND CAMPUS - 2000/01 FACULTY/SCHOOL CAVE HILL MONA ST AUGUSTINE M F M F M AGRICULTURE - - - - 36.2 63.8 ARTS/HUMANITIES 23.5 76.5 19.2 80.8 16.1 83.9 EDUCATION 14.3 85.7 17.8 82.2 21.3 78.7 ENGINEERING - - - - 77.3 22.7 LAW 22.5 77.5 18.2 81.8 16.2 83.8 MEDICAL SCIENCES/CLINICAL MEDICINE & RESEARCH 37.0 63.0 39.1 60.9 48.1 51.9 NATURAL SCIENCES/ PURE & APPLIED SCIENCES /SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY 53.4 46.6 47.4 52.6 41.5 58.5 SOCIAL SCIENCES 28.9 71.1 27.5 72.5 28.5 71.5 Source - UWI Vice Chancellor’s Report to Council 2000/2001 TABLE 22: ON-AND OFF-CAMPUS STUDENT REGISTRATIONS BY PROGRAMME AND CAMPUS - 2000/01 PROGRAMME UNIVERSITY CAVE HILL MONA ST. AUGUSTINE LEVEL M F T M F T M F T M F T ON CAMPUS Undergraduate 5,054 9,838 14,892 1,065 2,137 3,202 1,959 4,789 6,748 2,030 2,912 4,942 Certificates 130 251 381 0 0 0 2 18 20 128 233 361 Diplomas 101 267 368 67 155 222 29 94 123 5 18 23 Advanced Diplomas 61 120 181 0 0 0 0 0 0 61 120 181 Higher Degrees 1,515 2,325 3,840 202 312 514 651 1,216 1,867 662 797 1,459 Specially Admitted 34 91 125 0 0 0 27 69 96 7 22 29 TOTAL 6,895 12,892 19,787 1,334 2,604 3,938 2,668 6,186 8,854 2,893 4,102 6,995 OFF CAMPUS Distance Education Programmes 581 1,814 2,395 255 1,006 1,261 212 577 789 114 231 345 Aff. Inst. 101 115 216 0 0 0 67 44 111 34 71 105 Tert. Level 297 1,067 1,364 25 73 98 251 946 1,197 21 48 69 External 104 62 166 0 0 0 0 0 0 104 62 166 SUB-TOTAL 1,083 3,058 4,141 280 1,079 1,359 530 1,567 2,097 273 412 685 TOTAL 7,978 15,950 23,928 1,614 3,683 5,297 3,198 7,753 10,951 3,166 4,514 7,680 REGISTRATION Source - UWI Vice Chancellor’s Report to Council 2000/2001 TABLE 23: Comparison of On-Campus Student Enrollment between 1999/2000 and 2000/01 CAMPUS & FACULTY/SCHOOL 1999/2000 2000/01 % change CAVE HILL Humanities 715 755 5.59 Education 131 135 3.05 Law 339 347 2.36 Clinical Medicine & Research 88 77 -12.50 Science & Technology 856 890 3.97 Social Sciences 1866 1734 -7.07 TOTAL 3995 3938 -1.43 MONA Arts 1731 1862 7.57 Education 704 704 0.00 Law 54 56 3.70 Medical Sciences 841 852 1.31 Pure & Applied Sciences 1482 1443 -2.63 Social Sciences 4261 3937 -7.60 TOTAL 9073 8854 -2.41 ST. AUGUSTINE Agriculture 355 295 -16.90 Humanities 950 992 4.42 Education 589 596 1.19 Engineering 1313 1329 1.22 Law 43 37 -13.95 Medical Sciences 956 954 -0.21 Natural Sciences 992 994 0.20 Social Sciences 1641 1798 9.57 TOTAL 6839 6995 2.28 UNIVERSITY Agriculture 355 295 -16.90 Arts/Humanities 3396 3609 6.27 Education 1424 1435 0.77 Engineering 1313 1329 1.22 Law 436 440 0.92 Medical Sciences/Clinical Medicine and 1885 1883 -0.11 Research Natural Sciences/Pure & Applied 3330 3327 -0.09 Sciences/Science & Technology Social Sciences 7768 7469 -3.85 TOTAL 19907 19787 -0.60 Source - UWI Vice Chancellor’s Report to Council 2000/2001 TABLE 24: TOTAL ON-CAMPUS REGISTRATION OF STUDENTS BY FACULTY/SCHOOL AND COUNTRY OF ORIGIN - 2000/01 F A C U L T Y / S C H O O L TERRITORY AGRICUL- ARTS/ EDUCA- ENGINEER- LAW MEDICAL NATURAL SOCIAL TOTAL % TURE HUM TION ING SCIENCES/ SCIENCES/ SCIENCES ANITI CLINICAL PURE & ES MEDICINE APPLIED SCIENCES/ SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY ANGUILLA 1 1 0 2 1 1 0 3 9 0.05 ANTIGUA 3 17 0 3 6 15 17 65 126 0.64 BAHAMAS 1 11 2 0 22 98 25 15 174 0.88 BARBADOS 10 707 105 59 54 175 810 1,396 3,316 16.78 BELIZE 2 3 4 5 14 13 5 39 85 0.43 BRITISH VIRGIN 0 0 2 0 7 4 1 6 20 0.10 ISLANDS CAYMAN 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 2 0.01 ISLANDS DOMINICA 3 3 2 1 9 13 6 50 87 0.44 GRENADA 2 8 2 4 10 7 11 38 82 0.42 GUYANA 4 4 1 4 3 12 8 24 60 0.30 JAMAICA 37 1,793 692 131 144 661 1,337 3,776 8,571 43.38 MONTSERRAT 1 4 4 0 1 4 4 4 22 0.11 ST. KITTS/NEVIS 3 9 6 0 11 14 12 49 104 0.53 ST. LUCIA 5 33 8 11 14 19 19 129 238 1.20 ST. VINCENT 9 30 6 11 9 14 16 69 164 0.83 TRINIDAD & 210 948 593 1,089 123 574 1,034 1,736 6,307 31.92 TOBAGO TURKS & 0 3 0 0 1 5 3 2 14 0.07 CAICOS OTHER 4 22 6 6 11 254 17 57 377 1.91 ALL 295 3,596 1,433 1,326 440 1,884 3,325 7,459 19,758 100.00 COUNTRIES Source - UWI Vice Chancellor’s Report to Council 2000/2001 TABLE 25: NUMBER OF OECS STUDENTS AS A PERCENTAGE OF TOTAL ON-CAMPUS STUDENT POPULATION BY CAMPUS, 1995 - 2000 1995- Total % 1996- Total % 1997- Total % 1998- Total % 1999- Total % 2000- Total % 96 Students 97 Students 98 Students 99 Students 2000 Stud 01 Stude ents nts CAVE HILL 317 1.9 317 1.8 229 1.2 381 2.0 546 2.7 413 2.1 16,573 17,482 18,864 19,282 19,92 19,758 6 MONA 310 1.9 262 1.5 236 1.2 181 0.9 195 1.0 156 0.8 ST 143 0.9 179 1.0 218 1.1 227 1.1 259 1.3 254 1.3 AUGUSTIN E TOTAL 770 4.7 758 4.3 683 3.5 789 4.0 1,000 5.0 823 4.2 NOTE: The Organization of Eastern Caribbean States (OECS) is comprised of the following countries, Antigua, Dominica, Grenada, Montserrat, St. Kitts/Nevis, St. Lucia and St. Vincent. With the exception of 1998/99, the figures for the previous years’ enrollment were updated with more recent information from the University of the West Indies - Official Statistics Booklets (various years). Source: UWI Vice Chancellor’s Report to Council 2000/2001 TABLE 26: TOTAL ON-CAMPUS ENROLLMENT BY CAMPUS AND COUNTRY OF ORIGIN - 2000/01 TERRITORY UNIVERSITY CAVE HILL MONA ST. AUGUSTINE T M F T M F T M F T M F ANGUILLA 9 5 4 3 0 3 3 2 1 3 3 0 ANTIGUA 126 55 71 93 35 58 22 11 11 11 9 2 BAHAMAS 174 55 119 30 6 24 79 24 55 65 25 40 BARBADOS 3,316 1,174 2,142 3,074 1,067 2,007 108 38 70 134 69 65 BELIZE 85 32 53 40 15 25 35 10 25 10 7 3 BRITISH VIRGIN ISLANDS 20 7 13 15 3 12 4 4 0 1 0 1 CAYMAN ISLANDS 2 0 2 0 0 0 2 0 2 0 0 0 DOMINICA 87 26 61 50 12 38 19 7 12 18 7 11 GRENADA 82 32 50 47 20 27 9 2 7 26 10 16 GUYANA 60 33 27 20 11 9 18 9 9 22 13 9 JAMAICA 8,571 2,626 5,945 123 23 100 8,222 2,452 5,770 226 151 75 MONTSERRAT 22 9 13 12 6 6 7 2 5 3 1 2 ST KITTS/NEVIS 104 48 56 67 31 36 22 11 11 15 6 9 ST LUCIA 238 73 165 76 26 50 38 8 30 124 39 85 ST VINCENT 164 68 96 68 21 47 39 16 23 57 31 26 TRINIDAD AND TOBAGO 6,307 2,423 3,884 182 39 143 144 32 112 5,981 2,352 3,629 TURKS AND CAICOS 14 7 7 5 3 2 9 4 5 0 0 0 OTHER 377 214 163 33 15 18 74 36 38 270 163 107 ALL COUNTRIES 19,758 6,887 12,871 3,938 1,333 2,605 8,854 2,668 6,186 6,966 2,886 4,080 Source - UWI Vice Chancellor’s Report to Council 2000/2001 Table 27 – Environment for Technician Courses in Technical Schools in Trinidad and Tobago, by Course, Year and Sex, 1996/97 Total Year I Year 2 Year 3 Course Both M F M F M F M F Sexes ΧTotal 2618 1743 875 821 480 601 333 321 62 ΧFull-Time 1250 802 448 396 240 295 181 111 27 ΧPart-Time 1368 941 427 425 240 306 152 210 35 COMMERCIAL ΧAccountinga 75 11......... 64 10 48 1 16 0 0 ΧAccountingb 34 9........... 25 5 17 4 8 0 0 ΧAccounting Managmentb 76 19......... 57 15 40 4 17 0 0 ΧBusiness Managementa 102 37......... 65 18 34 19 31 0 0 ΧBusiness Managementb 121 37......... 84 14 34 14 32 9 18 ΧExecutive Secretarya 104 3......... 101 3 62 0 39 0 0 ΧExecutive Secretaryb 25 0........... 25 0 14 0 11 0 0 ΧSupervising Managementb 105 50......... 55 26 30 24 25 0 0 TRADE, CRAFT AND INDUSTRIAL ΧAir Conditioning and Refrigerationa 26 25........... 1 25 1 0 0 0 0 ΧGraphic Designa 18 12........... 6 0 0 0 0 12 6 ΧGraphic Designb 16 11........... 5 0 0 11 5 0 0 ΧPrintinga 17 8............. 9 0 0 0 0 8 9 ΧProcess Plant Operatora 22 20........... 2 20 2 0 0 0 0 ΧProcess Plant Operatorb 64 60........... 4 60 4 0 0 0 0 ΧLibrary Studiesb 21 2........... 19 2 19 0 0 0 0 ENGINEERING ΧCivil Engineeringa 37 32 ............ 5 0 0 16 2 16 3 ΧCivil Engineeringb 77 72 ............ 5 13 3 25 1 16 1 ΧElectrical/Electronic Engineeringa 209 197 ........12 108 4 89 8 0 0 ΧElectrical/Electronic Engineeringb 177 165 ........12 52 4 74 6 39 2 ΧConstructiona 89 65 ..........24 24 9 26 8 15 7 ΧConstructionb 127 114 ........13 49 7 22 2 43 4 a 88 78 ..........10 45 3 33 7 0 0 ΧDraughtsmanship 107 87 ..........20 38 7 26 8 23 5 ΧDraughtsmanship 15 15 ............ 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 ΧIndustrial Instrumentationb 254 241 ........13 102 8 79 3 60 2 ΧMechanical Engineringa 231 224 .......... 7 86 2 69 3 69 2 ΧMechanical Engineeringb HOME ECONOMICS ΧDietecicsa 28 2.............26 0 0 2 26 0 0 ΧHome Economicsa 38 3.............35 3 35 0 0 0 0 ΧHome Economicsb 47 1.............46 0 29 1 17 0 0 ΧSciencea 81 20 ..........61 10 31 10 13 0 0 ΧScienceb 76 37 ..........39 17 26 20 13 0 0 TRANSPORT AND COMMUNICATIONS ΧTelecommunicationsa 62 48 ..........14 28 3 20 11 0 0 ΧTelecommunicationsb 49 38 ..........11 15 4 12 4 11 3 Notes: a. Full-time b. Part-time Source: Government of Trinidad and Tobago, 1997/ ILO Caribbean Studies and Working Papers, No. 5, 2000 TABLE 28 - PROGRAMME OFFERINGS AT SAMUEL JACKMAN PRESCOD POLYTECHNIC Agriculture Department Electrical Engineering Department  Agriculture a.Consumer Electronics (radio and television)  Landscaping and Horticulture b.Micro Electronics c.Electrical Installation Mechanical Engineering Department d.Electrical Installation (wiring) (one year)  Maintenance and Repair of Office Equipment e.Home Appliance Servicing Registration  Mechanical Engineering f.Network Technologies  Printing Automotive Engineering Department Human Ecology Department  Autobody Repairs ΧCare of the Elderly  Auto -mechanics ΧCatering  Fishing Vessel Maintenance ΧClothing Craft (level 2) (one year)  Small Engine Repairs ΧClothing Craft (level 2)  Welding ΧCosmetology ΧEsthetics ΧHome Economics Commercial Department  Commercial Studies Building Trades Department Day-Release and Special Course  Architectural Drafting ΧAuto-mechanics  Blocklaying and Concreting ΧBook-Binding  Boat Building ΧCarpentry  Cabinet Making ΧClothing Craft  Carpentry and Joinery (one year) ΧComputer Maintenance  Carpentry and Joinery (one year) ΧElectronics  Plumbing (one year) ΧHome Economics  Shoemaking and Upholstery ΧMasonry  Tourism ΧShoemaking ΧWelding EVENING COURSES ΧAdvanced Cookery ΧMotor Vehicle Diploma ΧApplied Electronics for Technicians ΧMotor Vehicle Engine (level 1) ΧArchitectural Drafting ΧMotor Vehicle Engine (level 2) ΧAutomotive Electrics ΧNetwork Administration ΧBasic Autocad ΧNetwork Cabling ΧBasic Cookery ΧOccupational Health, Safety and Welfare ΧBasic Car Maintenance ΧPattern Design ΧBasic Machine Shop ΧPlant Maintenance ΧBasic Mechanical Maintenance ΧPlumbing ΧBookbinding (level 1) ΧPrinciples of Accounts (advanced) ΧBookbinding (level 2) ΧPrinciples of Accounts (intermediate) ΧBuilding Drawing ΧPrinciples of Business ΧCake and Pastry Making (basic) ΧPrinting and Camera ΧCarpentry and Joinery ΧRefrigeration and Air-conditioning ΧChild Care ΧServicing of Diesel Fuel Injection Equipment ΧComputer Maintenance ΧShorthand (elementary) ΧConstruction Supervisor ΧShorthand (intermediate) ΧConsumer Equipment Servicing ΧShorthand (advanced) ΧCXC English ΧSmall Builders Foremanship ΧCXC Mathematics ΧSmall Business Management (level 1) ΧDressmaking (advanced) ΧSmall Business Management (level 2) ΧDressmaking (basic) ΧSpreadsheets ΧElectrical Installation (part 1) ΧSupervisory Management (intermediate) ΧElectrical Installation (part 2) ΧSupervisory Management (advanced) ΧGents Tailoring (basic) ΧTypewriting (elementary) ΧGents Tailoring (advanced) ΧTypewriting (intermediate) ΧIndustrial Refrigeration ΧTypewriting (advanced) ΧLadies Tailoring (advanced) ΧWelding Operatives ΧLadies Tailoring (basic) ΧWelding Process Experience ΧMasonry ΧWord Processing ΧMessage Therapy Source: ILO Caribbean Studies and Working Papers, No. 5, 2000 TABLE 29 - SAMUEL JACKMAN PRESCOD POLYTECHNIC STATISTICS BASED ON THE PASS AND DROP-OUT RATES FOR CERTIFICATION IN FULL-TIME PROGRAMMES, 1997/98 Courses No. of Students No. of No. of % % No. of % drop- Passes failures passed failed drop-outs outs DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE Agriculture 18 9 5 50 28 4 22 Landscaping 9 3 3 33.3 33.3 3 33.3 Total 27 12 8 44 30 7 26 DEPARTMENT OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERING Autobody Repairs 16 12 4 75 25 - - Auto-mechanics 19 19 - 100 - - - Fishing Vessel 17 7 10 41 59 - - Operations Small Engine Repairs 17 8 6 47 35 3 18 Welding 14 11 2 79 21 1 - Total 83 57 22 69 26 4 5 DEPARTMENT OF BUILDING TRADES Boat Building 5 3 - 60 - 2 40 Building Construction 12 10 - 83 - 2 17 Cabinet Making 14 4 6 28.5 43 4 28.5 Carpentry and Joinery 15 14 - 93 - 1 7 Masonry and Tiling 15 15 - 100 - - - Plumbing (one year) 15 11 4 73 27 - - Plumbing 14 14 - 100 - - - Tourism Craft 17 6 10 35 59 1 6 Total 107 77 20 72 19 10 9 DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCIAL STUDIES Commercial Studies 68 55 9 81 13 4 6 Total 68 55 9 81 13 4 6 DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING Computer Maintenance 43 32 11 74 26 - - Consumer Electronics 15 12 - 93 - 1 7 Electrical Installation (Wiring) 16 11 5 69 31 - - Electrical Installation 18 18 - 100 - - - Micro-Electronics 12 8 4 67 33 - - Total 104 83 20 80 19 1 1 DEPARTMENT OF GENERAL STUDIES Architectural Drafting 25 25 - 100 - - - Total 25 25 - 100 - - - DEPARTMENT OF HUMAN ECOLOGY Courses No. of Students No. of No. of % % No. of % drop- Passes failures passed failed drop-outs outs Care of the Elderly 47 42 - 89 - 5 11 Catering 17 11 5 65 29 1 6 Clothing Craft (level 1) 12 11 - 92 - 1 8 Clothing Craft (level 2) 12 9 - 75 - 3 25 Cosmetology 16 13 1 81 6 2 13 Esthetics 17 14 3 82 18 - - Home Economics 20 17 1 85 5 2 10 Total 141 117 10 85 7 14 10 DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING Maintenance and Repair of Office Equipment 17 8 7 47 41 2 12 Mechanical Engineering 14 12 2 86 14 - - Printing 15 11 3 73 20 1 7 Total 46 31 12 67 26 3 7 Source: ILO Caribbean Studies and Working Papers. No. 5. 2000 TABLE 30: Total Enrolment in Higher Degree Programmes (ending April 30, 2001) – Mona Campus STATUS Fac. Arts & Fac. Medical Fac. Pure & Fac. Social Total Education Sciences Applied Sciences Sciences Full Time 87 249 173 272 781 Part Time 378 61 109 497 1045 Total 465 310 282 769 1826 Source: Campus Coordinators Report, 2001 TABLE 31: Registration in Graduate Programmes – Cave Hill Campus 1997/98 1998/99 1999/2000 2000/2001 % INCREASE Humanities 45 54 70 85 89% School of Education 60 106 117 117 95% Law 47 37 20 18 -62% School of Clinical Medicine and 17 16 17 22 29% Research Science and Technology 60 73 90 92 53% Social Sciences Including EDM 276 246 387 - Excluding EDM 96 95 162 178 85% Total* 325 379 476 512 57% *Excluding EDM EDM is Executive Diploma in Management which was re-graded to an Undergraduate Programme in 1999-2000. Source: Campus Coordinators Report, 2001 TABLE 32: Postgraduate Student Enrolment for Schools/Faculties – St. Augustine Campus for the period 1996/97 to 2000/2001 FACULTY 1996/97 1997/98 1998/99 1999/2000 2000/2001 School of Agriculture 133 125 146 132 126 School of Humanities 74 71 84 108 121 School of Education 131 146 129 219 199 Faculty of Engineering 333 408 396 426 Faculty of Medical Sciences 45 48 48 45 57 School of Natural Sciences 140 168 179 200 197 Faculty of Social Sciences 445 473 470 487 516 TOTAL 1302 1405 1464 1587 1642 Source: Campus Coordinators Report, 2001 TABLE 33: Postgraduate Degree Registrations 2000/2001 – St. Augustine Campus TAUGHT M.PHI FACULTY QUALIFYING PHD PG DIPLOMA TOTAL MASTERS L 78 2 36 10 - 126 School of Humanities 44 2 63 12 - 121 School of Education 66 1 34 14 84 199 Faculty of Engineering 357 7* 50 12 - 426 Faculty of Medical Sciences 27 - 23 6 1 57 School of Natural Sciences 84 7 78 28 - 197 Faculty of Social Sciences 335*** 7 66 16 92 516 TOTAL 991 26 350 98 177 1642 * 1 M Phil ** 166 MBA and 169 MSc Source: Campus Coordinators Report, 2001 TABLE 34 – Recurrent Expenditure on Education in Selected Countries (Period Averages*) Country Total US$ % OF GDP Per Capita (000) US$ The Bahamas 105 680 2.7 186.7 Belize 19 812 4.8 102.7 Barbados 117 318 7.2 450.4 Dominica 81 333 4.7 114.3 Grenada 10 202 4.8 106.7 Guyana 12 545 3.3 44.9 Jamaica 112 755 3.1 47.3 St. Lucia 19 844 4.5 145.9 St. Kitts/Nevis 4 166 2.6 99.3 Trinidad and Tobago 203 564 3.0 160.5 * Figures in this table reflect averages over a period due to large fluctuations in expenditures Source: World Bank (1996, p: 171) TABLE 35 - HUMAN DEVELOPMENT INDEX HDI Rank Life Adult Literacy Combined Education Human expectancy at rate Primary, Index Development birth (years) (% age 15 and secondary and Index (HDI) above) tertiary gross value enrolment ratio (%) 1999 1999 1999 1999 1999 Developed Countries Norway 78.4 - 97 0.98 0.939 Australia 78.8 - 116 0.99 0.936 Canada 78.7 - 97 0.98 0.936 Developing Countries Singapore 77.4 92.1 75 0.87 0.876 Malaysia 72.2 87.0 66 0.80 0.774 CARICOM Barbados 76.6 97.0 77 0.90 0.864 Bahamas 69.2 96.7 74 0.89 0.820 Trinidad and Tobago 74.1 93.5 65 0.84 0.798 Belize 73.8 93.1 73 0.86 0.776 Suriname 70.4 93.0 83 0.89 0.758 Dominica 76.2 94.0 - 0.880 0.800 St Kitts and Nevis 70.6 90.0 - 0.848 0.800 Grenada 72.3 96.0 - 0.894 0.795 St Lucia 73.2 82.0 - 0.775 0.749 St Vincent and the Grenadines 73.3 82.0 - 0.775 0.748 Jamaica 75.1 86.4 62 0.78 0.738 Guyana 63.3 98.4 66 0.87 0.704 Sources: Adapted from the UNDP 2001 Human Development Report New York, Oxford University Press. Adapted by CARICOM Secretariat. TABLE 36 - Enrolment by Programme Cluster Programme Clusters Totals Business and Administrative Studies 4,516 Computer Studies 2,770 Health and Human Services Studies 2,105 Languages, Creative Writing, Drama and Media Studies 300 Pre-University and Access Programmes 5,670 Special Offers and External Studies 587 UWI Offers 688 Vocational and Job-Oriented 2,630 GRAND TOTAL 19,266 Source: UWI School of Continuing Studies, Annual Report 2000-2001 Table 37 - Student Numbers by Centre 2000-2001 Centre TOTALS Antigua 173 Bahamas 26 Barbados 1,115 Belize 231 British Virgin Islands 101 Dominica 273 Grenada 164 Jamaica Eastern 8,889 Jamaican Western 224 Montserrat 177 St. Kitts & Nevis 189 St. Lucia 264 St. Vincent 210 Trinidad & Tobago 7,088 Social Welfare Training Centre 95 Trade Union Education Institute 47 TOTALS 19,266 Source: UWI School of Continuing Studies, Annual Report 2000-2001 TABLE 38 - Enrolment Figures by Programme Cluster, Course and Centre, 2000-2001 Business and Administrative Studies Programme Local/ Grand Totals Regional Academic Year M F T Accounts - Intermediate II St. Lucia 3 10 13 Administrative Corporate Secretaries Regional 1 27 28 Administrative Professional Secretaries (Yr 1) Regional 231 231 Administrative Professional Secretaries (Yr 2) Regional 3 143 146 Business (Accounting) Studies (Yr 1) Trinidad & Tobago 17 Business (Accounting) Studies (Yr 2) Trinidad & Tobago 5 Business Administration (CBA) Regional 374 Business Management Jamaica Western 4 8 12 Business Management Studies (Yr 1) Trinidad & Tobago 40 Business Management Studies (Yr 2) Trinidad & Tobago 23 Business Studies (2-yr) Jamaica Eastern 1239 Church Management Barbados 34 6 40 Financial Management (10-wk) Jamaica Eastern 80 Human Resource Management Barbados 8 8 Human Resource Management (Yr 1) Trinidad & Tobago 67 Human Resource Management (Yr 2) Trinidad & Tobago 61 Internal Auditing Trinidad & Tobago 16 Legal Studies (ASc) British Virgin Islands 6 16 22 Managerial Accounting Jamaica Eastern 103 Managerial Accounting Jamaica Western 1 6 7 Marketing (10-wk) Jamaica Eastern 33 Marketing & Sales (10-wk) Jamaica Eastern 60 Marketing (1-yr) Jamaica Eastern 259 Marketing Jamaica Western 2 7 9 Middle Management (NCH) Barbados 3 10 13 Personnel Management (10-wk) Jamaica Eastern 33 Personnel Management (2-yr) Jamaica Eastern 186 Production & Operations Management Jamaica Eastern 21 Programme Local/ Grand Totals Regional Academic Year M F T Property Management I Barbados 17 10 27 Property Management II Barbados 16 3 19 Public Administration (CPA) Regional 251 Records Management I Barbados 6 25 31 Records Management II Barbados 28 School Administration (Yr 1) Trinidad & Tobago 20 School Administration (Yr 2) Trinidad & Tobago 18 Small Business Management (10-wk) Jamaica Eastern 115 Small Business Management (1-yr) Jamaica Eastern 40 Supervisory Management (10-wk) Jamaica Eastern 245 Supervisory Management (10-wk) Jamaica Western 5 13 18 Supervisory Management (1-yr, Cert) Jamaica Eastern 501 Supervisory Management (1-yr) Jamaica Western 2 16 18 Supply Management (Yr 1) Trinidad & Tobago 16 Supply Management (Yr 2) Trinidad & Tobago 11 Supply Management (Yr 3) Trinidad & Tobago 5 Tourism Management & Development Trinidad & Tobago 7 TOTAL 45516 Source: UWI School of Continuing Studies, Annual Report 2000-2001 TABLE 39 - Enrolment Figures by Programme Cluster, Course and Centre, 2000-2001: Computer Studies Programme Local/Regional Grand Totals Academic Year M F T Advanced Computer Maintenance Trinidad & Tobago 20 ACP Certificate in Computer Programming Trinidad & Tobago 36 ACP Diploma in Computer System Design Trinidad & Tobago 20 Advanced Excel Jamaica Eastern 232 Advanced Word Processing Jamaica Eastern 240 Advanced Database Jamaica Eastern 108 Advanced Networking Jamaica Eastern 116 Business Management Technology (Yr I) Trinidad & Tobago 18 Business Management Technology (Yr II) Trinidad & Tobago 12 Computer Applications for the Office Trinidad & Tobago 91 Computer Literacy Trinidad & Tobago 231 Computer Maintenance Trinidad & Tobago 121 Computer Studies Barbados 5 32 37 Computer Studies - Basic St. Kitts & Nevis 3 11 14 Computer Studies - Intermediate St. Kitts & Nevis 4 9 13 Computer Studies - Advanced St. Kitts & Nevis 4 6 10 Data Communications Level I Trinidad & Tobago 10 Information Technology Jamaica Eastern 119 Information Technology Trinidad & Tobago 33 Introduction to Computers I Belize 14 22 36 Introduction to Computers II Belize 14 22 36 Introduction to Computers Jamaica Western 9 26 35 Introduction to Computers St. Lucia 11 Introduction to Media Technology Belize 4 12 16 Introduction to Microcomputers for Business Jamaica Eastern 823 Applications Institute of Management Systems Diploma Trinidad & Tobago 27 Management Information Systems Trinidad & Tobago 8 8 16 Programme Local/Regional Grand Totals Academic Year M F T Microsoft-Word, Excel, PowerPoint Jamaica Eastern 126 Microsoft-Word, Excel, PowerPoint, Access Jamaica Eastern 119 Microsoft Office Jamaica Western 1 7 8 Microsoft Word Jamaica Western 1 10 11 Networking Belize 5 2 7 QuickBooks Pro Belize 4 14 18 TOTAL 2770 Source: UWI School of Continuing Studies, Annual Report 2000-2001 TABLE 40 - Enrolment Figures by Programme Cluster, Course and Centre, 2000-2001 Health & Human Services Studies Programme Local/Regional Grand Totals Academic Year M F T Addiction Studies Regional 6 11 17 Basic Child Care - NCH/Action for Children Barbados 26 Child Psychology Jamaica Eastern 82 Counselling Jamaica Eastern 254 Counselling Children & Young Adults Belize 9 38 47 Criminology (Yr 3) Trinidad & Tobago 2 Early Childhood Care & Education Level I Trinidad & Tobago 23 Early Childhood Care & Education Level II (Yr 2) Trinidad & Tobago 133 Early Childhood Care & Education Level II (Yr 2) Trinidad & Tobago 68 Early Childhood Care & Education Level III Trinidad & Tobago 13 Early Childhood Education Antigua 12 12 Early Childhood Education Jamaica Eastern 191 Early Childhood Education Jamaica Western 11 11 General Psychology Jamaica Eastern 117 Guidance and Counselling Barbados 10 17 27 Guidance and Counselling Studies (Yr 1) Trinidad & Tobago 37 Guidance and Counselling Studies (Yr 2) Trinidad & Tobago 19 Health, Safety & Environmental Studies (Yr 1) Trinidad & Tobago 59 Health, Safety & Environmental Studies (Yr 2) Trinidad & Tobago 33 Introduction to Social Work Barbados 9 18 27 Male/Female Relations Jamaica Eastern 44 Personality & Behaviour Jamaica Eastern 96 Physical Education (Yr 1) Trinidad & Tobago 22 Physical Education (Yr 1) Trinidad & Tobago 6 Practical Home Nursing Jamaica Eastern 156 Principles & Practice of Social Work Jamaica Eastern 14 45 59 Psychology (Yr 1) Trinidad & Tobago 46 Programme Local/Regional Grand Totals Academic Year M F T Psychology (Yr 2) Trinidad & Tobago 33 Psychology (Yr 3) Trinidad & Tobago 20 Regional 1-Month Course (Industrial Relations) TUEI 22 6 28 Social Service (CSS) SWTC 4 19 23 Social Psychology Jamaica Eastern 98 Social Work Jamaica Western 2 15 17 Social Work & Welfare Studies (Yr 1) Trinidad & Tobago 57 Social Work & Welfare Studies (Yr 2) Trinidad & Tobago 20 Social Work & Welfare Studies (Yr 3) Trinidad & Tobago 19 10-Day Intensive Course (Industrial Relations) TUEI 13 6 19 Working with Adults (NCH) Barbados 58 58 Youth in Development (CYP) Regional 86 TOTAL 2105 Source: UWI School of Continuing Studies, Annual Report 2000-2001 TABLE 41 - Enrolment Figures by Programme Cluster, Course and Centre, 2000-2001 Languages, Creative Writing, Drama & Media Studies Programme Local/ Grand Totals Regional Academic Year M F T Journalism Jamaica Western 2 5 7 Language & Communication St. Lucia 7 12 19 Mass Media & Communication Studies (Yr 1) Trinidad & Tobago 30 Mass Media & Communication Studies (Yr 2) Trinidad & Tobago 10 Public Relations Jamaica Eastern 98 Public Relations, Marketing & Advertising Barbados 33 Speech Writing & Public Speaking Jamaica Eastern 93 Teaching of Spanish as a Second Language Belize 10 TOTAL 300 Source: UWI School of Continuing Studies, Annual Report 2000-2001 TABLE 42 - Enrolment Figures by Programme Cluster, Course and Centre 2000-2001 Pre-university & Access Programmes Programme Local/Regional Grand Totals Academic Year M F T CXC/GCE ‘O’ Level Barbados 43 53 96 CXC/GCE ‘O’ Level Jamaica Eastern 2326 CXC/GCE ‘O’ Level Montserrat 18 86 104 English Proficiency Module I Belize 1 14 15 English Proficiency Module II Belize 11 11 Enrichment Courses British Virgin Islands 2 8 10 Fundamentals of English Jamaica Eastern 37 Fundamentals of Written English Barbados 29 29 GCE ‘A’ Level Jamaica Eastern 444 GCE ‘A’ Level Trinidad & Tobago 629 General Education Programme Trinidad & Tobago 1761 National English Skills Barbados 21 18 39 Pre-Agriculture N1 Courses Trinidad & Tobago 83 Remedial Mathematics Barbados 6 30 36 Remedial Mathematics Dominica 29 29 Remedial Mathematics St. Kitts & Nevis 21 TOTAL 5670 Source: UWI School of Continuing Studies, Annual Report 2000-2001 TABLE 43 - Enrolment Figures by Programme Cluster, Course and Centre 2000-2001 SPECIAL OFFERS & EXTERNAL STUDIES Programme Local/Regional Grand Totals Academic Year M F T Caribbean Maritime Institute - Diploma in Shipping Regional 10 Logistics BAPIT - Piano Assessment Series V Barbados 25 26 51 Effective Oral & Written Communication in the Barbados 40 Workplace (for Chefette Ltd) External Programmes Trinidad & Tobago 398 Pan African Studies Barbados 22 25 47 Programmes for the Hearing Impaired in collaboration Barbados 23 with the Lions Club Women in Politics Barbados 2 16 18 TOTAL 587 Source: UWI School of Continuing Studies, Annual Report 2000-2001 TABLE 44 - Enrolment Figures by Programme Cluster, Course and Centre 2000-2001 UWI OFFERS Programme Local/Regional Grand Totals Academic Year M F T Advanced Diploma in Construction Management Regional 1 BA French Regional 17 BEd in Educational Administration Regional 47 BSc Agribusiness Management Regional 4 Bsc Management Studies Regional 351 BSc Level I - Accounting & Economics Majors Regional 114 Certificate in Adult Education Regional 5 Certificate in Education Regional 114 Diploma in Security Administration Regional 20 Executive Diploma in Management Regional 14 External Programme in Agriculture Diploma & MSc Regional 2 TOTAL 688 Source: UWI School of Continuing Studies, Annual Report 2000-2001 TABLE 45 - Enrolment Figures by Programme Cluster, Course and Centre 2000-2001 VOCATIONAL & JOB-ORIENTED Programme Local/Regional Grand Totals Academic Year M F T Advanced Security Management Barbados 21 11 32 Basic Course for Security Officers Barbados 50 15 65 Credit Union Operations Barbados 11 13 24 Customer Service & Telephone Techniques Jamaica Eastern 55 Food & Beverage Supervision St. Lucia 4 5 9 Paralegal Studies (Cert) British Virgin Islands 6 6 Life Underwriting Barbados 7 16 23 Special Skills Programme Trinidad & Tobago 1364 Vocational & Job Oriented Trinidad & Tobago 1052 TOTAL 2630 Source: UWI School of Continuing Studies, Annual Report 2000-2001 TABLE 46 - Number of Certificates awarded by Centre 1 2000-2001 Centre Totals Antigua 14 Barbados 403 Belize 178 British Virgin Islands 2 Dominica 24 Grenada 11 Jamaica Eastern 2,143 Montserrat 11 St. Lucia 54 St. Vincent 23 Trinidad & Tobago2 485 SWTC 82 TUEI 47 GRAND TOTALS 3,477 Source: UWI School of Continuing Studies, Annual Report 2000-2001 1 Figures do not include Pre-University Programmes, UWI Offers & Special Offers & External Programmes 2 Trinidad & Tobago figures also do not include Vocational & Job-Oriented Programmes TABLE 47 - Age Distribution of full-time Academic Staff at the Mona Campus, 2000/2001 Faculty Number of Staff Members TOTAL 20-29 30-39 40-49 50-59 60 and over Arts & Education 7 15 39 35 18 114 Law 0 0 2 0 0 2 Medical Sciences 3 30 63 35 17 148 Pure & Applied Sciences 5 26 29 26 14 100 Social Sciences 18 29 34 24 9 114 Centre for Gender & Dev. Studies 0 0 0 3 0 3 (Mona Unit) School of Continuing Studies (Mona) 0 0 1 3 1 5 TOTAL 33 100 168 126 59 486 Source: UWI Mona, Memorandum of Estimates of Needs for the Biennium 2002/2004, February 2002 TABLE 48 - FULL-TIME Academic Staff at the Mona Campus by Faculty/School and Academic Qualification, 2000/2001 Faculty Qualification TOTAL Bach Mast Doct Other Arts & Education 20 37 55 2 114 Law 1 0 1 0 2 Medical Sciences 15 23 103 7 148 Pure & Applied Sciences 10 14 76 0 100 Social Sciences 20 0 1 0 3 Centre for Gender & Dev. Studies (Mona Unit) 2 0 1 0 3 School of Continuing Studies (Mona) 1 4 0 0 5 TOTAL 69 127 280 10 486 Source: UWI Mona, Memorandum of Estimates of Needs for the Biennium 2002/2004, February 2002 TABLE 49 - Full-time Academic Staff at the Mona Campus, by Faculty/School and Category, 2000/2001 Faculty Category Professor Senior Lecturer Asst. Other TOTAL Lecturer Lecturer Arts & Education 10 25 48 11 20 114 Law 0 0 2 0 0 2 Medical Sciences 11 35 82 7 13 148 Pure & Applied Sciences 12 27 53 3 5 100 Social Sciences 8 20 57 16 13 114 Centre for Gender & Dev. 0 1 2 0 0 3 Studies (Mona Unit) School of Continuing 0 0 5 0 0 5 Studies (Mona) TOTAL 41 108 249 37 51 486 Source: UWI Mona, Memorandum of Estimates of Needs for the Biennium 2002/2004, February 2002 Table 50: Enrolment by Main Divisions of Specialization at Sir Arthur Lewis Community College, 1993/94 to 2000/01 Year Division/Department Total Arts & General Technical Teacher UWI Health Agriculture Home Continuing Studies Education and Education Services Economics Education Management Studies 1993/94 358 374 190 59 30 12 1850 2873 1994/95 410 400 196 61 61 32 16 1702 2878 1995/96 370 408 199 91 66 25 16 2173 3348 1996/97 359 442 197 126 88 45 15 3277 4549 1997/98 426 451 176 135 86 49 14 3154 4491 19998/99 480 440 188 124 87 34 9 2227 3589 1999/00 520 492 247 78 80 32 9 2422 3880 2000/01 467 519 221 71 72 39 14 2371 3774 Source: Ministry of Education, St. Lucia, 2002 Table 51: Male Enrolment by Main Divisions of Specialization at Sir Arthur Lewis Community College, 1996/97 to 2000/01 DIVISION/DEPARTMENT Year Total Arts & General Technical Education Teacher UWI Health Agriculture Home Studies and Management Education Services Economics Studies 1996/97 100 239 41 37 7 31 1 456 1997/98 140 244 37 29 7 24 0 481 19998/99 180 254 38 24 8 22 0 526 1999/00 249 297 52 21 8 16 0 643 2000/01 167 284 46 22 5 22 0 546 Source: Ministry of Education, St. Lucia, 2002 Table 52: Growth of Female Enrolment according to the Main Divisions/Departments of Specialization at Sir Arthur Lewis Community College, 1996/97 to 2000/01 Year Division/Department Total Arts & Technical Education Teacher UWI Health Agriculture Home General and Management Education Services Economics Studies Studies 1996/97 259 203 156 89 81 14 14 816 1997/98 286 207 139 106 79 25 14 856 19998/99 300 186 150 100 79 12 9 836 1999/00 271 195 195 57 72 16 9 815 2000/01 300 235 170 49 67 17 14 852 Source: Ministry of Education, St. Lucia, 2002 Table 53: Percentage Share of Female Enrolment in the Main Divisions/Department of Specialization at Sir Arthur Lewis Community College, 1996/97 to 2000/01 Year Division/Department Total Arts & General Technical Education Teacher UWI Health Agriculture Home Studies and Management Education Services Economics Studies 1996/97 72 46 79 71 92 31 93 64 1997/98 67 46 79 79 92 51 100 64 19998/99 63 42 80 81 91 35 100 61 1999/00 52 40 79 73 90 50 100 56 2000/01 64 45 77 69 93 44 100 61 Source: Ministry of Education, St. Lucia, 2002 Table 54: Percentage of Male Enrolment in the Main Divisions/Department of Specialization at Sir Arthur Lewis Community College, 1996/97 to 2000/01 Year Division/Department Total Arts & Technical Teacher UWI Health Agriculture Home General Education and Education Services Economics Studies Management Studies 1996/97 28 54 21 29 8 69 7 36 1997/98 33 54 21 21 8 49 0 36 19998/99 37 58 20 19 9 65 0 39 1999/00 48 60 21 27 10 50 0 44 2000/01 36 55 21 31 7 56 0 39 Source: Ministry of Education, St. Lucia, 2002 Table 55: Percentage Distribution of Enrolment by Main Divisions/Departments of Specialization at Sir Arthur Lewis Community College, 1994/95 to 2000/01 Year Division/Department Total Arts & General Technical Education Teacher UWI Health Agriculture Home Continuing Studies and Management Education Services Economic Education Studies s 1994/95 14 14 7 2 2 1 1 59 100 1995/96 11 12 6 3 2 1 1 65 100 1996/97 8 10 4 3 2 1 0 72 100 1997/98 10 10 4 3 2 1 0 70 100 19998/99 13 12 5 4 2 1 0 62 100 1999/00 13 13 6 2 2 1 0 62 100 2000/01 12 14 6 2 2 1 0 63 100 Source: Ministry of Education, St. Lucia, 2002 Table 56: Dropouts at Sir Arthur Lewis Community College by Division/Department, 1994/95 to 1990/00 Division/Department Percentage Year Arts & General Technical Education Teacher Health Agricultur Total Enrolment Dropout Studies and Management Education Services e Dropouts Rate Studies 1994/95 25 23 3 4 6 61 1115 5.5 1995/96 39 25 3 1 -- 68 1084 6.3 1996/97 31 46 1 1 13 92 1272 7.2 1997/98 43 24 4 2 5 78 1337 5.8 19998/99 45 19 2 3 1 70 1362 5.1 1999/00 45 32 1 1 1 80 1403 5.7 Source: Ministry of Education, St. Lucia, 2002 Table 57: Total Leavers at Sir Arthur Lewis Community College, 1998/99 and 1999/00 Year Dropouts/ Transfers Completed Completed Withdrawals (certified) (uncertified) 1998/99 70 0 507 17 1999/00 80 22 491 208 Note: This Table does not include the Department of Continuing Education Source: Ministry of Education, St. Lucia, 2002 Table 58: Changes in Student/Teacher Ratios at Sir Arthur Lewis Community College, 1997/98 to 2000/01 Year Total Enrolment Number of Teachers Student/Teacher Ratio 1997/98 1337 176 8 1998/99 1362 151 9 1999/00 1458 133 11 2000/01 1403 127 11 Note: This Table does not include the Department of Continuing Education Source: Ministry of Education, St. Lucia, 2002 Table 59: Allocations of Expenditure per Student by Ministry of Education for Sir Arthur Lewis Community College, 1994/95 to 2000/01 Year Total Total Government Unit Expenditure Enrolment Allocations in Allocation per Million EC$ Student EC$ 1994/95 1176 10.6 9014 1995/96 1175 10.6 9021 1996/97 1272 11.5 9041 1997/98 1337 13.5 10097 1998/99 1362 14.3 10499 1999/00 1458 13.8 9465 2000/01 1403 12.5 8909 Source: Ministry of Education, St. Lucia, 2002 Table 60: Total Enrolment by Main Departments of Specialization at Vieux-Fort Comprehensive School - Post Secondary Department, 1996/97 to 2000/01 Division/Department Year Total A’Level Business Studies Secretarial Carpentry/Joinery Studies 1996/97 86 16 15 13 130 1997/98 111 39 15 13 178 1998/99 123 69 23 10 225 1999/00 122 94 47 22 285 2000/01 127 103 31 23 284 Source: Ministry of Education, St. Lucia, 2002 TABLE 61: Male Enrolment by Main Departments of Specialization at Vieux-Fort Comprehensive School - Post Secondary Department, 1996/97 to 2000/01 Division/Department Year Total A’ Level Business Secretarial Carpentry/Joinery Studies Studies 1996/97 31 4 0 13 48 1997/98 34 10 0 13 57 1998/99 32 5 0 10 67 1999/00 45 37 0 22 104 2000/01 63 36 0 23 122 Source: Ministry of Education, St. Lucia, 2002 TABLE 62 - Female Enrolment by Main Departments of Specialization at Vieux-Fort Comprehensive School - Post Secondary Department, 996/97 to 2000/01 Division/Department Year Total A’ Level Business Secretarial Carpentry/Joinery Studies Studies 1996/97 55 12 15 0 82 1997/98 77 29 15 0 121 1998/99 91 44 23 0 158 1999/00 77 57 47 0 181 2000/01 64 67 31 0 162 Source: Ministry of Education, St. Lucia, 2002 TABLE 63 - Percentage Share of Females by Enrolment by Main Departments of Specialization at Vieux-Fort Comprehensive School - Post Secondary Department, 1996/97 to 2000/01 Division/Department Year Total A’ Level Business Secretarial Carpentry/Joinery Studies Studies 1996/97 64 75 100 0 63 1997/98 69 74 100 0 68 1998/99 74 64 100 0 70 1999/00 63 61 100 0 64 2000/01 50 65 100 0 57 Source: Ministry of Education, St. Lucia, 2002 TABLE 64 - Allocation Pattern of Current Educational Expenditure by Levels of Education and Programs, 1994/95 to 20001/02 Levels of Amount in Millions EC$ Education/Programs 1994/95 1995/96 1996/97 1997/98 1998/99 1999/00 2000/01 2001/02 Primary 35.10 37.80 37.33 38.23 37.77 42.13 43.32 44.06 Secondary 19.62 20.59 24.47 25.96 25.21 28.53 28.41 31.20 Tertiary 10.58 10.59 11.53 13.54 14.31 13.81 13.15 13.15 Education Services 6.59 8.81 8.40 8.63 6.60 5.52 5.14 5.58 Agency Administration 2.76 2.77 3.04 3.00 7.52 4.51 3.86 3.69 Human Resource 3.90 3.73 2.21 3.00 Development Special Education 0.91 0.91 0.91 1.13 1.26 1.31 1.45 1.29 Sports 0.53 1.19 1.44 1.25 Cultural/Library 1.78 1.61 1.75 1.97 1.00 1.13 1.16 1.20 Youth Services 0.84 0.99 0.79 0.84 Adult/Continuing Education 0.30 0.65 0.63 0.77 Early Childhood Education 0.17 0.14 0.25 0.38 0.24 0.39 0.36 0.35 UNESCO 0.09 0.05 0.09 0.10 0.16 0.18 0.15 0.17 School Feeding 0.60 0.55 0.57 0.88 0.60 0.63 0.6 0 Labour 0.80 0.70 0.77 0.87 Total 78.99 84.52 89.73 95.10 99.48 103.89 102.07 106.54 * Included in the Primary Budget Source: Ministry of Education, St. Lucia, 2002 TABLE 65 - Percentage Distribution of Current Educational Expenditure by Levels of Education and Programs, 1994/95 to 2001/02 Levels of Education/Programs Percentage Distributions 1994/95 1995/96 1996/97 1997/98 1998/99 1999/00 2000/01 2001/02 Primary 44.44 44.72 41.60 40.20 37.7 40.2 42.2 41.35 Secondary 24.84 24.36 27.27 27.30 25.1 27.2 27.7 29.28 Tertiary 13.39 12.53 12.85 14.24 14.3 13.2 12.8 12.34 Education Services 8.34 10.43 9.36 9.08 6.6 5.3 5.0 5.24 Agency Administration 3.49 3.28 3.38 3.15 7.5 4.3 3.8 3.47 Human Resource Management 3.9 3.6 2.2 2.81 Special Education 1.15 1.07 1.01 1.19 1.3 1.3 1.4 1.21 Sports 0.5 1.1 1.1 1.17 Cultural/Library 2.25 1.90 1.95 2.07 1.0 1.1 1.4 1.13 Youth Services 0.8 0.9 0.8 0.79 Adult/Continuing Education 0.3 0.6 0.6 0.72 School Education 0.76 0.65 0.63 0.93 0.6 0.6 0.6 0 Early Childhood Education 0.22 0.17 0.28 0.40 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.33 UNESCO 0.12 0.06 0.10 0.11 0.2 0.2 0.1 0.16 Labour 1.01 0.82 0.86 0.92 Total 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.1 100.00 Source: Ministry of Education, St. Lucia, 2002 TABLE 66 - Allocation to Education Sector in Relation to Current and Capital Budgetary Expenditures, 2001/02 Expenditure in Millions EC$ Sectors Recurrent Capital Total % Distribution Finance and Economic Affairs 184.4 15.3 199.6 23.28 Education and Human Resource Development 106.5 68.1 174.6 20.36 Development, Planning, Environment and Housing 7.3 116.7 124.0 14.47 Legal Affairs, Home, Labour, Judiciary and DPP 48.7 25.2 73.9 8.62 Communications, Works, Transport and Public Utilities 23.5 46.5 69.9 8.16 Health, Human Services, Family Affairs and Gender Relation 53.1 9.8 62.9 7.33 Agriculture, Forestry and Fishing 12.3 45.7 58.0 6.77 Tourism and Civil Aviation 1.4 23.7 25.0 2.92 Foreign Affairs and International Trade 14.7 0.6 15.3 1.97 Community Development, Culture, Local Government, 10.2 3.3 13.6 1.58 Cooperatives and Ecclesiastical Affairs Public Services 11.5 1.2 12.7 1.49 Prime Minister’s Office 7.3 3.4 10.7 1.24 Others 9.7 0.4 10.1 1.17 Commerce, Int’l Financial Services and Consumer Affairs 3.9 3.1 7.0 0.82 Total 494.4 362.9 857.3 100.00 Source: Ministry of Education, St. Lucia, 2002 TABLE 67 - Projections of Public Expenditure by Levels of Education and Programs at Current Prices in St. Lucia, 2000/01 to 2005/06 Expenditure in Million EC$ Year Primary Secondary Other Total Education Education Programs 2000/01 43.7 28.3 30.7 102.7 2001/02 44.1 31.2 31.2 106.5 2002/03 44.7 34.0 37.1 115.8 2003/04 45.5 38.6 41.5 125.6 2004/05 46.5 45.4 47.4 139.2 2005/06 47.8 54.6 55.1 157.5 Source: Ministry of Education, St. Lucia, 2002 TABLE 68 - Actual and Projected Educational Expenditure at Current Prices in Reaction to Gross Domestic Product, 1994/95 to 2005/06 Year Educational GDP at Educational Expenditure Current Prices Expenditure as a Percentage of GDP Actual 1994/95 78.99 1191 6.6 1995/96 84.52 1280 6.6 1996/97 89.73 1299 6.9 1997/98 95.10 1328 7.2 1998/99 100.2 1407 7.1 1999/00 104.7 1518 6.9 2000/01 102.7 1560 6.6 Projected 2001/02 106.5 1607 6.6 2002/03 115.8 1655 7.0 2003/04 125.6 1705 7.4 2004/05 139.2 1756 7.9 2005/06 157.5 1808 8.7 Source: Ministry of Education, St. Lucia, 2002 - Education Expenditure GDP: For projection purposes the GDP has been assumed to increase at an annual rate of 3 percent TABLE 69 - Actual and Projected Educational Expenditure in Relation to Total Government Recurrent Expenditure, 1994/95 to 2005/06 Year Educational GDP at Government % Share of Government % Share of Expenditure Current Prices Recurrent Expenditure of GDP Education in Total Expenditure Government Expenditure Actual 1994/95 78.99 1191 288 24.2 27.4 1995/96 84.52 1280 328 25.6 25.8 1996/97 89.73 1299 386 29.7 23.2 1997/98 95.10 1328 388 29.2 24.5 1998/99 100.2 1407 391 27.8 25.6 1999/00 104.7 1518 414 27.3 25.3 2000/01 102.7 1560 435 27.9 23.6 Projected 2001/02 106.5 1607 494 30.7 21.6 2002/03 115.8 1655 509 30.7 22.8 2003/04 125.6 1705 524 30.7 24.0 2004/05 139.2 1756 540 30.7 25.8 2005/06 157.5 1808 556 30.7 28.3 Sources: Source: Ministry of Education, St. Lucia, 2002 - Recurrent Educational Expenditure and GDP Total Government Recurrent Expenditure for 1994/95 to 1999/00 from Government Annual Budget Estimates. Notes: Total Government Recurrent Expenditure for 2000/01 to 2005/01 to 2005/06 has been projected by applying 3 percent annual growth rate, same as applied to GDP Projections. TABLE 70 - BCC Full-time Student Statistics 2000 - 2001 STUDENT ROLL - ANALYSIS BY SEX AND YEAR DIVISION 1st Year Day 2nd Year Day 3rd Year Day 4th Year Day Total M F T M F T M F T M F T Day Commerce 530 91 205 296 64 170 234 – – – – – -- Comp. Studies 280 78 71 149 75 56 131 – – – – – -- Fine Arts 122 25 54 79 12 6 18 4 8 12 10 3 13 General/Cont Education 57 6 20 26 8 23 31 – – – – – -- Health Sciences 334 39 169 208 16 46 62 14 50 64 – – -- Hospitality Institute 437 38 106 144 66 227 293 – – – – – -- Language Centre 283 57 158 215 7 61 68 – – – – – -- Liberal Arts 233 36 104 140 25 68 93 – – – – – -- Physical Education 24 18 6 24 – – – – – – – – -- Science 271 63 93 156 51 64 115 – – – – – -- Technology 131 86 15 101 29 1 30 – – – – – -- TOTALS 2702 537 1001 1538 353 722 1075 18 58 76 10 3 13 Source: Barbados Community College 288 TABLE 71 - BCC Student Enrollment According to Division - 2000 – 2001 DIVISION DAY EVENING TOTAL MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE Commerce 155 375 104 342 976 Computer Studies 153 127 106 174 560 Fine Arts 51 71 13 64 199 General Education 14 43 15 44 116 Health Science 69 265 1 14 349 Hospitality Institute 104 333 63 240 740 Language Centre 64 219 33 101 417 Liberal Arts 61 172 – – 233 Physical Education 18 6 – – 24 Science 114 157 – – 271 Technology 115 16 57 4 192 TOTALS 918 1784 392 983 4077 TOTAL 4,077 Less cross divisional - 233 students Real Student Enrolment 3,844 289 Table 72: Summary of Expenditure on Post-Secondary/Tertiary Institutions for the Period 1995/96 - 2000/01 Financial Total Expenditure on: % of Education Budget spent Year on: Education UWI, BCC and BCC, SJPP UWI, BCC, BCC, SJPP SJPP and and ETTC SJPP and and ETTC ETTC ETTC 1995/96 238,465,000 52,239,238 16,411,747 21.9 6.9 1996/97 278,273,000 64,247,308 20,553,891 23.1 7.4 1997/98 318,387,000 82,341,136 22,712,223 25.9 7.1 1998/99 317,571,000 79,926,018 25,129,452 25.2 7.9 1999/00 351,269,000 71,912,815 29,127,662 20.5 8.3 2000/01 378,648,144 89,660,950 26,552,587 23.7 7.0 Figures for 1999/00 and 2000/01 represent Approved Expenditures and not actual expenditures. Source: Ministry of Education, Government of Barbados 290 Table 73: No of Applications Accepted and Not Accepted at BCC, SJPP and ETTC in 2000/01 INSTITUTION NO. OF APPLICANTS NO. ACCEPTED NO. NOT ACCEPTED BCC 3,134 (Full Time) 1,517 (Full Time) 1,617 (Full Time) 3,324 (Part-Time) 1,083 (Part-Time) 2,241 (Part-Time) 6458 (Total) 2,600 (Total) 3,858 (Total) SJPP 3,297 (Full Time) 622 (Full Time) 2,828 (Full Time) 3,408 (Part-Time) 1,438 (Part-Time) 1,970 (Part-Time) 6,705 (Total) 1,907 (Total) 4,798 (Total) ERDISTON 119 (Full Time) 77 (Full Time) 42 (Full Time) GRAND TOTAL 13,282 4,584 8,698 Source: Ministry of Education, Government of Barbados 291 Bibliography ACTI. Directory of CARIFORUM Tertiary Level Institutions. St. Michael, Barbados, 1998. Altbach, Philip and Patti McGill Peterson. (eds.) Higher Education in the 21st Century: Global Challenge and National Response. MD, USA: Institute of International Education, 1999. Bacchus, MK Utilization, Misuse and Development of Human Resources in the Early West Indian Colonies, Waterloo, Canada: Wilfrid Laurier University Press, 1990 Bacchus, MK. “The Political Dimensions of the Development of Education in the Caribbean”. University of London, I C.S, Postgraduate seminar: Caribbean Societies, 27 May, 1985. BCC. Barbados Community College Annual Report for 1999-2000 BCC. Barbados Community College Calendar 1999-2001. BCC. Barbados Community College Annual Report for 2000-2001. Beckford, George. Persistent Poverty: Underdevelopment in Plantation Economies of the Third World. New York: Oxford University Press, 1972. Beckles, Hilary. "The Literate few: An Historical Sketch of the Slavery Origins of Black Elites in the English West Indies". Caribbean Journal of Education. Vol.11, No 1, 1984. Beckles, Hilary, Anthony Perry and Peter Whiteley. The Brain Train. Quality Higher Education and Caribbean Development, Kingston Jamaica: Pear Tree Press, 2002. Benn, Dennis. Ideology and Political Development: The Growth and development of Political Ideas in the Caribbean, 1774-1983. Mona, Jamaica : ISER, 1987. Berryman, Sue E. Hidden Challenges to Education systems in Transition Economies. Washington, DC: The World Bank, September 2000. Bryan, Patrick The Jamaica People 1880-1902, London and Basingstoke: Macmillan, 1991. Burki, Shahid Javed and Sebastian Edwards. Dismantling the populist State. The Unfinished revolution in Latin America and the Caribbean. Washington DC: World Bank, 1996. Campbell, Carl Colony & Nation: A Short History of Education in Trinidad & Tobago, Kingston, Jamaica: Ian Randle Publishers, 1978. Caribbean Development Bank. Further Education: Turks and Caicos Islands. Paper prepared for 292 the 175th Meeting of the Board of Directors held in Barbados October 16, 1997. Caribbean Development Bank. Enhancement of Technical and Vocational Education and Training, Belize. Paper prepared for the 173rd Meeting of the Board of Directors held in Barbados, October 12 & 13, 2000. CARICOM/ERNESA. Lessons Learned from Networking and Brokerage between Educational Research and Policy Making. Final Report of an Internet Workshop held in Santiago, Chile, January 9 to 12, 1996. CARICOM/European Union. A Manual of Procedures & Guidelines for the regional Mechanism for Accreditation, Equivalency and Articulation, August 1998. CARICOM: Montego Bay Declaration: Positioning the Caribbean for the Twenty-First Century, 4 July, 1997. CARICOM. Creative and Productive Citizens for the Twenty First Century. Caribbean Community Secretariat. Approved by the Standing Committee of Ministers Responsible for Education (SCME) at a special meeting held in Barbados in May 1997. Castro, Claudio de Moura and Daniel C. Levy. Higher education in Latin America and the Caribbean. A Strategy Paper, Washington DC: IDB, December 1997. CDB. Institutional Study of Post Secondary/Tertiary Education and Training in Trinidad and Tobago. Prepared for the Caribbean Development Bank by Trevor Hamilton and associates, June 18, 2001. CIDA. Report on an Institutional Review of the University of the West Indies. Vol 1. Report prepared by Jan Loubser, Ronald C. Hughes, Zaffar Ali and Compton Bourne. Quebec, Canada: Canadian International Development Agency, October 1987. Commonwealth Secretariat. Small States: Meeting Challenges in the Global Economy. Report of the Commonwealth Secretariat/World Bank Joint Task Force on Small States. Washington DC: World Bank April 2000. Craig, Dennis (ed.) Education in the West Indies: Developments and Perspectives 1948-1988, Kingston. Jamaica: ISER. 1996. Crossley, Michael and Keith Holmes. Educational Development in the Small States of the Commonwealth: Retrospect and Prospect, London: Commonwealth Secretariat, July 1999. DEC: The University of the West Indies: Distance Programmes and Courses, 2001-2003. Distance Education Centre, Cave Hill Campus, Barbados, 2001. Edwards, Bryan. The History, Civil, and Commercial of the British West Indies.1819. London: 293 T. Miller, 1978. Ellis, Patricia. Establishment of the Montserrat Community College. Turning the Dream into Reality. Report prepared for the Organization of Eastern Caribbean States Education Reform Unit, May 2002. Figueroa, John J. Society, Schools and progress in the West Indies, Oxford & New York: Pergamon press. 1971 Franklyn, Gaston. Report on the Financing of Tertiary Education in the OECS. Castries, St Lucia: Organisation of Eastern Caribbean States, April 1999. Franklyn, Gaston. The Road to Semi-Autonomy by the Clarence Fitzroy Bryant College, St. Kitts & Nevis, Prepared for the Government of St Kitts & Nevis and the OECS Tertiary Education Programme, November 2001. Fraser, Peter D. 'Education and the Retreat of Capitalism in the Some Notes', University of London, IC S., Postgraduate seminar: Caribbean Societies, 24 January, 1982 Global Management Solutions Inc. SWOT Analysis of University of Technology, Jamaica [n.p: n.d] Document obtained from the CDB. Gordon, Shirley (compiled by). A Century of West Indian Education, London: Longmans, 1963. Goverment of Grenada. Strategic Plan for Education Enhancement and Development, 2002- 2010, SPEED, Prepared by the Ministry of Education, Grenada, with support from DFIDC and IIEP, UNESCO, Paris France, January 2002. Government of Barbados. Curriculum 2000 Barbados. Rationale & Guidelines for Curriculum Reform in Barbados, Ministry of Education Youth Affairs & Culture, 2000. Government of Montserrat. Education Development Plan 2002-2007, Ministry of Education, Health and Community Services, First Draft October 2001. Government of St Lucia. Education Sector Development Plan 2000-2005 and beyond Vol.1. Ministry of Education, Human Resources Development, Youth and Sports, Castries St Lucia, December February 2000. Government of the Cayman Islands. The Cayman Islands: The Key to the Future (A Guide to the Strategic Plan). Vision 2008. March 1999. Government of Barbados. Barbados Community College Act, 1968 (23), 29th July 1968. Government of St Lucia. Education Statistical Digest, Past Trends, Present Position and projections up to 2005. Ministry of Education, Human Resource Development, Youth and 294 Sports. Castries, St Lucia, June 2001. Government of St Lucia. Education Statistical Digest, Past Trends, Present Position and Projections up to 2005, Ministry of Education, Human Resource Development, Youth and Sports, June 2001. Government of Barbados. Education in Barbados: Information Handbook. Prepared by the Planning and Research Section Ministry of Education Youth Affairs and Sports, Barbados, 2001. Government of St. Lucia. ‘The St Lucia declaration about higher education in the Caribbean’ in Higher education in the Caribbean: Report on United Nations Education, Science and Culture Organization (UNESCO/CARICOM) consultation on Higher Education in the Caribbean, 1998. Government of Jamaica. Education: The Way Upward. A Green Paper for the Year 2000. Government of Barbados. White Paper on Education Reform. Preparing for the Twenty-First Century. Ministry of Education, Youth Affairs and Culture, Barbados, July 1995. Government of St Lucia. The Education Act No. 41 of 1999. Government of Barbados. The Marshall Report. Report established to review the development of the Cave Hill Campus between 1979 to 1986. Barbados: Ministry of Education, 1987. Government of St. Lucia. Adult and Continuing Education in St. Lucia: Addressing Global Transformation and The New Millennium. Ministry of Education, Human Resources Development, Youth and Sports, Castries St Lucia, December 1999. Greenaway David and Michelle Haynes. Funding Universities to Meet National and International Challenges. School of Economics Policy Report, University of Nottingham. Report commissioned by the Russell Group of Universities, 2000. Griffith, Winston. ‘Education and Caribbean Development in the Global Economy’. Journal of Eastern Caribbean Studies, vol, 25, No.2 June 2000, pp.31-52. Hall, Douglas. The University of the West Indies. A Quinquagenary Calendar 1948-1998, Kingston, Jamaica: UWI Press, 1998. Henry, Ralph, Report on Economic and Financing issues in Education in the Caribbean: Final Report, Washington DC: World Bank, March 2000. Howe, Glenford. ‘From Ideas to Practice: The Development of the University of the West Indies Distance Education Policies and Programmes’ in Glenford Howe, Higher Education in the Caribbean. Past Present and Future Directions, Kingston Jamaica: University of the West Indies Press, 2000. Howe, Glenford. ‘Our Coming of Age: Historical reflections on the Development of Anglophone 295 Caribbean Education’, CARICOM Perspective: A Century of Achievement Vol.2, No 69 June 2000, pp.36-41 & 68-69. Howe Glenford (with assistance from Edwin Brandon). Foreign Tertiary Education Providers Functioning in the Anglophone Caribbean. Report Prepared for the Office of the Board for Non- Campus Countries and Distance Education, Cave Hill Campus, UWI, Barbados, January 2001. Howe, Glenford. (ed.). Higher Education in the Caribbean: Past Present and Future Directions, Kingston, Jamaica: UW1 Press, 2000. ILO. World Employment Report 2001. Life at Work in the Information Economy. International Labour Office, Geneva, Switzerland, 2001. ILO. Meeting the Youth Employment Challenge: A Guide for Employers, Geneva, Switzerland: International Labour Office, 2001. Johnstone, D. Bruce. The Financing and Management of Higher Education: A Status Report on Worldwide Reforms. (In collaboration with Alka Arora and William Experton) Report prepared for the World Bank and presented at the UNESCO World Conference on Higher Education, held in Paris, France on October 5-9, 1998. Kitaev Igor. Private Education in Sub-Saharan Africa: A Re-examination of theories and concepts related to its development and finance. Paris, France: International Institute for Educational Planning/UNESCO, 1999. Le Franc, Elsie (ed), Consequences of Structural Adjustment A Review of the Jamaica Experience, Kingston, Jamaica: Canoe press, 1994. Levin, Henry M. Pedagogical changes for educational futures in Latin America and the Caribbean. Teachers College, Columbia University, USA September 2000. Lewis, Gordon. Main Currents in Caribbean Thought: The historical evolution of Caribbean Society in its Ideological Aspects 1492-1900, Baltimore & London: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1983. Lochan Samuel. Education and Work. Case Studies of Trinidad and Tobago, Jmaica, and Barbados. International Labour Organization Caribbean Studies and Working papers No.5: (Caribbean Office), Port of Spain, Trinidad, 2000. Management Technologies. Towards Academic Excellence: Restructuring Sir Arthur Lewis Community College: Vol.1. Consultations with Stakeholders on Restructuring the College. A Summary Report, Halifax Canada: Management Technologies, October 9-13, 2000. McMeekin, R.W. Education Statistics in Latin America and the Caribbean. Washington, DC. UNESCO, January 1998. 296 Miller, Errol. Education for All in the Caribbean in the 1990s. Retrospect and Prospect, Kingston, Jamaica: UNESCO, 2000. Miller, Errol, Leton Thomas and Didacus Jules, Assessing Progress in the Implementation of Foundations for the Future. (Third Draft) Castries, St Lucia: Organisation of Eastern caribbean States Education Reform Unit.,August 2000. Miller, Errol, Didacus Jules and Leton Thomas. Pillars for Partnership and Progress. The OECS Education Reform Strategy. 2010, Report prepared for the OECS Education Reform Unit, OECS Secretariat, December 6, 2000. Miller, Errol. Marginalization of the Black male: Insights form the Development of the Teaching Profession. Jamaica: Canoe Press, 1994ed. Miller, Errol. Educational Reform in the Commonwealth Caribbean. Washington DC: Interamer No.54, Organization of American States, 1999. MIND. Business and Corporate Plans 2002-2005. Trinidad: Management Institute for National Development, 2002. NCES: Postsecondary Financing Strategies: How undergraduates Combine Work, Borrowing and Attendance. Statistical Analysis Report, prepared by Stephanie Cuccaro-Alamin and C. Dennis Carroll for the National Center for Education Statistics (NCES), US Department of Education, February 1998. Nettleford, Rex. Crises in Education: the biases behind the policies. Kingston, Jamaica: Friedrich Ebert Stiftung, 1986. Nettleford, Rex. The University of the West Indies: A Caribbean Response to the Challenge of Change, London: Macmillan, 1990. NIHERST. Report on Survey of Science and Technology Indicators, Trinidad and Tobago. Trinidad: National Institute of Higher Education, Research, Science and Technology, 1999/2000. Nkhosi-Thurab, Dianne. Improving Quality and Increasing Access in 2000: The role of Distance Education. EFA in the Caribbean: Assessment 2000 Monograph Series. Jamaica: UNESCO, 2000. Oxaal, Ivar. Black Intellectuals and the Dilemmas of Race and class in Trinidad, Cambridge, Mass: Schenkman. 1982. Patrinos Harry Anthony. Market Forces in Education. Washington DC: The World Bank, Draft July 1999. 297 Paul, Una M. OECS. The Development of Human Capital A Critical Challlenge for the 21st Century and Beyond. Community College Graduate Tracer Study Mechanism. Castries St Lucia: OECS Secretariat June 1999. PREAL. The Future at Stake. Report of the Task Force on Education, Equity and Economic Competitiveness in Latin America and the Caribbean, Washington DC: Partnership for Educational Revitalization in the Americas, April 1998. Psacharopoulos George & Maureen Woodhall. Education for Development an analysis of investment choices New York: World Bank/Oxford University press, 1985. Richards, George. Centre of Specialisation in Information and Communication Technology in the OECS. Needs Assessment Report. Prepared for the Education and Telecommunications Reform Units of the OECS, December 31, 2000. Roberts, Vivienne. ‘Global Trends in Tertiary Education Quality Assurance. Implications for the Anglophone Caribbean’. Journal of Educational Management & Administration vol. 29, no. 4, 2001, pp.425-440. Roberts, Vivienne. ‘Programme Articulation: The Making of a regional Tertiary Education System’. Journal of Education and Development in the Caribbean, Vol. 3, No.2, 1999. Ross-Brewster, Havelock. "Social Capital and Development: Reflections on Barbados and Jamaica", Barbados Economic Report 1995, Produced for the Ministry of Finance and Economic Affairs. May 1996. SALCC. Sir Arthur Lewis Community College Strategic Plan for 2000-2005. Schwartzman, Simon. The Future of Education in Latin America and the Caribbean. Working Paper presented to the Seventh Meeting of the Intergovernmental Regional Committee of the Major Project in the Field of Education in Latin America and the Caribbean, 2001. SCS. The University of the West Indies, School of Continuing Studies Annual Report 2000-2001, UWI, Mona, Jamaica, 2001. SGSR. The Graduate Students: A Survey among graduate students, UWI, Mona Campus. Prepared for the School of Graduate Studies and Research, University of the West Indies, Mona Campus, by Hope Enterprises Ltd., May 1998. The University Council of Jamaica. Directory of Jamaican Tertiary Institutions (2nd ed.), The Towers, Dominica Drive, New Kingston, Jamaica, September 1997. Thomas, CY. The Poor and the Powerless: Economic Policy and change in the Caribbean, New York: Monthly Review Press, 1988. 298 Thomas, Hilroy, and Donald C. Peters. Re-Development Plan for The Dominica College. Final Report. Prepared for the Government of Dominica and the OECS Tertiary Education Programme, Castries St. Lucia, November 2000. Thomas, Hilroy. Consultation on The Reform of Tertiary Institutional Environment in the OECS. Dominica College, September 30th 2001. TLIU/UWI. The University of the West Indies. Collaboration between UWI and other Regional Tertiary Level Institutions: A Manual. Tertiary Level Institutions Unit, Cave Hill Campus, UWI, 1999/2000. UNESCO. Higher Education in the XX1 Century. View of Latin America and the Caribbean. Vol.1. Caracas, Venezuela: CRESALC/UNESCO, 1998. UNESCO. Statistics and Indicators on Education, 1998/99: The Caribbean and Latin America. Good Neighbours: Caribbean Students at the Tertiary level of Education, Quebec Canada: The UNESCO Institute for Statistics, 2001. UNESCO. Towards a New Higher Education. Proceedings of the Regional Conference Policies and Strategies for the Transformation of Higher Education in Latin America and the Caribbean held in Havana, Cuba from 18 to 22 November 1996.. Caracas, Venezuela: 1997. UWI/BUS. You We Quality Assurance Forum: Inventing Wheels, UWI Magazine, No. 3, 2000. UWI/BUS. The University of the West Indies. Quality Assurance Strategy, Prepared by Office of the Board for Undergraduate Studies, UWI, Mona Campus, Jamaica, 2000/2001 UWI: The University of the West Indies (Draft) Strategic Planning Framework Document 2002/03-2006/07: UWI in 2007- Shaping our Future: A Position Paper. Office of Planning, St Augustine campus August 30, 2001. UWI/BUS. Status Report on issues regarding articulation with TLIs, Mona, Jamaica: University of the West Indies, Office of the Board for Undergraduate Studies, 2000. UWI/BUS. You We Quality Assurance Forum: What Students? The Discourse on Student Centredness, UWI Magazine, No. 7, 2001. UWI/BUS. You We Quality Assurance Forum: E-Learning: Challenges for the Caribbean, UWI Magazine, No. 6, 2001. UWI/BNCC&DE. The University of the West Indies. Distance Education Centre. The New Management for UWIDEC: Governance, Budget and Implementation Schedule. Position Paper, Board for Non-Campus Countries and Distance Education, UWI, Cave Hill Campus, 2001/2002. UWI/BNCC& DE. The Associate Degree in the Caribbean with Particular Reference to the 299 OECS, Position Paper, Board for Non-Campus Countries and Distance Education, UWI, Cave Hill Campus,May 2002 UWI/BUS. University of the West Indies, Proposal for a Grade Point System, Office of the Board for Undergraduate Studies, Mona Campus, UWI, 2002. UWI. The University of the West Indies School for Graduate Studies and Research. Unlocking Caribbean Potential, March 2002. UWI. University of the West Indies, Official Statistics, 1999/2000, Office of Planning and Institutional Research, Mona Campus, 2000. UWI. Chancellor’s Commission on the Governance of UWI. A New Structure: The Regional University in the 1990s and Beyond. Mona, Jamaica: University of the West Indies, 1994. UWI. Memorandum of Estimates of Needs for the Biennium 2002/2004, University of the West Indies Mona campus, February 2002. UWI. Introducing the University of the West Indies, Cave Hill. Mona. St Augustine: The Vice Chancellery, Office of Administration and Special Initiatives, 2001/2002. UWI. University of the West Indies Mona Campus, Departmental Reports, 2000-2001. Mona Campus, Jamaica, 2001. UWI. Report on University Wide Integration of the Student Administration Systems to Achieve Institutional Effectiveness. Mona, Cave hill, St Augustine. May 2000. UWI. University of the West Indies, Cave Hill Statistics 2001-2002. Cave Hill Campus, Barbados, 2002. UWI. The UWI Cave Hill Campus, Course Descriptions, Summer School 2002 June 3rd to August 4th, 2002. Barbados: Cave Hill Campus, 2002. UWI. Principal’s Reports to Council 1996 to 2002, Mona Campus, Kingston, Jamaica, 2002. UWI. Education Policy Statements and Addresses. Document prepared for the Management Training Programme for Principals & Senior Teachers. Conducted by the University of the West Indies, Institute of Business, Castries St. Lucia, December 1999. UWI. Mona Campus Research Fellowship Programme. The University of the West Indies, Mona Campus 2001. UWI. The University of the West Indies, Vice Chancellor’s Report to Council, April 2002. UWI. How Employers View Our Graduates: The Non-Campus Countries’ Perspective. A Survey 300 Commissioned by the Office of the Board for Undergraduate Studies of the University of the West Indies. December 1998. White, Michael. Centre of Specialization in Tourism and Hospitality. Report for the OECS Tertiary Education Reform Programme, May 1999. White, Michael. OECS Centres of Excellence Endowment Fund. Revised Draft Fund Instruments prepared for the OECS/OERU, February 2002. Whittington Louis A. and Marguerita R. Alleyne. ‘Factors Impacting on the Success of Distance Education Students of the Cave Hill Campus of the University of the West Indies’. Journal of Eastern Caribbean Studies, vol, 25, No.2 June 2000 pp.53-73. Williams, Roosevelt. Consultancy on the Integration of the St. Vincent and the Grenadines Community College. Report prepared for the OECS/EDF HRD Tertiary Level Programme on behalf of the Government of St. Vincent and the Grenadines, September 2001. World Bank. Educational Change in Latin America and the Caribbean, Washington DC: The World Bank, Latin America and the Caribbean Social and Human Development, 1999/2000. World Bank. Higher Education in Developing Countries. Peril and Promise. Washington DC: World Bank Task Force on Higher Education and Society, 2000. World Bank. World Development Report 2000/2001. Oxford, England: Published by Oxford University Press for the World Bank, 2001 World Bank. A Chance to Learn: Knowledge and Finance for Education in Sub-saharan Africa. Washington DC: The World Bank, February 2001. World Bank. A Caribbean Education Strategy. Report Prepared for the World Bank by Didacus Jules, Errol Miller and L. Ancilla Armstrong, Washington DC: World Bank, 1999/2000. World Bank. Access, Quality and Efficiency in Caribbean Education. A Regional Study, Worlds Bank: Washington DC, 1993. World Bank. Constructing Knowledge Societies: New Challenges for Tertiary Education. Washington DC: The World Bank, 2002. World Bank. Reforming Public Institutions and Strengthening Governance: A World Bank Strategy. Washington DC: World Bank, November 2000. Yusuf, Shahid, Weiping Wu and Simon Evenett (eds.) Local Dynamics in a Era of Globalization. Oxford, England: Published by Oxford University Press for the World Bank, 2000. 301